CA2402894C - Cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase iv and method - Google Patents
Cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase iv and method Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- CA2402894C CA2402894C CA2402894A CA2402894A CA2402894C CA 2402894 C CA2402894 C CA 2402894C CA 2402894 A CA2402894 A CA 2402894A CA 2402894 A CA2402894 A CA 2402894A CA 2402894 C CA2402894 C CA 2402894C
- Authority
- CA
- Canada
- Prior art keywords
- compound
- mmol
- inhibitor
- agent
- treating
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Expired - Lifetime
Links
Classifications
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07C271/00—Derivatives of carbamic acids, i.e. compounds containing any of the groups, the nitrogen atom not being part of nitro or nitroso groups
- C07C271/06—Esters of carbamic acids
- C07C271/08—Esters of carbamic acids having oxygen atoms of carbamate groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms
- C07C271/10—Esters of carbamic acids having oxygen atoms of carbamate groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms with the nitrogen atoms of the carbamate groups bound to hydrogen atoms or to acyclic carbon atoms
- C07C271/22—Esters of carbamic acids having oxygen atoms of carbamate groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms with the nitrogen atoms of the carbamate groups bound to hydrogen atoms or to acyclic carbon atoms to carbon atoms of hydrocarbon radicals substituted by carboxyl groups
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
- A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
- A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
- A61K31/40—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. sulpiride, succinimide, tolmetin, buflomedil
- A61K31/403—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. sulpiride, succinimide, tolmetin, buflomedil condensed with carbocyclic rings, e.g. carbazole
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
- A61P1/04—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for ulcers, gastritis or reflux esophagitis, e.g. antacids, inhibitors of acid secretion, mucosal protectants
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P15/00—Drugs for genital or sexual disorders; Contraceptives
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P15/00—Drugs for genital or sexual disorders; Contraceptives
- A61P15/08—Drugs for genital or sexual disorders; Contraceptives for gonadal disorders or for enhancing fertility, e.g. inducers of ovulation or of spermatogenesis
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
- A61P19/02—Drugs for skeletal disorders for joint disorders, e.g. arthritis, arthrosis
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
- A61P19/08—Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease
- A61P19/10—Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease for osteoporosis
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
- A61P25/18—Antipsychotics, i.e. neuroleptics; Drugs for mania or schizophrenia
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
- A61P3/04—Anorexiants; Antiobesity agents
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
- A61P3/06—Antihyperlipidemics
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
- A61P3/08—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
- A61P3/08—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
- A61P3/10—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis for hyperglycaemia, e.g. antidiabetics
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
- A61P31/12—Antivirals
- A61P31/14—Antivirals for RNA viruses
- A61P31/18—Antivirals for RNA viruses for HIV
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
- A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
- A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
- A61P37/06—Immunosuppressants, e.g. drugs for graft rejection
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P5/00—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system
- A61P5/06—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system of the anterior pituitary hormones, e.g. TSH, ACTH, FSH, LH, PRL, GH
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P5/00—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system
- A61P5/48—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system of the pancreatic hormones
- A61P5/50—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system of the pancreatic hormones for increasing or potentiating the activity of insulin
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
- A61P9/10—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07D209/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
- C07D209/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom condensed with one carbocyclic ring
- C07D209/52—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom condensed with one carbocyclic ring condensed with a ring other than six-membered
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
- C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
- C07D401/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing only aliphatic carbon atoms
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
- C07D403/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
- C07D403/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing only aliphatic carbon atoms
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07C2603/00—Systems containing at least three condensed rings
- C07C2603/56—Ring systems containing bridged rings
- C07C2603/58—Ring systems containing bridged rings containing three rings
- C07C2603/70—Ring systems containing bridged rings containing three rings containing only six-membered rings
- C07C2603/74—Adamantanes
Abstract
Dipeptidyl peptidase IV (DP 4) inhibiting compounds are provided having the formula (I) where x is 0 or 1 and y is 0 or 1 (provided that x = 1 when y = 0 and x = 0 when y = 1); n is 0 or 1; X is H or CN; and wherein R1, R2, R3 and R4 are as described herein. A method is also provided for treating diabetes and related diseases, especially Type II diabetes, and other diseases as set out herein, employing such DP 4 inhibitor or a combination of such DP 4 inhibitor and one or more of another antidiabetic agent such as metformin, glyburide, troglitazone, pioglitazone, rosiglitazone and/or insulin and/or one or more of a hypolipidemic agent and/or anti-obesity agent and/or other therapeutic agent.
Description
CYCLOPROPYL-FUSED PYRROLIDINE-BASED INHIBITORS OF
DIPEPTIDYL PEPTIDASE IV AND METHOD
The present invention relates to cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV
(DP-4), and to a method for treating diabetes, especially Type II diabetes, as well as hyperglycemia, Syndrome X, diabetic complications,. hyperinsulinemia, obesity, atherosclerosis and related diseases, as well as various immunomodulatory diseases and chronic inflammatory bowel disease, employing such cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidines alone or in combination with another type antidiabetic agent and/or other type therapeutic agent.
Depeptidyl peptidase IV (DP-4) is a membrane bound non-classical serine aminodipeptidase which is located in a variety of tissues (intestine, liver, lung, kidney) as well as on circulating T-lymphocytes (where the enzyme is known as CD-26). It is responsible for the metabolic cleavage of certain endogenous peptides (GLP-1(7-36), glucagon) in vivo and has demonstrated proteolytic activity against a variety of other peptides (GHRH, NPY, GLP-2, VIP) in vitro.
GLP-1(7-36) is a 29 amino-acid peptide derived by post-translational processing of proglucagon in the small intestine. GLP-1(7-36) has multiple actions in vivo including the stimulation of insulin secretion, inhibition of glucagon secretion, the promotion of satiety, and the slowing of gastric emptying. Based on its physiological profile, the actions of GLP-1(7-36) are expected to be beneficial in the prevention and treatment of type II diabetes and potentially obesity. To support this claim, exogenous administration of GLP-1(7-36) (continuous infusion) in diabetic patients has demonstrated efficacy in this patient population.
Unfortunately GLP-1(7-36) is degraded rapidly in vivo and has been shown to have a short half-life in vivo (tl/2;:z~1.5 min). Based on a study of genetically bred DP-4 KO mice and on in vivo/in vitro studies with selective DP-4 inhibitors, DP-4 has been shown to be the primary degrading enzyme of GLP-1(7-36) in vivo. GLP-1(7-36) is degraded by DP-4 efficiently to GLP-1(9-36), which has been speculated to act as a physiological antagonist to GLP-1(7-36). Thus, inhibition of DP-4 in vivo should potentiate endogenous levels of GLP-1(7-36) and attenuate formation of its antagonist GLP-1(9-36) and thus serve to ameliorate the diabetic condition.
In accordance with the present invention, cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based compounds are provided which inhibit DP-4 and have the structure I
R3 R2 R1 \ x /N y H n wherein x is 0 or 1 and y is 0 or 1 (provided that x = 1 when y = 0 and x = 0 when y = 1) ;
n is 0 or 1;
X is H or CN (that is cyano);
R1, R2, R3 and R4 are the same or different and are independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, bicycloalkyl, tricycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyalkylcycloalkyl, hydroxycycloalkyl, hydroxybicycloalkyl, hydroxytricycloalkyl, bicycloalkylalkyl, alkylthioalkyl,
DIPEPTIDYL PEPTIDASE IV AND METHOD
The present invention relates to cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV
(DP-4), and to a method for treating diabetes, especially Type II diabetes, as well as hyperglycemia, Syndrome X, diabetic complications,. hyperinsulinemia, obesity, atherosclerosis and related diseases, as well as various immunomodulatory diseases and chronic inflammatory bowel disease, employing such cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidines alone or in combination with another type antidiabetic agent and/or other type therapeutic agent.
Depeptidyl peptidase IV (DP-4) is a membrane bound non-classical serine aminodipeptidase which is located in a variety of tissues (intestine, liver, lung, kidney) as well as on circulating T-lymphocytes (where the enzyme is known as CD-26). It is responsible for the metabolic cleavage of certain endogenous peptides (GLP-1(7-36), glucagon) in vivo and has demonstrated proteolytic activity against a variety of other peptides (GHRH, NPY, GLP-2, VIP) in vitro.
GLP-1(7-36) is a 29 amino-acid peptide derived by post-translational processing of proglucagon in the small intestine. GLP-1(7-36) has multiple actions in vivo including the stimulation of insulin secretion, inhibition of glucagon secretion, the promotion of satiety, and the slowing of gastric emptying. Based on its physiological profile, the actions of GLP-1(7-36) are expected to be beneficial in the prevention and treatment of type II diabetes and potentially obesity. To support this claim, exogenous administration of GLP-1(7-36) (continuous infusion) in diabetic patients has demonstrated efficacy in this patient population.
Unfortunately GLP-1(7-36) is degraded rapidly in vivo and has been shown to have a short half-life in vivo (tl/2;:z~1.5 min). Based on a study of genetically bred DP-4 KO mice and on in vivo/in vitro studies with selective DP-4 inhibitors, DP-4 has been shown to be the primary degrading enzyme of GLP-1(7-36) in vivo. GLP-1(7-36) is degraded by DP-4 efficiently to GLP-1(9-36), which has been speculated to act as a physiological antagonist to GLP-1(7-36). Thus, inhibition of DP-4 in vivo should potentiate endogenous levels of GLP-1(7-36) and attenuate formation of its antagonist GLP-1(9-36) and thus serve to ameliorate the diabetic condition.
In accordance with the present invention, cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based compounds are provided which inhibit DP-4 and have the structure I
R3 R2 R1 \ x /N y H n wherein x is 0 or 1 and y is 0 or 1 (provided that x = 1 when y = 0 and x = 0 when y = 1) ;
n is 0 or 1;
X is H or CN (that is cyano);
R1, R2, R3 and R4 are the same or different and are independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, bicycloalkyl, tricycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyalkylcycloalkyl, hydroxycycloalkyl, hydroxybicycloalkyl, hydroxytricycloalkyl, bicycloalkylalkyl, alkylthioalkyl,
- 2 -
3 PCT/US01/07151 arylalkylthioalkyl, cycloalkenyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl and cycloheteroalkylalkyl, all optionally substituted through available carbon atoms with 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 groups selected from hydrogen, halo, alkyl, polyhaloalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, polyhaloalkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, polycycloalkyl, heteroarylamino, arylamino, cycloheteroalkyl, cycloheteroalkylalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, nitro, cyano, amino, substituted amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, thiol, alkylthio, alkylcarbonyl, acyl, alkoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, alkynylaminocarbonyl, alkylaminocarbonyl, alkenylaminocarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, alkylcarbonylamino, arylcarbonylamino, alkylsulfonylamino, alkylaminocarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkylsulfonyl, aminosulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonamido or sulfonyl;
and R1 and R3 may optionally be taken together to form - (CRSR6) m- where m is 2 to 6, and R5 and R6 are the same or different and are independently selected from hydroxy, alkoxy, cyano, H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkenyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, halo, amino, substituted amino, cycloheteroalkylalkyl, alkylcarbonylamino, arylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, aryloxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, or alkylaminocarbonylamino, or R' and R4 may optionally be taken together to form -(CR7RB)P- where p is 2 to 6, and R' and R8 are the same or different and are independently selected from hydroxy, alkoxy, cyano, H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkenyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, halo, amino, substituted amino, cycloheteroalkylalkyl, alkylcarbonylamino, arylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, aryloxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, or alkylaminocarbonylamino, or optionally R' and R3 together \H I /
la with R form a 5 to 7 membered ring containing a total of 2 to 4 heteroatoms selected from N, 0, S, SO, or SO2;
(H I l Tn or optionally R' and R3 together with R4 form a 4 to 8 membered cycloheteroalkyl ring wherein the cycloheteroalkyl ring has an optional aryl ring fused thereto or an optional 3 to 7 membered cycloalkyl ring fused thereto;
and including pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, and prodrug esters thereof, and all stereoisomers thereof.
Thus, the compounds of formula I of the invention include the following structures IA
/N N
H 1~n IB
N N
H 1~n In addition, in accordance with the present invention, a method is provided for treating diabetes, especially Type II diabetes, as well as impaired glucose homeostasis, impaired glucose tolerance, infertility, polycystic ovary syndrome, growth disorders, frailty, arthritis, allograft rejection in transplant-ation, autoimmune diseases (such as scleroderma and
and R1 and R3 may optionally be taken together to form - (CRSR6) m- where m is 2 to 6, and R5 and R6 are the same or different and are independently selected from hydroxy, alkoxy, cyano, H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkenyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, halo, amino, substituted amino, cycloheteroalkylalkyl, alkylcarbonylamino, arylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, aryloxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, or alkylaminocarbonylamino, or R' and R4 may optionally be taken together to form -(CR7RB)P- where p is 2 to 6, and R' and R8 are the same or different and are independently selected from hydroxy, alkoxy, cyano, H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkenyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, halo, amino, substituted amino, cycloheteroalkylalkyl, alkylcarbonylamino, arylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, aryloxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, or alkylaminocarbonylamino, or optionally R' and R3 together \H I /
la with R form a 5 to 7 membered ring containing a total of 2 to 4 heteroatoms selected from N, 0, S, SO, or SO2;
(H I l Tn or optionally R' and R3 together with R4 form a 4 to 8 membered cycloheteroalkyl ring wherein the cycloheteroalkyl ring has an optional aryl ring fused thereto or an optional 3 to 7 membered cycloalkyl ring fused thereto;
and including pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, and prodrug esters thereof, and all stereoisomers thereof.
Thus, the compounds of formula I of the invention include the following structures IA
/N N
H 1~n IB
N N
H 1~n In addition, in accordance with the present invention, a method is provided for treating diabetes, especially Type II diabetes, as well as impaired glucose homeostasis, impaired glucose tolerance, infertility, polycystic ovary syndrome, growth disorders, frailty, arthritis, allograft rejection in transplant-ation, autoimmune diseases (such as scleroderma and
4 -multiple sclerosis), various immunomodulatory diseases (such as lupus erythematosis or psoriasis), AIDS, intestinal diseases (such as necrotizing enteritis, microvillus inclusion disease or celiac disease), inflammatory bowel syndrome, chemotherapy-induced intestinal mucosal atrophy or injury, anorexia nervosa, osteoporosis, Syndrome X, dysmetabolic syndrome, diabetic complications, hyperinsulinemia, obesity, atherosclerosis and related diseases, as well as inflammatory bowel disease(such as Crohn's disease and ulcerative colitis), wherein a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of structure I (which inhibits DP 4) is administered to a human patient in need of treatment.
The conditions, diseases, and maladies collectively referenced to as "Syndrome X" or Metabolic Syndrome are detailed in Johannsson J. Clin. Endocrinol. Metab., 2, 727-734 (1997) .
In addition, in accordance with the present invention, a method is provided for treating diabetes and related diseases as defined above and hereinafter as well as any of the other disease states mentioned above, wherein a therapeutically effective amount of a combination of a compound of structure I and one, two, three or more of other types of antidiabetic agent(s) (which may be employed to treat diabetes and related diseases) and/or one, two or three or more other types of therapeutic agent(s) is administered to a human patient in need of treatment.
The term "diabetes and related diseases" refers to Type II diabetes, Type I diabetes, impaired glucose tolerance, obesity, hyperglycemia, Syndrome X, dysmetabolic syndrome, diabetic complications, dysmetabolic syndrome, and hyperinsulinemia.
The conditions, diseases and maladies collectively referred to as "diabetic complications" include retinopathy, neuropathy and nephropathy, and other known complications of diabetes.
The conditions, diseases, and maladies collectively referenced to as "Syndrome X" or Metabolic Syndrome are detailed in Johannsson J. Clin. Endocrinol. Metab., 2, 727-734 (1997) .
In addition, in accordance with the present invention, a method is provided for treating diabetes and related diseases as defined above and hereinafter as well as any of the other disease states mentioned above, wherein a therapeutically effective amount of a combination of a compound of structure I and one, two, three or more of other types of antidiabetic agent(s) (which may be employed to treat diabetes and related diseases) and/or one, two or three or more other types of therapeutic agent(s) is administered to a human patient in need of treatment.
The term "diabetes and related diseases" refers to Type II diabetes, Type I diabetes, impaired glucose tolerance, obesity, hyperglycemia, Syndrome X, dysmetabolic syndrome, diabetic complications, dysmetabolic syndrome, and hyperinsulinemia.
The conditions, diseases and maladies collectively referred to as "diabetic complications" include retinopathy, neuropathy and nephropathy, and other known complications of diabetes.
5 -The term "other type(s) of therapeutic agents" as employed herein refers to one or more antidiabetic agents (other than DP4 inhibitors of formula I), one or more anti-obesity agents, and/or one or more lipid-modulating agents (including anti-atherosclerosis agents), and/or one or more infertility agents, one or more agents for treating polycystic ovary syndrome, one or more agents for treating growth-disorders, one or more agents for treating frailty, one or more agents for treating arthritis, one or more agents for preventing allograft rejection in transplantation, one or more agents for treating autoimmune diseases, one or more anti-AIDS
agents, one or more anti-osteoporosis agents, one or more agents for treating immunomodulatory diseases, one or more agents for treating chronic inflammatory bowel disease or syndrome and/or one or more agents for treating anorexia nervosa.
The term "lipid-modulating" agent as employed herein refers to agents which lower LDL and/or raise HDL
and/or lower triglycerides and/or lower total cholesterol and/or other known mechanisms for therapeutically treating lipid disorders.
In the above methods of the invention, the compound of structure I will be employed in a weight ratio to the antidiabetic agent or other type therapeutic agent (depending upon its mode of operation) within the range from about 0.01:1 to about 500:1, preferably from about 0.1:1 to about 100:1, more preferably from about 0.2:1 to about 10:1.
Preferred are compounds of formula I wherein R3 is H or alkyl, R1 is H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, bicycloalkyl, tricycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxytricycloalkyl, hydroxycycloalkyl, hydroxybicycloalkyl, or hydroxyalkylcycloalkyl, R2 is H or alkyl, n is 0, X is CN, x is 0 or 1 and y is 0 or 1.
agents, one or more anti-osteoporosis agents, one or more agents for treating immunomodulatory diseases, one or more agents for treating chronic inflammatory bowel disease or syndrome and/or one or more agents for treating anorexia nervosa.
The term "lipid-modulating" agent as employed herein refers to agents which lower LDL and/or raise HDL
and/or lower triglycerides and/or lower total cholesterol and/or other known mechanisms for therapeutically treating lipid disorders.
In the above methods of the invention, the compound of structure I will be employed in a weight ratio to the antidiabetic agent or other type therapeutic agent (depending upon its mode of operation) within the range from about 0.01:1 to about 500:1, preferably from about 0.1:1 to about 100:1, more preferably from about 0.2:1 to about 10:1.
Preferred are compounds of formula I wherein R3 is H or alkyl, R1 is H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, bicycloalkyl, tricycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxytricycloalkyl, hydroxycycloalkyl, hydroxybicycloalkyl, or hydroxyalkylcycloalkyl, R2 is H or alkyl, n is 0, X is CN, x is 0 or 1 and y is 0 or 1.
- 6 -Most preferred are preferred compounds of formula I
I as described above where X is CN or RCN
...and/or-wherein the fused cyclopropyl group is
I as described above where X is CN or RCN
...and/or-wherein the fused cyclopropyl group is
7 identified as Thus, preferred compounds of formula I of the invention will include the moiety:
( l NV / Y
CN
x or x Y
N ) CN
Particularly preferred are the following compounds:
A) R1 H/6 .``SH
[iS, 2 (2S) , 3S, 5S]
wherein R1 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, bicycloalkyl, tricycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxycycloalkyl, hydroxyalkylcycloalkyl, hydroxybicycloalkyl or hydroxytricycloalkyl;
H
B' Rl S5 N3 1 ,i H2N S S 2 R ~~H
O CN
[1R, 2S, 3 (2S) , 5S]
wherein R1 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, bicycloalkyl, tricycloalkyl, hydroxybicycloalkyl, hydroxytricycloalkyl, 5 alkylcycloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxycycloalkyl or hydroxyalkylcycloalkyl as well as the following:
%N' HO
CN N
F NHZ 0 H2N o NC
F HO
N
0 NC , O NC 0 CN , O NC and HO
Compounds of the structure I may be generated by the methods as shown in the following reaction schemes and the description thereof.
Referring to Reaction Scheme 1, compound 1, where PG1 is a common amine protecting group such as Boc, Cbz, or FMOC and X1 is H or C02R9 as set out below, may be generated by methods as described herein or in the literature (for example see Sagnard et al, Tet-Lett., 1995, 36, pp. 3148-3152, Tverezovsky et al, Tetrahedron,
( l NV / Y
CN
x or x Y
N ) CN
Particularly preferred are the following compounds:
A) R1 H/6 .``SH
[iS, 2 (2S) , 3S, 5S]
wherein R1 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, bicycloalkyl, tricycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxycycloalkyl, hydroxyalkylcycloalkyl, hydroxybicycloalkyl or hydroxytricycloalkyl;
H
B' Rl S5 N3 1 ,i H2N S S 2 R ~~H
O CN
[1R, 2S, 3 (2S) , 5S]
wherein R1 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, bicycloalkyl, tricycloalkyl, hydroxybicycloalkyl, hydroxytricycloalkyl, 5 alkylcycloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxycycloalkyl or hydroxyalkylcycloalkyl as well as the following:
%N' HO
CN N
F NHZ 0 H2N o NC
F HO
N
0 NC , O NC 0 CN , O NC and HO
Compounds of the structure I may be generated by the methods as shown in the following reaction schemes and the description thereof.
Referring to Reaction Scheme 1, compound 1, where PG1 is a common amine protecting group such as Boc, Cbz, or FMOC and X1 is H or C02R9 as set out below, may be generated by methods as described herein or in the literature (for example see Sagnard et al, Tet-Lett., 1995, 36, pp. 3148-3152, Tverezovsky et al, Tetrahedron,
- 8 -1997, 53, pp. 14773-14792, Hanessian et al, Bioorg. Med.
Chem. Lett., 1998, 8, p. 2123-2128). Removal of the'PG1 group by conventional methods (e.g. (1) TFA or HC1 when PG1 is Boc, or (2) H2/Pd/C, TMSI when PG1 is Cbz, or (3) Et2NH when PG1 is (FMOC) affords the free amine 2. Amine 2 may be coupled to various protected amino acids such as 3 (where PG2 can be any of the PG1 protecting groups) using standard peptide coupling conditions (e.g.
EDAC/HOAT, i-BuCOCOCl/TEA, PyBop/NMM) to afford the corresponding dipeptide 4. Removal of the amine protecting group PG2 provides compound Ia of the invention where X=H.
In the case where X1=C02R9 (where R9 is alkyl or aralkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl, t-butyl, or benzyl), the ester may be hydrolyzed under a variety of conditions, for example with aqueous NaOH in a suitable solvent such as methanol, THF, or dioxane, to provide the acid 5. Conversion of the acid group to the primary carboxamide, affording 6, may be effected by activation of the acid group (e.g. employing i-BuOCOC1/TEA or EDAC) followed by treatment with NH3 or an ammonia equivalent in a solvent such as dioxane, ether, or methanol. The amide functionality may be converted to the nitrile group by a variety of standard conditions (e.g.
POC13/pyridine/imidazole or cyanuric chloride/DMF or trifluoroacetic anhydride, THF, pyridine) to give 7.
Finally, removal of the PG2 protecting group similar to above provides compound of the invention Ib.
In a different sequence (Scheme 2), compound 1 where X1 is C02R9 may be saponified to the acid and subsequently amidated as described above to give amide 8.
Removal of the PG1 group followed by peptide coupling to 3 affords compound 6, an intermediate in the synthesis of Ib.
Alternately, the carboxamide group in 8 may be converted to the nitrile as described above to give compound 9. Deprotection of PG1 affords 10 which may be
Chem. Lett., 1998, 8, p. 2123-2128). Removal of the'PG1 group by conventional methods (e.g. (1) TFA or HC1 when PG1 is Boc, or (2) H2/Pd/C, TMSI when PG1 is Cbz, or (3) Et2NH when PG1 is (FMOC) affords the free amine 2. Amine 2 may be coupled to various protected amino acids such as 3 (where PG2 can be any of the PG1 protecting groups) using standard peptide coupling conditions (e.g.
EDAC/HOAT, i-BuCOCOCl/TEA, PyBop/NMM) to afford the corresponding dipeptide 4. Removal of the amine protecting group PG2 provides compound Ia of the invention where X=H.
In the case where X1=C02R9 (where R9 is alkyl or aralkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl, t-butyl, or benzyl), the ester may be hydrolyzed under a variety of conditions, for example with aqueous NaOH in a suitable solvent such as methanol, THF, or dioxane, to provide the acid 5. Conversion of the acid group to the primary carboxamide, affording 6, may be effected by activation of the acid group (e.g. employing i-BuOCOC1/TEA or EDAC) followed by treatment with NH3 or an ammonia equivalent in a solvent such as dioxane, ether, or methanol. The amide functionality may be converted to the nitrile group by a variety of standard conditions (e.g.
POC13/pyridine/imidazole or cyanuric chloride/DMF or trifluoroacetic anhydride, THF, pyridine) to give 7.
Finally, removal of the PG2 protecting group similar to above provides compound of the invention Ib.
In a different sequence (Scheme 2), compound 1 where X1 is C02R9 may be saponified to the acid and subsequently amidated as described above to give amide 8.
Removal of the PG1 group followed by peptide coupling to 3 affords compound 6, an intermediate in the synthesis of Ib.
Alternately, the carboxamide group in 8 may be converted to the nitrile as described above to give compound 9. Deprotection of PG1 affords 10 which may be
- 9 -subject to standard peptide coupling conditions to afford 7, an intermediate in the synthesis of Ib. Compound 10 may also be generated by oxidation of the amine 2 (e.g.
NCS) followed by hydrolysis and subsequent cyanide treatment. Compound 10 may be obtained as a mixture of stereoisomers or a single isomer/diastereomer which may be epimerized (employing conventional procedures) to afford a mixture of stereoisomers.
Scheme 1 Rz OH
a ix N
PG ~N ()y Y HN ()y PG2 O
t I X1 2x1 b X1 = H, C02R9 2 (~ 1 ~ R 2 Ox~
R3 R1 N N\ )Y 0 R3 N -I _N~(. )y X'= H IXI
4 la d X1 = CO2R
R2 ()x~ R2 ()x1 R3 N, )y e R3 N N \ ' )y f ()x C R1 R2 R3~ N `JN Y( )y R3. H N 1( )y 7 Ib a. PG1 =Boc, TFA or HCI; PG1 = Cbz, H2/Pd/C or TMSI; PG1 = FMOC, Et2NH b.
EDAC, HOBT, DMF or i-BuOCOCI/ TEA or PyBop, NMM c. PG2 = PG1, (see conditions for a) d. LiOH or NaOH MeOH or THF/H20 or dioxane e. i-BuOCOCI/ NMM or i-BuOCOCI/TEA or EDAC, then NH3 in dioxane or Et20 f. POCI3, pyridine, imidazole or cyanuric chloride, DMF or TFAA, THF, pyridine.
NCS) followed by hydrolysis and subsequent cyanide treatment. Compound 10 may be obtained as a mixture of stereoisomers or a single isomer/diastereomer which may be epimerized (employing conventional procedures) to afford a mixture of stereoisomers.
Scheme 1 Rz OH
a ix N
PG ~N ()y Y HN ()y PG2 O
t I X1 2x1 b X1 = H, C02R9 2 (~ 1 ~ R 2 Ox~
R3 R1 N N\ )Y 0 R3 N -I _N~(. )y X'= H IXI
4 la d X1 = CO2R
R2 ()x~ R2 ()x1 R3 N, )y e R3 N N \ ' )y f ()x C R1 R2 R3~ N `JN Y( )y R3. H N 1( )y 7 Ib a. PG1 =Boc, TFA or HCI; PG1 = Cbz, H2/Pd/C or TMSI; PG1 = FMOC, Et2NH b.
EDAC, HOBT, DMF or i-BuOCOCI/ TEA or PyBop, NMM c. PG2 = PG1, (see conditions for a) d. LiOH or NaOH MeOH or THF/H20 or dioxane e. i-BuOCOCI/ NMM or i-BuOCOCI/TEA or EDAC, then NH3 in dioxane or Et20 f. POCI3, pyridine, imidazole or cyanuric chloride, DMF or TFAA, THF, pyridine.
- 10 -Scheme 2 ( )x 1 a, b ( )x~ c PGA NY( )y PG 1' N ()y R~ R2 6 lb I Y
CO2Ra 8 CONH2 R3-, N OH
d. peptide coupling e conditions RZ
Ox~ c x PG2 O 3 vo- 7 0 lb ( PG, N )y HNY( )y d. peptide coupling 9 CN 10 CN conditions ( )x~
HN,( )y a. LiOH or NaOH in MeOH or THE/H20 or dioxane b. i-BuOCOCV NMM or i-BuOCOCI/TEA or EDAC, then NH3 in dioxane or Et2O c.PG, =Boc, TFA or HCI; PG, = Cbz, H2/Pd/C or TMSI; PG1 = FMOC, Et2NH d. EDAC, HOBT, DMF or i-BuOCOCV TEA or PyBop, NMM e. POCI3, pyridine, imidazole or cyanuric chloride, DMF.
In a like manner, (3-amino acids such as PG2 N, 1OH
may be coupled with 2, the free amine of 8, or 10 to give the corresponding amides which may be converted to the (3-amino acid derivatives of compound Ia or Ib following the same chemistry.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term "lower alkyl", "alkyl" or "alk" as employed herein alone or as part of another group includes both straight and branched chain hydrocarbons, containing 1 to 20 carbons, preferably 1 to 10 carbons, more preferably 1 to 8 carbons, in the normal chain, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, t-butyl, isobutyl, pentyl, hexyl, isohexyl, heptyl, 4,4-dimethylpentyl, octyl, 2,2,4-trimethyl-pentyl, nonyl, decyl, undecyl, dodecyl,
CO2Ra 8 CONH2 R3-, N OH
d. peptide coupling e conditions RZ
Ox~ c x PG2 O 3 vo- 7 0 lb ( PG, N )y HNY( )y d. peptide coupling 9 CN 10 CN conditions ( )x~
HN,( )y a. LiOH or NaOH in MeOH or THE/H20 or dioxane b. i-BuOCOCV NMM or i-BuOCOCI/TEA or EDAC, then NH3 in dioxane or Et2O c.PG, =Boc, TFA or HCI; PG, = Cbz, H2/Pd/C or TMSI; PG1 = FMOC, Et2NH d. EDAC, HOBT, DMF or i-BuOCOCV TEA or PyBop, NMM e. POCI3, pyridine, imidazole or cyanuric chloride, DMF.
In a like manner, (3-amino acids such as PG2 N, 1OH
may be coupled with 2, the free amine of 8, or 10 to give the corresponding amides which may be converted to the (3-amino acid derivatives of compound Ia or Ib following the same chemistry.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term "lower alkyl", "alkyl" or "alk" as employed herein alone or as part of another group includes both straight and branched chain hydrocarbons, containing 1 to 20 carbons, preferably 1 to 10 carbons, more preferably 1 to 8 carbons, in the normal chain, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, t-butyl, isobutyl, pentyl, hexyl, isohexyl, heptyl, 4,4-dimethylpentyl, octyl, 2,2,4-trimethyl-pentyl, nonyl, decyl, undecyl, dodecyl,
- 11 -the various branched chain isomers thereof, and the like as well as such groups including 1 to 4 substituents such as halo, for example F, Br, Cl or I or CF3, alkyl, alkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, aryl(aryl) or diaryl, arylalkyl, arylalkyloxy, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyloxy, amino, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, acyl, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heteroarylalkyl, .heteroarylalkoxy, aryloxyalkyl, alkylthio, arylalkylthio, aryloxyaryl, alkylamido, alkanoylamino, arylcarbonylamino, nitro, cyano, thiol, haloalkyl, trihaloalkyl and/or alkylthio.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term "cycloalkyl"
as employed herein alone or as part of another group includes saturated or partially unsaturated (containing 1 or 2 double bonds) cyclic hydrocarbon groups containing 1 to 3 rings, including monocyclic alkyl, bicyclic alkyl (or bicycloalkyl) and tricyclic alkyl (tricycloalkyl), containing a total of 3 to 20 carbons forming the ring, preferably 3 to 10 carbons, forming the ring and which may be fused to 1 or 2 aromatic rings as described for aryl, which includes cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, cyclodecyl and cyclododecyl, cyclohexenyl, adamantyl, CC A, ' any of which groups may be optionally substituted with 1 to 4 substituents such as halogen, alkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, aryl, aryloxy, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkylamido, alkanoylamino, oxo, acyl, arylcarbonylamino, amino, nitro, cyano, thiol and/or alkylthio and/or any of the.substituents for alkyl.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term "cycloalkyl"
as employed herein alone or as part of another group includes saturated or partially unsaturated (containing 1 or 2 double bonds) cyclic hydrocarbon groups containing 1 to 3 rings, including monocyclic alkyl, bicyclic alkyl (or bicycloalkyl) and tricyclic alkyl (tricycloalkyl), containing a total of 3 to 20 carbons forming the ring, preferably 3 to 10 carbons, forming the ring and which may be fused to 1 or 2 aromatic rings as described for aryl, which includes cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, cyclodecyl and cyclododecyl, cyclohexenyl, adamantyl, CC A, ' any of which groups may be optionally substituted with 1 to 4 substituents such as halogen, alkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, aryl, aryloxy, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkylamido, alkanoylamino, oxo, acyl, arylcarbonylamino, amino, nitro, cyano, thiol and/or alkylthio and/or any of the.substituents for alkyl.
- 12 -The term "cycloalkenyl" as employed herein alone or as part of another group refers to cyclic hydrocarbons containing 3 to 12 carbons, preferably 5 to 10 carbons and 1 or 2 double bonds. Exemplary cycloalkenyl groups include cyclopentenyl, cyclohexenyl, cycloheptenyl, cyclooctenyl, cyclohexadienyl, and cycloheptadienyl, which may be optionally substituted as defined for cycloalkyl.
The term "cycloalkylene" as employed herein refers to a "cycloalkyl" group which includes free bonds and thus is a linking group such as and the like, and may optionally be substituted as defined above for "cycloalkyl".
The term "alkanoyl" as used herein alone or as part of another group refers to alkyl linked to a carbonyl group.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term "lower alkenyl" or "alkenyl" as used herein by itself or as part of another group refers to straight or branched chain radicals of 2 to 20 carbons, preferably 2 to 12 carbons, and more preferably 1 to 8 carbons in the normal chain, which include one to six double bonds in the normal chain, such as vinyl, 2-propenyl, 3-butenyl, 2-butenyl, 4-pentenyl, 3-pentenyl, 2-hexenyl, 3-hexenyl, 2-heptenyl, 3-heptenyl, 4-heptenyl, 3-octenyl, 3-nonenyl, 4-decenyl, 3-undecenyl, 4-dodecenyl, 4,8,12-tetradecatrienyl, and the like, and which may be optionally substituted with 1 to 4 substituents, namely, halogen, haloalkyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, amino, hydroxy, heteroaryl, cycloheteroalkyl, alkanoylamino, alkylamido, arylcarbonyl-amino, nitro, cyano, thiol, alkylthio and/or any of the alkyl substituents set out herein.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term "lower alkynyl" or "alkynyl" as used herein by itself or as part of another group refers to straight or branched chain
The term "cycloalkylene" as employed herein refers to a "cycloalkyl" group which includes free bonds and thus is a linking group such as and the like, and may optionally be substituted as defined above for "cycloalkyl".
The term "alkanoyl" as used herein alone or as part of another group refers to alkyl linked to a carbonyl group.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term "lower alkenyl" or "alkenyl" as used herein by itself or as part of another group refers to straight or branched chain radicals of 2 to 20 carbons, preferably 2 to 12 carbons, and more preferably 1 to 8 carbons in the normal chain, which include one to six double bonds in the normal chain, such as vinyl, 2-propenyl, 3-butenyl, 2-butenyl, 4-pentenyl, 3-pentenyl, 2-hexenyl, 3-hexenyl, 2-heptenyl, 3-heptenyl, 4-heptenyl, 3-octenyl, 3-nonenyl, 4-decenyl, 3-undecenyl, 4-dodecenyl, 4,8,12-tetradecatrienyl, and the like, and which may be optionally substituted with 1 to 4 substituents, namely, halogen, haloalkyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, amino, hydroxy, heteroaryl, cycloheteroalkyl, alkanoylamino, alkylamido, arylcarbonyl-amino, nitro, cyano, thiol, alkylthio and/or any of the alkyl substituents set out herein.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term "lower alkynyl" or "alkynyl" as used herein by itself or as part of another group refers to straight or branched chain
- 13 -radicals of 2 to 20 carbons, preferably 2 to 12 carbons and more preferably 2 to 8 carbons in the normal chain, which include one triple bond in the normal chain, such as 2-propynyl, 3-butynyl, 2-butynyl, 4-pentynyl, 3-pentynyl, 2-hexynyl, 3-hexynyl, 2-heptynyl, 3-heptynyl, 4-heptynyl, 3-octynyl, 3-nonynyl, 4-decynyl,3-undecynyl, 4-dodecynyl and the like, and which may be optionally substituted with 1 to 4 substituents, namely, halogen, haloalkyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, amino, heteroaryl, cycloheteroalkyl, hydroxy, alkanoylamino, alkylamido, arylcarbonylamino, nitro, cyano, thiol, and/or alkylthio, and/or any of the alkyl substituents set out herein.
The terms "arylalkenyl" and "arylalkynyl" as used alone or as part of another group refer to alkenyl and alkynyl groups as described above having an aryl substituent.
Where alkyl groups as defined above have single bonds for attachment to other groups at two different carbon atoms, they are termed "alkylene" groups and may optionally be substituted as defined above for "alkyl".
Where alkenyl groups as defined above and alkynyl groups as defined above, respectively, have single bonds for attachment at two different carbon atoms, they are termed "alkenylene groups" and "alkynylene groups", respectively, and may optionally be substituted as defined above for "alkenyl" and "alkynyl".
The term "halogen" or "halo" as used herein alone or as part of another group refers to chlorine, bromine, fluorine, and iodine as well as CF3, with chlorine or fluorine being preferred.
The term "metal ion" refers to alkali metal ions such as sodium, potassium or lithium and alkaline earth metal ions such as magnesium and calcium, as well as zinc and aluminum.
The terms "arylalkenyl" and "arylalkynyl" as used alone or as part of another group refer to alkenyl and alkynyl groups as described above having an aryl substituent.
Where alkyl groups as defined above have single bonds for attachment to other groups at two different carbon atoms, they are termed "alkylene" groups and may optionally be substituted as defined above for "alkyl".
Where alkenyl groups as defined above and alkynyl groups as defined above, respectively, have single bonds for attachment at two different carbon atoms, they are termed "alkenylene groups" and "alkynylene groups", respectively, and may optionally be substituted as defined above for "alkenyl" and "alkynyl".
The term "halogen" or "halo" as used herein alone or as part of another group refers to chlorine, bromine, fluorine, and iodine as well as CF3, with chlorine or fluorine being preferred.
The term "metal ion" refers to alkali metal ions such as sodium, potassium or lithium and alkaline earth metal ions such as magnesium and calcium, as well as zinc and aluminum.
- 14 -Unless otherwise indicated, the term "aryl" as employed herein alone or as part of another group refers to monocyclic and bicyclic aromatic groups containing 6 to 10 carbons in the ring portion (such as phenyl or naphthyl including 1-naphthyl and 2-naphthyl) and may optionally include one to three additional rings fused to a carbocyclic ring or a heterocyclic ring (such as aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl or cycloheteroalkyl rings for example O
= o cc-i 00-<J3-. / 7 C
O O
and may be optionally substituted through available carbon atoms with 1, 2, or 3 groups selected from hydrogen, halo, haloalkyl, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, alkenyl, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkynyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, cycloheteroalkylalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, aryloxy, aryloxyalkyl, arylalkoxy, arylthio, arylazo, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylalkenyl, heteroarylheteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, hydroxy, nitro, cyano, amino, substituted amino wherein the amino includes 1 or 2 substituents (which are alkyl, aryl or any of the other aryl compounds mentioned in the definitions), thiol, alkylthio, arylthio, heteroarylthio, arylthioalkyl, alkoxyarylthio, alkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, alkylaminocarbonyl, arylaminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, arylcarbonyloxy, alkylcarbonylamino, arylcarbonylamino, arylsulfinyl, arylsulfinylalkyl,
= o cc-i 00-<J3-. / 7 C
O O
and may be optionally substituted through available carbon atoms with 1, 2, or 3 groups selected from hydrogen, halo, haloalkyl, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, alkenyl, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkynyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, cycloheteroalkylalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, aryloxy, aryloxyalkyl, arylalkoxy, arylthio, arylazo, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylalkenyl, heteroarylheteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, hydroxy, nitro, cyano, amino, substituted amino wherein the amino includes 1 or 2 substituents (which are alkyl, aryl or any of the other aryl compounds mentioned in the definitions), thiol, alkylthio, arylthio, heteroarylthio, arylthioalkyl, alkoxyarylthio, alkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, alkylaminocarbonyl, arylaminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, arylcarbonyloxy, alkylcarbonylamino, arylcarbonylamino, arylsulfinyl, arylsulfinylalkyl,
- 15 -arylsulfonylamino or arylsulfon-aminocarbonyl and/or any of the alkyl substituents set out herein.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term "lower alkoxy", "alkoxy", "aryloxy" or "aralkoxy" as employed herein alone or as part of another group includes any of the above alkyl, aralkyl or aryl groups linked to an oxygen atom.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term "substituted amino" as employed herein alone or as part of another group refers to amino substituted with one or two substituents, which may be the same or different, such as alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, cycloheteroalkylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, haloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl or thioalkyl. These substituents may be further substituted with any of the R1 groups or substituents for R1 as set out above. In addition, the amino substituents may be taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached to form 1-pyrrolidinyl, 1-piperidinyl, 1-azepinyl, 4-morpholinyl, 4-thiamorpholinyl, 1-piperazinyl, 4-alkyl-l-piperazinyl, 4-arylalkyl-l-piperazinyl, 4-diarylalkyl-l-piperazinyl, 1-pyrrolidinyl, 1-piperidinyl, or 1-azepinyl, optionally substituted with alkyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, halo, trifluoromethyl or hydroxy.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term "lower alkylthio", alkylthio", "arylthio" or "aralkylthio" as employed herein alone or as part of another group includes any of the above alkyl, aralkyl or aryl groups linked to a sulfur atom.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term "lower alkylamino", "alkylamino", "arylamino", or "arylalkylamino" as employed herein alone or as part of another group includes any of the above alkyl, aryl or arylalkyl groups linked to a nitrogen atom.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term "acyl" as employed herein by itself or part of another group, as
Unless otherwise indicated, the term "lower alkoxy", "alkoxy", "aryloxy" or "aralkoxy" as employed herein alone or as part of another group includes any of the above alkyl, aralkyl or aryl groups linked to an oxygen atom.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term "substituted amino" as employed herein alone or as part of another group refers to amino substituted with one or two substituents, which may be the same or different, such as alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, cycloheteroalkylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, haloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl or thioalkyl. These substituents may be further substituted with any of the R1 groups or substituents for R1 as set out above. In addition, the amino substituents may be taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached to form 1-pyrrolidinyl, 1-piperidinyl, 1-azepinyl, 4-morpholinyl, 4-thiamorpholinyl, 1-piperazinyl, 4-alkyl-l-piperazinyl, 4-arylalkyl-l-piperazinyl, 4-diarylalkyl-l-piperazinyl, 1-pyrrolidinyl, 1-piperidinyl, or 1-azepinyl, optionally substituted with alkyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, halo, trifluoromethyl or hydroxy.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term "lower alkylthio", alkylthio", "arylthio" or "aralkylthio" as employed herein alone or as part of another group includes any of the above alkyl, aralkyl or aryl groups linked to a sulfur atom.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term "lower alkylamino", "alkylamino", "arylamino", or "arylalkylamino" as employed herein alone or as part of another group includes any of the above alkyl, aryl or arylalkyl groups linked to a nitrogen atom.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term "acyl" as employed herein by itself or part of another group, as
- 16 -defined herein, refers to an organic radical linked to a Q
carbonyl C group; examples of acyl groups include any ..of the R1 groups attached to a carbonyl, such as alkanoyl, alkenoyl, aroyl, aralkanoyl, heteroaroyl, cycloalkanoyl, cycloheteroalkanoyl and the like.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term "cycloheteroalkyl" as used herein alone or as part of another group refers to a 5-, 6- or 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring which includes 1 to 2 hetero atoms such as nitrogen, oxygen and/or sulfur, linked through a carbon atom or a heteroatom, where possible, optionally via the linker (CH2)r (where r is 1, 2 or 3), such as:
O
O N S\ N , \ (0") (N.-I) NJ
O N I
N
I -or- N, N J
N\' O~ j Sam/ ~/O
and the like. The above groups may include 1 to 4 substituents such as alkyl, halo, oxo and/or any of the alkyl substituents set out herein. In addition, any of the cycloheteroalkyl rings can be fused to a cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl or cycloheteroalkyl ring.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term "heteroaryl"
as used herein alone or as part of another group refers to a 5- or 6- membered aromatic ring which includes 1, 2,
carbonyl C group; examples of acyl groups include any ..of the R1 groups attached to a carbonyl, such as alkanoyl, alkenoyl, aroyl, aralkanoyl, heteroaroyl, cycloalkanoyl, cycloheteroalkanoyl and the like.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term "cycloheteroalkyl" as used herein alone or as part of another group refers to a 5-, 6- or 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring which includes 1 to 2 hetero atoms such as nitrogen, oxygen and/or sulfur, linked through a carbon atom or a heteroatom, where possible, optionally via the linker (CH2)r (where r is 1, 2 or 3), such as:
O
O N S\ N , \ (0") (N.-I) NJ
O N I
N
I -or- N, N J
N\' O~ j Sam/ ~/O
and the like. The above groups may include 1 to 4 substituents such as alkyl, halo, oxo and/or any of the alkyl substituents set out herein. In addition, any of the cycloheteroalkyl rings can be fused to a cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl or cycloheteroalkyl ring.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term "heteroaryl"
as used herein alone or as part of another group refers to a 5- or 6- membered aromatic ring which includes 1, 2,
- 17 -3 or 4 hetero atoms such as nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur, and such rings fused to an aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl or cycloheteroalkyl ring (e.g. benzothiophenyl, indolyl), and includes possible N-oxides. The heteroaryl group may optionally include 1 to 4 substituents such as any of the substituents set out above for alkyl. Examples of heteroaryl groups include the following:
O /
Coil- CO O
N~ /N N
H
N-N N-N N-N N--~ N=N
/S /O N .O/ N
N
and the like.
The term "cycloheteroalkylalkyl" as used herein alone or as part of another group refers to cycloheteroalkyl groups as defined above linked through a C atom or heteroatom to a (CH2)r chain.
The term "heteroarylalkyl" or "heteroarylalkenyl"
as used herein alone or as part of another group refers to a heteroaryl group as defined above linked through a C
atom or heteroatom to a -(CH2)r- chain, alkylene or alkenylene as defined above.
The term "polyhaloalkyl" as used herein refers to an "alkyl" group as defined above which includes from 2 to 9, preferably from 2 to 5, halo substituents, such as F or Cl, preferably F, such as CF3CH2, CF3 or CF3CF2CH2.
O /
Coil- CO O
N~ /N N
H
N-N N-N N-N N--~ N=N
/S /O N .O/ N
N
and the like.
The term "cycloheteroalkylalkyl" as used herein alone or as part of another group refers to cycloheteroalkyl groups as defined above linked through a C atom or heteroatom to a (CH2)r chain.
The term "heteroarylalkyl" or "heteroarylalkenyl"
as used herein alone or as part of another group refers to a heteroaryl group as defined above linked through a C
atom or heteroatom to a -(CH2)r- chain, alkylene or alkenylene as defined above.
The term "polyhaloalkyl" as used herein refers to an "alkyl" group as defined above which includes from 2 to 9, preferably from 2 to 5, halo substituents, such as F or Cl, preferably F, such as CF3CH2, CF3 or CF3CF2CH2.
- 18 -The term "polyhaloalkoxy" as used herein refers to an "alkoxy" or "alkyloxy" group as defined above which includes from 2 to 9, preferably from 2 to 5, halo substituents, such as F or Cl, preferably F, such as CF3CH2O, CF3O or CF3CF2CH2O.
All stereoisomers of the compounds of the instant invention are contemplated, either in admixture or in pure or substantially pure form. The compounds of the present invention can have asymmetric centers at any of the carbon atoms including any one or the R substituents.
Consequently, compounds of formula I can exist in enantiomeric or diastereomeric forms or in mixtures thereof. The processes for preparation can utilize racemates, enantiomers or diastereomers as starting materials. When diastereomeric or enantiomeric products are prepared, they can be separated by conventional methods for example, chromatographic or fractional crystallization.
Where desired, the compounds of structure I may be used in combination with one or more other types of antidiabetic agents (employed to treat diabetes and related diseases) and/or one or more other types of therapeutic agents which may be administered orally in the same dosage form, in a separate oral dosage form or by injection.
The other type of antidiabetic agent which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of formula I may be 1,2,3 or more antidiabetic agents or antihyperglycemic agents including insulin secretagogues or insulin sensitizers, or other antidiabetic agents preferably having a mechanism of action different from DP4 inhibition and may include biguanides, sulfonyl ureas, glucosidase inhibitors, PPAR y agonists, such as thiazolidinediones, SGLT2 inhibitors, PPAR a/y dual agonists, aP2 inhibitors, glycogen phosphorylase inhibitors, advanced glycosylation end (AGE) products inhibitors, and/or meglitinides, as well as insulin,
All stereoisomers of the compounds of the instant invention are contemplated, either in admixture or in pure or substantially pure form. The compounds of the present invention can have asymmetric centers at any of the carbon atoms including any one or the R substituents.
Consequently, compounds of formula I can exist in enantiomeric or diastereomeric forms or in mixtures thereof. The processes for preparation can utilize racemates, enantiomers or diastereomers as starting materials. When diastereomeric or enantiomeric products are prepared, they can be separated by conventional methods for example, chromatographic or fractional crystallization.
Where desired, the compounds of structure I may be used in combination with one or more other types of antidiabetic agents (employed to treat diabetes and related diseases) and/or one or more other types of therapeutic agents which may be administered orally in the same dosage form, in a separate oral dosage form or by injection.
The other type of antidiabetic agent which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of formula I may be 1,2,3 or more antidiabetic agents or antihyperglycemic agents including insulin secretagogues or insulin sensitizers, or other antidiabetic agents preferably having a mechanism of action different from DP4 inhibition and may include biguanides, sulfonyl ureas, glucosidase inhibitors, PPAR y agonists, such as thiazolidinediones, SGLT2 inhibitors, PPAR a/y dual agonists, aP2 inhibitors, glycogen phosphorylase inhibitors, advanced glycosylation end (AGE) products inhibitors, and/or meglitinides, as well as insulin,
- 19 -and/or glucagon-like peptide-1 (GLP-1) or mimetics thereof.
It is believed that the use of the compounds of structure I in combination with 1, 2, 3 or more other antidiabetic agents produces antihyperglycemic results greater than that possible from each of these medicaments alone and greater than the combined additive anti-hyperglycemic effects produced by these medicaments.
The other antidiabetic agent may be an oral antihyperglycemic agent preferably a biguanide such as metformin or phenformin or salts thereof, preferably metformin HC1.
Where the other antidiabetic agent is a biguanide, the compounds of structure I will be employed in a weight ratio to biguanide within the range from about 0.01:1 to about 100:1, preferably from about 0.1:1 to about 5:1.
The other antidiabetic agent may also preferably be a sulfonyl urea such as glyburide (also known as glibenclamide), glimepiride (disclosed in U.S. Patent No.
4,379,785), glipizide, gliclazide or chlorpropamide, other known sulfonylureas or other antihyperglycemic agents which act on the ATP-dependent channel of the 13-cells, with glyburide and glipizide being preferred, which may be administered in the same or in separate oral dosage forms.
The compounds of structure I will be employed in a weight ratio to the sulfonyl urea in the range from about 0.01:1 to about 100:1, preferably from about 0.05:1 to about 5:1.
The oral antidiabetic agent may also be a glucosidase inhibitor such as acarbose (disclosed in U.S.
Patent No. 4,904,769) or miglitol (disclosed in U.S.
Patent No. 4,639,436), which may be administered in the same or in a separate oral dosage forms.
The compounds of structure I will be employed in a weight ratio to the glucosidase inhibitor within the
It is believed that the use of the compounds of structure I in combination with 1, 2, 3 or more other antidiabetic agents produces antihyperglycemic results greater than that possible from each of these medicaments alone and greater than the combined additive anti-hyperglycemic effects produced by these medicaments.
The other antidiabetic agent may be an oral antihyperglycemic agent preferably a biguanide such as metformin or phenformin or salts thereof, preferably metformin HC1.
Where the other antidiabetic agent is a biguanide, the compounds of structure I will be employed in a weight ratio to biguanide within the range from about 0.01:1 to about 100:1, preferably from about 0.1:1 to about 5:1.
The other antidiabetic agent may also preferably be a sulfonyl urea such as glyburide (also known as glibenclamide), glimepiride (disclosed in U.S. Patent No.
4,379,785), glipizide, gliclazide or chlorpropamide, other known sulfonylureas or other antihyperglycemic agents which act on the ATP-dependent channel of the 13-cells, with glyburide and glipizide being preferred, which may be administered in the same or in separate oral dosage forms.
The compounds of structure I will be employed in a weight ratio to the sulfonyl urea in the range from about 0.01:1 to about 100:1, preferably from about 0.05:1 to about 5:1.
The oral antidiabetic agent may also be a glucosidase inhibitor such as acarbose (disclosed in U.S.
Patent No. 4,904,769) or miglitol (disclosed in U.S.
Patent No. 4,639,436), which may be administered in the same or in a separate oral dosage forms.
The compounds of structure I will be employed in a weight ratio to the glucosidase inhibitor within the
- 20 -range from about 0.01:1 to about 100:1, preferably from about 0.2:1 to about 50:1.
The compounds of structure I may be employed in combination with a PPAR y agonist such as a thiazolidinedione oral anti-diabetic agent or other insulin sensitizers (which has an insulin sensitivity effect in NIDDM patients) such as troglitazone (Warner-Lambert's Rezulin , disclosed in U.S. Patent No.
4,572,912), rosiglitazone (SKB), pioglitazone (Takeda), Mitsubishi's MCC-555 (disclosed in U.S. Patent No.
5,594,016), Glaxo-Wellcome's GL-262570, englitazone (CP-68722, Pfizer) or darglitazone (CP-86325, Pfizer, isaglitazone (MIT/J&J), JTT-501 (JPNT/P&U), L-895645 (Merck), R-119702 (Sankyo/WL), NN-2344 (Dr. Reddy/NN), or YM-440 (Yamanouchi), preferably rosiglitazone and pioglitazone.
The compounds of structure I will be employed in a weight ratio to the thiazolidinedione in an amount within the range from about 0.01:1 to about 100:1, preferably from about 0.1:1 to about 10:1.
The sulfonyl urea and thiazolidinedione in amounts of less than about 150 mg oral antidiabetic agent may be incorporated in a single tablet with the compounds of structure I.
The compounds of structure I may also be employed in combination with a antihyperglycemic agent such as insulin or with glucagon-like peptide-1 (GLP-1) such as GLP-1(1-36) amide, GLP-1(7-36) amide, GLP-1(7-37) (as disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,614,492 to Habener, or a GLP-1 mimic such as AC2993 or Exendin-4 (Amylin) and LY-315902 or LY-307167 (Lilly) and NN2211 (Novo-Nordisk), which may be administered via injection, intranasal, or by transdermal or buccal devices.
Where present, metformin, the sulfonyl ureas, such as glyburide, glimepiride, glipyride, glipizide, chlorpropamide and gliclazide and the glucosidase
The compounds of structure I may be employed in combination with a PPAR y agonist such as a thiazolidinedione oral anti-diabetic agent or other insulin sensitizers (which has an insulin sensitivity effect in NIDDM patients) such as troglitazone (Warner-Lambert's Rezulin , disclosed in U.S. Patent No.
4,572,912), rosiglitazone (SKB), pioglitazone (Takeda), Mitsubishi's MCC-555 (disclosed in U.S. Patent No.
5,594,016), Glaxo-Wellcome's GL-262570, englitazone (CP-68722, Pfizer) or darglitazone (CP-86325, Pfizer, isaglitazone (MIT/J&J), JTT-501 (JPNT/P&U), L-895645 (Merck), R-119702 (Sankyo/WL), NN-2344 (Dr. Reddy/NN), or YM-440 (Yamanouchi), preferably rosiglitazone and pioglitazone.
The compounds of structure I will be employed in a weight ratio to the thiazolidinedione in an amount within the range from about 0.01:1 to about 100:1, preferably from about 0.1:1 to about 10:1.
The sulfonyl urea and thiazolidinedione in amounts of less than about 150 mg oral antidiabetic agent may be incorporated in a single tablet with the compounds of structure I.
The compounds of structure I may also be employed in combination with a antihyperglycemic agent such as insulin or with glucagon-like peptide-1 (GLP-1) such as GLP-1(1-36) amide, GLP-1(7-36) amide, GLP-1(7-37) (as disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,614,492 to Habener, or a GLP-1 mimic such as AC2993 or Exendin-4 (Amylin) and LY-315902 or LY-307167 (Lilly) and NN2211 (Novo-Nordisk), which may be administered via injection, intranasal, or by transdermal or buccal devices.
Where present, metformin, the sulfonyl ureas, such as glyburide, glimepiride, glipyride, glipizide, chlorpropamide and gliclazide and the glucosidase
21 -inhibitors acarbose or miglitol or insulin (injectable, pulmonary, buccal, or oral) may be employed in formulations as described above and in amounts and dosing as indicated in the Physician's Desk Reference (PDR).
Where present, metformin or salt thereof may be employed in amounts within the range from about 500 to about 2000 mg per day which may be administered in single or divided doses one to four times daily.
Where present, the thiazolidinedione anti-diabetic agent may be employed in amounts within the range from about 0.01 to about 2000 mg/day which may be administered in single or divided doses one to four times per day.
Where present insulin may be employed in formulations, amounts and dosing as indicated by the Physician's Desk Reference.
Where present GLP-l peptides may be administered in oral buccal formulations, by nasal administration (for example inhalation spray) or parenterally as described in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,346,701 (TheraTech) , 5,614,492 and 5,631,224.
The other antidiabetic agent may also be a PPAR a/y dual agonist such as AR-H039242 (Astra/Zeneca), GW-409544 (Glaxo-Wellcome), KRP297 (Kyorin Merck) as well as those disclosed by Murakami et al, "A Novel Insulin Sensitizer Acts As a Coligand for Peroxisome Proliferation -Activated Receptor Alpha (PPAR alpha) and PPAR gamma.
Effect on PPAR alpha Activation on Abnormal Lipid Metabolism in Liver of Zucker Fatty Rats", Diabetes 47, 1841-1847 (1998) , and in U.S. Patent No. 6,414,002, filed September 18, 2000, (attorney file LA2 9NP) , employing dosages as set out therein, which compounds designated as preferred are preferred for use herein.
The other antidiabetic agent may be an SGLx2 inhibitor such as disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 6,414,126, filed October 4, 2000 (attorney file
Where present, metformin or salt thereof may be employed in amounts within the range from about 500 to about 2000 mg per day which may be administered in single or divided doses one to four times daily.
Where present, the thiazolidinedione anti-diabetic agent may be employed in amounts within the range from about 0.01 to about 2000 mg/day which may be administered in single or divided doses one to four times per day.
Where present insulin may be employed in formulations, amounts and dosing as indicated by the Physician's Desk Reference.
Where present GLP-l peptides may be administered in oral buccal formulations, by nasal administration (for example inhalation spray) or parenterally as described in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,346,701 (TheraTech) , 5,614,492 and 5,631,224.
The other antidiabetic agent may also be a PPAR a/y dual agonist such as AR-H039242 (Astra/Zeneca), GW-409544 (Glaxo-Wellcome), KRP297 (Kyorin Merck) as well as those disclosed by Murakami et al, "A Novel Insulin Sensitizer Acts As a Coligand for Peroxisome Proliferation -Activated Receptor Alpha (PPAR alpha) and PPAR gamma.
Effect on PPAR alpha Activation on Abnormal Lipid Metabolism in Liver of Zucker Fatty Rats", Diabetes 47, 1841-1847 (1998) , and in U.S. Patent No. 6,414,002, filed September 18, 2000, (attorney file LA2 9NP) , employing dosages as set out therein, which compounds designated as preferred are preferred for use herein.
The other antidiabetic agent may be an SGLx2 inhibitor such as disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 6,414,126, filed October 4, 2000 (attorney file
- 22 -LA4 9NP) , employing dosages as set out herein. Preferred are the compounds designated as preferred in the above application.
The other antidiabetic agent which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of formula,_I may be an aP2 inhibitor such as disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 7,390,824, filed September 7, 1999, and U.S. Patent No. 6,548,529, filed March 6, 2000 (attorney file LA27NP), employing dosages as set out herein. Preferred are the compounds designated as preferred in the above application.
The other antidiabetic agent which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of formula I may be a glycogen phosphorylase inhibitor such as disclosed in WO 96/39384, WO 96/39385, EP 978279, WO 2000/47206, WO 99/43663, and U.S. Patent Nos.
5,952,322 and 5,998,463, WO 99/26659 and EP 1041068.
The meglitinide which may optionally be employed in combination with the compound of formula I of the invention may be repaglinide, nateglinide (Novartis) or KAD1229 (PF/Kissei), with repaglinide being preferred.
The DP4 inhibitor of formula I will be employed in a weight ratio to the meglitinide, PPAR 7 agonist, PPAR
a/y dual agonist, SGLT2 inhibitor, aP2 inhibitor, or glycogen phosphorylase inhibitor within the range from about 0.01:1 to about 100:1, preferably from about 0.1:1 to about 10:1.
The hypolipidemic agent or lipid-modulating agent which may be optionally employed in combination with the compounds of formula I of the invention may include 1,2,3 or more MTP inhibitors, HMG CoA reductase inhibitors, squalene synthetase inhibitors, fibric acid derivatives, ACAT inhibitors, lipoxygenase inhibitors, cholesterol absorption inhibitors, ileal Na'/bile acid cotransporter inhibitors, upregulators of LDL receptor activity, ATP
The other antidiabetic agent which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of formula,_I may be an aP2 inhibitor such as disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 7,390,824, filed September 7, 1999, and U.S. Patent No. 6,548,529, filed March 6, 2000 (attorney file LA27NP), employing dosages as set out herein. Preferred are the compounds designated as preferred in the above application.
The other antidiabetic agent which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of formula I may be a glycogen phosphorylase inhibitor such as disclosed in WO 96/39384, WO 96/39385, EP 978279, WO 2000/47206, WO 99/43663, and U.S. Patent Nos.
5,952,322 and 5,998,463, WO 99/26659 and EP 1041068.
The meglitinide which may optionally be employed in combination with the compound of formula I of the invention may be repaglinide, nateglinide (Novartis) or KAD1229 (PF/Kissei), with repaglinide being preferred.
The DP4 inhibitor of formula I will be employed in a weight ratio to the meglitinide, PPAR 7 agonist, PPAR
a/y dual agonist, SGLT2 inhibitor, aP2 inhibitor, or glycogen phosphorylase inhibitor within the range from about 0.01:1 to about 100:1, preferably from about 0.1:1 to about 10:1.
The hypolipidemic agent or lipid-modulating agent which may be optionally employed in combination with the compounds of formula I of the invention may include 1,2,3 or more MTP inhibitors, HMG CoA reductase inhibitors, squalene synthetase inhibitors, fibric acid derivatives, ACAT inhibitors, lipoxygenase inhibitors, cholesterol absorption inhibitors, ileal Na'/bile acid cotransporter inhibitors, upregulators of LDL receptor activity, ATP
- 23 -citrate lyase inhibitors, cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitors, bile acid sequestrants, and/or nicotinic acid and derivatives thereof.
MTP inhibitors employed herein include MTP
inhibitors disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,595,872, U.S.
Patent No. 5,739,135, U.S. Patent No. 5,712,279, U.S.
Patent No. 5,760,246, U.S. Patent No. 5,827,875, U.S.
Patent No. 5,885,983 and U.S. Application Serial No.
09/175,180 filed October 20, 1998, now U.S. Patent No.
5,962,440. Preferred are each of the preferred MTP
inhibitors disclosed in each of the above patents and applications.
Most preferred MTP inhibitors to be employed in accordance with the present invention include preferred MTP inhibitors as set out in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,739,135 and 5,712,279, and U.S. Patent No. 5,760,246 as well as implitapide (Bayer).
The most preferred MTP inhibitor is 9-(4-(4-((2-(2,2, 2-Trifluoroethoxy)benzoyl]amino]-1-piperidinyl]
butyl]-N-(2,2,2-trifluoroethyl)-9H-fluorene-9-carboxamide N/\c1r CFA
, o The hypolipidemic agent may be an HMG CoA
reductase inhibitor which includes, but is not limited to, mevastatin and related compounds as disclosed in U.S.
Patent No. 3,983,140, lovastatin (mevinolin) and related compounds as disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 4,231,938, pravastatin and related compounds such as disclosed in
MTP inhibitors employed herein include MTP
inhibitors disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,595,872, U.S.
Patent No. 5,739,135, U.S. Patent No. 5,712,279, U.S.
Patent No. 5,760,246, U.S. Patent No. 5,827,875, U.S.
Patent No. 5,885,983 and U.S. Application Serial No.
09/175,180 filed October 20, 1998, now U.S. Patent No.
5,962,440. Preferred are each of the preferred MTP
inhibitors disclosed in each of the above patents and applications.
Most preferred MTP inhibitors to be employed in accordance with the present invention include preferred MTP inhibitors as set out in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,739,135 and 5,712,279, and U.S. Patent No. 5,760,246 as well as implitapide (Bayer).
The most preferred MTP inhibitor is 9-(4-(4-((2-(2,2, 2-Trifluoroethoxy)benzoyl]amino]-1-piperidinyl]
butyl]-N-(2,2,2-trifluoroethyl)-9H-fluorene-9-carboxamide N/\c1r CFA
, o The hypolipidemic agent may be an HMG CoA
reductase inhibitor which includes, but is not limited to, mevastatin and related compounds as disclosed in U.S.
Patent No. 3,983,140, lovastatin (mevinolin) and related compounds as disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 4,231,938, pravastatin and related compounds such as disclosed in
- 24 -U.S. Patent No. 4,346,227, simvastatin and related compounds as disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,448,784 and 4,450,171. Other HMG CoA reductase inhibitors which may be employed herein include, but are not limited to, fluvastatin, disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,354,772, cerivastatin disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,006,530 and 5,177,080, atorvastatin disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos.
4,681,893, 5,273,995, 5,385,929 and 5,686,104, atavastatin (Nissan/Sankyo's nisvastatin (NK-104)) disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,011,930, Shionogi-Astra/Zeneca visastatin (ZD-4522) disclosed in U.S.
Patent No. 5,260,440.
The squalene synthetase inhibitors suitable for use herein include, but are not limited to, a-phosphono-sulfonates disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,712,396, those disclosed by Biller et al, J. Med. Chem., 1988, Vol. 31, No. 10, pp 1869-1871, including isoprenoid (phosphinyl-methyl)phosphonates as well as other known squalene synthetase inhibitors, for example, as disclosed in U.S.
Patent No. 4,871,721 and 4,924,024 and in Biller, S.A., Neuenschwander, K., Ponpipom, M.M., and Poulter, C.D., Current Pharmaceutical Design, 2, 1-40 (1996).
In addition, other squalene synthetase inhibitors suitable for use herein include the terpenoid pyrophosphates disclosed by P. Ortiz de Montellano et al, J. Med. Chem., 1977, 24, 243-249, the farnesyl diphosphate analog A and presqualene pyrophosphate (PSQ-PP) analogs as disclosed by Corey and Volante, J. Am.
Chem. Soc., 1976, 98, 1291-1293, phosphinylphosphonates reported by McClard, R.W. et al, J.A.C.S., 1987, 102, 5544 and cyclopropanes reported by Capson, T.L., PhD
dissertation, June, 1987, Dept. Med. Chem. U of Utah, Abstract, Table of Contents, pp 16, 17, 40-43, 48-51, Summary.
Other hypolipidemic agents suitable for use herein include, but are not limited to, fibric acid derivatives, such as fenofibrate, gemfibrozil, clofibrate,
4,681,893, 5,273,995, 5,385,929 and 5,686,104, atavastatin (Nissan/Sankyo's nisvastatin (NK-104)) disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,011,930, Shionogi-Astra/Zeneca visastatin (ZD-4522) disclosed in U.S.
Patent No. 5,260,440.
The squalene synthetase inhibitors suitable for use herein include, but are not limited to, a-phosphono-sulfonates disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,712,396, those disclosed by Biller et al, J. Med. Chem., 1988, Vol. 31, No. 10, pp 1869-1871, including isoprenoid (phosphinyl-methyl)phosphonates as well as other known squalene synthetase inhibitors, for example, as disclosed in U.S.
Patent No. 4,871,721 and 4,924,024 and in Biller, S.A., Neuenschwander, K., Ponpipom, M.M., and Poulter, C.D., Current Pharmaceutical Design, 2, 1-40 (1996).
In addition, other squalene synthetase inhibitors suitable for use herein include the terpenoid pyrophosphates disclosed by P. Ortiz de Montellano et al, J. Med. Chem., 1977, 24, 243-249, the farnesyl diphosphate analog A and presqualene pyrophosphate (PSQ-PP) analogs as disclosed by Corey and Volante, J. Am.
Chem. Soc., 1976, 98, 1291-1293, phosphinylphosphonates reported by McClard, R.W. et al, J.A.C.S., 1987, 102, 5544 and cyclopropanes reported by Capson, T.L., PhD
dissertation, June, 1987, Dept. Med. Chem. U of Utah, Abstract, Table of Contents, pp 16, 17, 40-43, 48-51, Summary.
Other hypolipidemic agents suitable for use herein include, but are not limited to, fibric acid derivatives, such as fenofibrate, gemfibrozil, clofibrate,
25 --bezafibrate, ciprofibrate, clinofibrate and the like, probucol, and related compounds as disclosed in U.S.
Patent No. 3,674,836, probucol and gemfibrozil being preferred,'bile acid sequestrants such as cholestyramine, colestipol and DEAE-Sephadex (Secholex , Policexide ), as well as lipostabil (Rhone-Poulenc), Eisai E-5050 (an N-substituted ethanolamine derivative), imanixil (HOE-402), tetrahydrolipstatin (THL), istigmastanylphos-phorylcholine (SPC, Roche), aminocyclodextrin (Tanabe Seiyoku), Ajinomoto ALT-814 (azulene derivative), melinamide (Sumitomo), Sandoz 58-035, American Cyanamid CL-277,082 and CL-283,546 (disubstituted urea derivatives), nicotinic acid, acipimox, acifran, neomycin, p-aminosalicylic acid, aspirin, poly(diallylmethylamine) derivatives such as disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 4,759,923, quaternary amine poly(diallyldimethylammonium chloride) and ionenes such as disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 4,027,009, and other known serum cholesterol lowering agents.
The other hypolipidemic agent may be an ACAT
inhibitor such as disclosed in, Drugs of the Future 24, 9-15 (1999), (Avasimibe); "The ACAT inhibitor, Cl-1011 is effective in the prevention and regression of aortic fatty streak area in hamsters", Nicolosi et al, Atherosclerosis (Shannon, Irel). (1998), 137(1), 77-85;
"The pharmacological profile of FCE 27677: a novel ACAT
inhibitor with potent hypolipidemic activity mediated by selective suppression of the hepatic secretion of ApoBlOO-containing lipoprotein", Ghiselli, Giancarlo, Cardiovasc. Drug Rev. (1998), 16(l), 16-30; "RP 73163: a bioavailable alkylsulfinyl-diphenylimidazole ACAT
inhibitor", Smith, C., et al, Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett.
(1996), 6(1), 47-50; "ACAT inhibitors: physiologic mechanisms for hypolipidemic and anti-atherosclerotic activities in experimental animals", Krause et al, Editor(s): Ruffolo, Robert R., Jr.; Hollinger, Mannf red A., Inflammation: Mediators Pathways (1995), 173-98,
Patent No. 3,674,836, probucol and gemfibrozil being preferred,'bile acid sequestrants such as cholestyramine, colestipol and DEAE-Sephadex (Secholex , Policexide ), as well as lipostabil (Rhone-Poulenc), Eisai E-5050 (an N-substituted ethanolamine derivative), imanixil (HOE-402), tetrahydrolipstatin (THL), istigmastanylphos-phorylcholine (SPC, Roche), aminocyclodextrin (Tanabe Seiyoku), Ajinomoto ALT-814 (azulene derivative), melinamide (Sumitomo), Sandoz 58-035, American Cyanamid CL-277,082 and CL-283,546 (disubstituted urea derivatives), nicotinic acid, acipimox, acifran, neomycin, p-aminosalicylic acid, aspirin, poly(diallylmethylamine) derivatives such as disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 4,759,923, quaternary amine poly(diallyldimethylammonium chloride) and ionenes such as disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 4,027,009, and other known serum cholesterol lowering agents.
The other hypolipidemic agent may be an ACAT
inhibitor such as disclosed in, Drugs of the Future 24, 9-15 (1999), (Avasimibe); "The ACAT inhibitor, Cl-1011 is effective in the prevention and regression of aortic fatty streak area in hamsters", Nicolosi et al, Atherosclerosis (Shannon, Irel). (1998), 137(1), 77-85;
"The pharmacological profile of FCE 27677: a novel ACAT
inhibitor with potent hypolipidemic activity mediated by selective suppression of the hepatic secretion of ApoBlOO-containing lipoprotein", Ghiselli, Giancarlo, Cardiovasc. Drug Rev. (1998), 16(l), 16-30; "RP 73163: a bioavailable alkylsulfinyl-diphenylimidazole ACAT
inhibitor", Smith, C., et al, Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett.
(1996), 6(1), 47-50; "ACAT inhibitors: physiologic mechanisms for hypolipidemic and anti-atherosclerotic activities in experimental animals", Krause et al, Editor(s): Ruffolo, Robert R., Jr.; Hollinger, Mannf red A., Inflammation: Mediators Pathways (1995), 173-98,
- 26 -* Trade-mark Publisher: CRC, Boca Raton, Fla.; "ACAT inhibitors:
potential anti-atherosclerotic agents", Sliskovic et al, Curr. Med. Chem. (1994), 1(3), 204-25; "Inhibitors of acyl-CoA:cholesterol O-acyl transferase (ACAT) as hypocholesterolemic agents. 6. The first water-soluble ACAT inhibitor with lipid-regulating activity.
Inhibitors of acyl-CoA:cholesterol acyltransferase (ACAT). 7. Development of a series of substituted N-phenyl-N'-[(1-phenylcyclopentyl)methyl)ureas with enhanced hypocholesterolemic activity", Stout et al, Chemtracts: Org. Chem. (1995), 8(6), 359-62, or TS-962 (Taisho Pharmaceutical Co. Ltd).
The hypolipidemic agent may be an upregulator of LD2 receptor activity such as MD-700 (Taisho Pharmaceutical Co. Ltd) and LY295427 (Eli Lilly).
The hypolipidemic agent may be a cholesterol absorption inhibitor preferably Schering-Plough's SCH48461 as well as those disclosed in Atherosclerosis 115, 45-63 (1995) and J. Med. Chem. 41, 973 (1998)._ The hypolipidemic agent may be an ileal Na`/bile acid cotransporter inhibitor such as disclosed in Drugs of the Future, 24, 425-430 (1999).
The lipid-modulating agent may be a cholesteryl ester transfer protein (CETP) inhibitor such as Pfizer's CP 529,414 (WO/0038722 and EP 818448) and Pharmacia's SC-744 and SC-795.
The ATP citrate lyase inhibitor which may be employed in the combination of the invention-may include, for example, those disclosed in U.S. Patent No.
5,447,954.
Preferred hypolipidemic agents are pravastatin, lovastatin, simvastatin, atorvastatin, fluvastatin, cerivastatin, atavastatin and ZD-4522.
The amounts and dosages employed will be as indicated in the Physician's Desk Reference and/or in the patents set out above.
potential anti-atherosclerotic agents", Sliskovic et al, Curr. Med. Chem. (1994), 1(3), 204-25; "Inhibitors of acyl-CoA:cholesterol O-acyl transferase (ACAT) as hypocholesterolemic agents. 6. The first water-soluble ACAT inhibitor with lipid-regulating activity.
Inhibitors of acyl-CoA:cholesterol acyltransferase (ACAT). 7. Development of a series of substituted N-phenyl-N'-[(1-phenylcyclopentyl)methyl)ureas with enhanced hypocholesterolemic activity", Stout et al, Chemtracts: Org. Chem. (1995), 8(6), 359-62, or TS-962 (Taisho Pharmaceutical Co. Ltd).
The hypolipidemic agent may be an upregulator of LD2 receptor activity such as MD-700 (Taisho Pharmaceutical Co. Ltd) and LY295427 (Eli Lilly).
The hypolipidemic agent may be a cholesterol absorption inhibitor preferably Schering-Plough's SCH48461 as well as those disclosed in Atherosclerosis 115, 45-63 (1995) and J. Med. Chem. 41, 973 (1998)._ The hypolipidemic agent may be an ileal Na`/bile acid cotransporter inhibitor such as disclosed in Drugs of the Future, 24, 425-430 (1999).
The lipid-modulating agent may be a cholesteryl ester transfer protein (CETP) inhibitor such as Pfizer's CP 529,414 (WO/0038722 and EP 818448) and Pharmacia's SC-744 and SC-795.
The ATP citrate lyase inhibitor which may be employed in the combination of the invention-may include, for example, those disclosed in U.S. Patent No.
5,447,954.
Preferred hypolipidemic agents are pravastatin, lovastatin, simvastatin, atorvastatin, fluvastatin, cerivastatin, atavastatin and ZD-4522.
The amounts and dosages employed will be as indicated in the Physician's Desk Reference and/or in the patents set out above.
- 27 -The compounds of formula I of the invention will be employed in a weight ratio to the hypolipidemic agent (were present), within the range from about 500:1 to about 1:500, preferably from about 100:1 to about 1:100.
The dose administered must be carefully adjusted according to age, weight and condition of the patient, as well as the route of administration, dosage form and regimen and the desired result.
The dosages and formulations for the hypolipidemic agent will be as disclosed in the various patents and applications discussed above.
The dosages and formulations for the other hypolipidemic agent to be employed, where applicable, will be as set out in the latest edition of the Physicians' Desk Reference.
For oral administration, a satisfactory result may be obtained employing the MTP inhibitor in an amount within the range of from about 0.01 mg/kg to about 500 mg and preferably from about 0.1 mg to about 100 mg, one to four times daily.
A preferred oral dosage form, such as tablets or capsules, will contain the MTP inhibitor in an amount of from about 1 to about 500 mg, preferably from about 2 to about 400 mg, and more preferably from about 5 to about 250 mg, one to four times daily.
For oral administration, a satisfactory result may be obtained employing an HMG CoA reductase inhibitor, for example, pravastatin, lovastatin, simvastatin, atorvastatin, fluvastatin or cerivastatin in dosages employed as indicated in the Physician's Desk Reference, such as in an amount within the range of from about 1 to 2000 mg, and preferably from about 4 to about 200 mg.
The squalene synthetase inhibitor may be employed in dosages in an amount within the range of from about 10 mg to about 2000 mg and preferably from about 25 mg to about 200 mg.
The dose administered must be carefully adjusted according to age, weight and condition of the patient, as well as the route of administration, dosage form and regimen and the desired result.
The dosages and formulations for the hypolipidemic agent will be as disclosed in the various patents and applications discussed above.
The dosages and formulations for the other hypolipidemic agent to be employed, where applicable, will be as set out in the latest edition of the Physicians' Desk Reference.
For oral administration, a satisfactory result may be obtained employing the MTP inhibitor in an amount within the range of from about 0.01 mg/kg to about 500 mg and preferably from about 0.1 mg to about 100 mg, one to four times daily.
A preferred oral dosage form, such as tablets or capsules, will contain the MTP inhibitor in an amount of from about 1 to about 500 mg, preferably from about 2 to about 400 mg, and more preferably from about 5 to about 250 mg, one to four times daily.
For oral administration, a satisfactory result may be obtained employing an HMG CoA reductase inhibitor, for example, pravastatin, lovastatin, simvastatin, atorvastatin, fluvastatin or cerivastatin in dosages employed as indicated in the Physician's Desk Reference, such as in an amount within the range of from about 1 to 2000 mg, and preferably from about 4 to about 200 mg.
The squalene synthetase inhibitor may be employed in dosages in an amount within the range of from about 10 mg to about 2000 mg and preferably from about 25 mg to about 200 mg.
- 28 -A preferred oral dosage form, such as tablets or capsules, will contain the HMG CoA reductase inhibitor in an amount from about 0.1 to about 100 mg, preferably from about 5 to about 80 mg, and more preferably from about 10 to about 40 mg.
A preferred oral dosage form, such as tablets or capsules will contain the squalene synthetase inhibitor in an amount of from about 10 to about 500 mg, preferably from about 25 to about 200 mg.
The other hypolipidemic agent may also be a lipoxygenase inhibitor including a 15-lipoxygenase (15-LO) inhibitor such as benzimidazole derivatives as disclosed in WO 97/12615, 15-LO inhibitors as disclosed in WO 97/12613, isothiazolones as disclosed in WO 96/38144, and 15-LO inhibitors as disclosed by Sendobry et al "Attenuation of diet-induced atherosclerosis in rabbits with a highly selective 15-lipoxygenase inhibitor lacking significant antioxidant properties", Brit. J. Pharmacology (1997) 120, 1199-1206, and Cornicelli et al, "15-Lipoxygenase and its Inhibition: A Novel Therapeutic Target for Vascular Disease", Current Pharmaceutical Design, 1999, 5, 11-20.
The compounds of formula I and the hypolipidemic agent may be employed together in the same oral dosage form or in separate oral dosage forms taken at the same time.
The compositions described above may be administered in the dosage forms as described above in single or divided doses of one to four times daily. It may be advisable to start a patient on a low dose combination and work up gradually to a high dose combination.
The preferred hypolipidemic agent is pravastatin, simvastatin, lovastatin, atorvastatin, fluvastatin or cerivastatin.
The other type of therapeutic agent which may be optionally employed with the DP4 inhibitor of formula I
A preferred oral dosage form, such as tablets or capsules will contain the squalene synthetase inhibitor in an amount of from about 10 to about 500 mg, preferably from about 25 to about 200 mg.
The other hypolipidemic agent may also be a lipoxygenase inhibitor including a 15-lipoxygenase (15-LO) inhibitor such as benzimidazole derivatives as disclosed in WO 97/12615, 15-LO inhibitors as disclosed in WO 97/12613, isothiazolones as disclosed in WO 96/38144, and 15-LO inhibitors as disclosed by Sendobry et al "Attenuation of diet-induced atherosclerosis in rabbits with a highly selective 15-lipoxygenase inhibitor lacking significant antioxidant properties", Brit. J. Pharmacology (1997) 120, 1199-1206, and Cornicelli et al, "15-Lipoxygenase and its Inhibition: A Novel Therapeutic Target for Vascular Disease", Current Pharmaceutical Design, 1999, 5, 11-20.
The compounds of formula I and the hypolipidemic agent may be employed together in the same oral dosage form or in separate oral dosage forms taken at the same time.
The compositions described above may be administered in the dosage forms as described above in single or divided doses of one to four times daily. It may be advisable to start a patient on a low dose combination and work up gradually to a high dose combination.
The preferred hypolipidemic agent is pravastatin, simvastatin, lovastatin, atorvastatin, fluvastatin or cerivastatin.
The other type of therapeutic agent which may be optionally employed with the DP4 inhibitor of formula I
- 29 -may be 1, 2, 3 or more of an anti-obesity agent including a beta 3 adrenergic agonist, a lipase inhibitor, a serotonin (and dopamine) reuptake inhibitor, a thyroid receptor beta drug, an anorectic agent and/or a fatty acid oxidation upregulator.
The beta 3 adrenergic agonist which may be optionally employed in combination with a compound of formula I may be AJ9677 (Takeda/Dainippon), L750355 (Merck), or CP331648 (Pfizer) or other known beta 3 agonists as disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,541,204, 5,770,615, 5,491,134, 5,776,983 and 5,488,064, with AJ9677, L750,355 and CP331648 being preferred.
The lipase inhibitor which may be optionally employed in combination with a compound of formula I may be orlistat or ATL-962 (Alizyme), with orlistat being preferred.
The serotonin (and dopoamine) reuptake inhibitor' which may be optionally employed in combination with a compound of formula I may be sibutramine, topiramate (Johnson & Johnson) or axokine (Regeneron), with sibutramine and topiramate being preferred.
The thyroid receptor beta compound which may be optionally employed in combination with a compound of formula I may be a thyroid receptor ligand as disclosed in W097/21993 (U. Cal SF), W099/00353 (KaroBio) and GB98/284425 (KaroBio), with compounds of the KaroBio applications being preferred.
The anorectic agent which may be optionally employed in combination with a compound of formula I may be dexamphetamine, phentermine, phenylpropanolamine or mazindol, with dexamphetamine being preferred.
The fatty acid oxidation upregulator which may be optionally employed in combination with the compound of formula I can be famoxin (Genset).
The various anti-obesity agents described above may be employed in the same dosage form with the compound of
The beta 3 adrenergic agonist which may be optionally employed in combination with a compound of formula I may be AJ9677 (Takeda/Dainippon), L750355 (Merck), or CP331648 (Pfizer) or other known beta 3 agonists as disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,541,204, 5,770,615, 5,491,134, 5,776,983 and 5,488,064, with AJ9677, L750,355 and CP331648 being preferred.
The lipase inhibitor which may be optionally employed in combination with a compound of formula I may be orlistat or ATL-962 (Alizyme), with orlistat being preferred.
The serotonin (and dopoamine) reuptake inhibitor' which may be optionally employed in combination with a compound of formula I may be sibutramine, topiramate (Johnson & Johnson) or axokine (Regeneron), with sibutramine and topiramate being preferred.
The thyroid receptor beta compound which may be optionally employed in combination with a compound of formula I may be a thyroid receptor ligand as disclosed in W097/21993 (U. Cal SF), W099/00353 (KaroBio) and GB98/284425 (KaroBio), with compounds of the KaroBio applications being preferred.
The anorectic agent which may be optionally employed in combination with a compound of formula I may be dexamphetamine, phentermine, phenylpropanolamine or mazindol, with dexamphetamine being preferred.
The fatty acid oxidation upregulator which may be optionally employed in combination with the compound of formula I can be famoxin (Genset).
The various anti-obesity agents described above may be employed in the same dosage form with the compound of
30 -formula I or in different dosage forms, in dosages and regimens as generally known in the art or in the PDR.
The infertility agent which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention may be 1, 2, or more of clomiphene citrate (Clomid , Aventis), bromocriptine mesylate (Parlodel , Novartis),LHRH analogs, Lupron (TAP Pharm.), danazol, Danocrine (Sanofi), progestogens or glucocorticoids, which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR.
The agent for polycystic ovary syndrome which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention may be 1, 2, or more of gonadotropin releasing hormone (GnRH), leuprolide (Lupron ), Clomid , Parlodel , oral contraceptives or insulin sensitizers such as PPAR agonists, or other conventional agents for such use which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR.
The agent for treating growth disorders and/or frailty which may be optionally employed in combination with'the DP4 inhibitor of the invention may be 1, 2, or more of a growth hormone or growth hormone secretagogue such as MK-677 (Merck), CP-424,391 (Pfizer), and compounds disclosed in U.S. Serial No. 09/506,749 filed February 18, 2000 (attorney docket LA26), as well as selective androgen receptor modulators (SARMs), which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR, where applicable.
The agent for treating arthritis which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention may be 1, 2, or more of aspirin, indomethacin, ibuprofen, diclofenac sodium, naproxen, nabumetone (Relafen(&, SmithKline Beecham), tolmetin sodium (Tolectin , Ortho-McNeil), piroxicam (Feldene , Pfizer),' ketorolac tromethamine (Toradol , Roche), celecoxib (Celebrex , Searle), rofecoxib (Vioxx , Merck) and the like, which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR.
The infertility agent which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention may be 1, 2, or more of clomiphene citrate (Clomid , Aventis), bromocriptine mesylate (Parlodel , Novartis),LHRH analogs, Lupron (TAP Pharm.), danazol, Danocrine (Sanofi), progestogens or glucocorticoids, which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR.
The agent for polycystic ovary syndrome which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention may be 1, 2, or more of gonadotropin releasing hormone (GnRH), leuprolide (Lupron ), Clomid , Parlodel , oral contraceptives or insulin sensitizers such as PPAR agonists, or other conventional agents for such use which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR.
The agent for treating growth disorders and/or frailty which may be optionally employed in combination with'the DP4 inhibitor of the invention may be 1, 2, or more of a growth hormone or growth hormone secretagogue such as MK-677 (Merck), CP-424,391 (Pfizer), and compounds disclosed in U.S. Serial No. 09/506,749 filed February 18, 2000 (attorney docket LA26), as well as selective androgen receptor modulators (SARMs), which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR, where applicable.
The agent for treating arthritis which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention may be 1, 2, or more of aspirin, indomethacin, ibuprofen, diclofenac sodium, naproxen, nabumetone (Relafen(&, SmithKline Beecham), tolmetin sodium (Tolectin , Ortho-McNeil), piroxicam (Feldene , Pfizer),' ketorolac tromethamine (Toradol , Roche), celecoxib (Celebrex , Searle), rofecoxib (Vioxx , Merck) and the like, which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR.
- 31 -Conventional agents for preventing allograft rejection in transplantation such as cyclosporin, Sandimmune (Novartis), azathioprine, Immuran (Faro) or methotrexate may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention, which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR.
Conventional agents for treating autoimmune diseases such as multiple sclerosis and immunomodulatory diseases such as lupus erythematosis, psoriasis, for example, azathioprine, Immuran, cyclophosphamide, NSAIDS
such as ibuprofen, cox 2 inhibitors such as Vioxx and Celebrex, glucocorticoids and hydroxychloroquine, may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention, which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR.
The AIDS agent which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention may be a non-nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitor, a nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitor, a protease inhibitor and/or an AIDS adjunct anti-infective and may be 1, 2, or more of dronabinol (Marinol , Roxane Labs), didanosine (Videx , Bristol-Myers Squibb), megestrol acetate (Megace(D, Bristol-Myers Squibb), stavudine (Zerit , Bristol-Myers Squibb), delavirdine mesylate (Rescriptor(D, Pharmacia), lamivudine/zidovudine (CombivirTM, Glaxo) , lamivudine (EpivirT", Glaxo), zalcitabine (Hivid(&, Roche), zidovudine (Retrovir(&, Glaxo), indinavir sulfate (Crixivan , Merck), saquinavir (FortovaseTu, Roche), saquinovir mesylate (Invirase(D, Roche), ritonavir (Norvir(ID, Abbott), nelfinavir (Viracept , Agouron) .
The above anti-AIDS agents may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR.
The agent for treating inflammatory bowel disease or syndrome which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention may be 1, 2, or more of sulfasalazine, salicylates,
Conventional agents for treating autoimmune diseases such as multiple sclerosis and immunomodulatory diseases such as lupus erythematosis, psoriasis, for example, azathioprine, Immuran, cyclophosphamide, NSAIDS
such as ibuprofen, cox 2 inhibitors such as Vioxx and Celebrex, glucocorticoids and hydroxychloroquine, may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention, which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR.
The AIDS agent which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention may be a non-nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitor, a nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitor, a protease inhibitor and/or an AIDS adjunct anti-infective and may be 1, 2, or more of dronabinol (Marinol , Roxane Labs), didanosine (Videx , Bristol-Myers Squibb), megestrol acetate (Megace(D, Bristol-Myers Squibb), stavudine (Zerit , Bristol-Myers Squibb), delavirdine mesylate (Rescriptor(D, Pharmacia), lamivudine/zidovudine (CombivirTM, Glaxo) , lamivudine (EpivirT", Glaxo), zalcitabine (Hivid(&, Roche), zidovudine (Retrovir(&, Glaxo), indinavir sulfate (Crixivan , Merck), saquinavir (FortovaseTu, Roche), saquinovir mesylate (Invirase(D, Roche), ritonavir (Norvir(ID, Abbott), nelfinavir (Viracept , Agouron) .
The above anti-AIDS agents may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR.
The agent for treating inflammatory bowel disease or syndrome which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention may be 1, 2, or more of sulfasalazine, salicylates,
- 32 -Trade-mark mesalamine (Asacol , P&G) or Zelmac , (Bristol-Myers Squibb), which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR or otherwise known in the art.
The agent for treating osteoporosis which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention may be 1, 2, or more of alendronate sodium (Fosamax , Merck, tiludronate (Skelid(D, Sanofi), etidronate disodium (Didronel , P&G), raloxifene HC1 (Evista(D, Lilly), which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR.
In carrying our the method of the invention, a pharmaceutical composition will be employed containing the compounds of structure I, with or without another antidiabetic agent and/or other type therapeutic agent, in association with a pharmaceutical vehicle or diluent.
The pharmaceutical composition can be formulated employing conventional solid or liquid vehicles or diluents and pharmaceutical additives of a type appropriate to the mode of desired administration. The compounds can be administered to mammalian species including humans, monkeys, dogs, etc. by an oral route, for example, in the form of tablets, capsules, granules or powders, or they can be administered by a parenteral route in the form of injectable preparations. The dose for adults is preferably between 10 and 1,000 mg per day, which can be administered in a single dose or in the form of individual doses from 1-4 times per day.
A typical capsule for oral administration contains compounds of structure I (250 mg), lactose (75 mg) and magnesium stearate (15 mg). The mixture is passed through a 60 mesh sieve and packed into a No. 1 gelatin capsule.
A typical injectable preparation is produced by aseptically placing 250 mg of compounds of structure I
into a vial, aseptically freeze-drying and sealing. For use, the contents of the vial are mixed with 2 mL of
The agent for treating osteoporosis which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention may be 1, 2, or more of alendronate sodium (Fosamax , Merck, tiludronate (Skelid(D, Sanofi), etidronate disodium (Didronel , P&G), raloxifene HC1 (Evista(D, Lilly), which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR.
In carrying our the method of the invention, a pharmaceutical composition will be employed containing the compounds of structure I, with or without another antidiabetic agent and/or other type therapeutic agent, in association with a pharmaceutical vehicle or diluent.
The pharmaceutical composition can be formulated employing conventional solid or liquid vehicles or diluents and pharmaceutical additives of a type appropriate to the mode of desired administration. The compounds can be administered to mammalian species including humans, monkeys, dogs, etc. by an oral route, for example, in the form of tablets, capsules, granules or powders, or they can be administered by a parenteral route in the form of injectable preparations. The dose for adults is preferably between 10 and 1,000 mg per day, which can be administered in a single dose or in the form of individual doses from 1-4 times per day.
A typical capsule for oral administration contains compounds of structure I (250 mg), lactose (75 mg) and magnesium stearate (15 mg). The mixture is passed through a 60 mesh sieve and packed into a No. 1 gelatin capsule.
A typical injectable preparation is produced by aseptically placing 250 mg of compounds of structure I
into a vial, aseptically freeze-drying and sealing. For use, the contents of the vial are mixed with 2 mL of
- 33 -physiological saline, to produce an injectable preparation.
DP4 inhibitor activity of the compounds of the invention may be determined by use of an in vitro assay system which measures the potentiation of inhibition of DP4. Inhibition constants (Ki values) for the DP4 inhibitors of the invention may be determined by the method described below.
Purification of Porcine Dipeptidyl Peptidase IV
Porcine enzyme was purified as previously described (1), with several modifications. Kidneys from 15-20 animals were obtained, and the cortex was dissected away and frozen at -80 C. Frozen tissue (2000 -2500 g) was homogenized in 12 L of 0.25 M sucrose in a Waring*
blender. The homogenate then was left at 37 C for 18 hours to facilitate cleavage of DP-4 from cell membranes.
After the cleavage step, the homogenate was clarified by centrifugation at 7000 X g for 20 min at 4 C, and the supernatant was collected. Solid ammonium sulfate was added to 60% saturation, and the precipitate was collected by centrifugation at 10,000 X g and was discarded. Additional ammonium sulfate was added to the supernatant to 80% saturation,' and the 80% pellet was collected and dissolved in 20 mM Na2HP04, pH 7.4.
'After dialysis against 20 mM Na2HP04r pH 7.4, the preparation was clarified by centrifugation at 10,000 X
g. The clarified preparation then was applied to 300 mL
of ConA Sepharose that had been equilibrated in the same buffer. After washing with buffer to a constant A280 , the column was eluted with 5% (w/v) methyl a-D-mannopyranoside. Active fractions were pooled, concentrated, and dialyzed against 5 mM sodium acetate, pH 5Ø Dialyzed material then was flowed through'a 100 35' mL Pharmacia Resource S column equilibrated in the same buffer. The flow through material was collected and contained most of the enzyme activity. Active material
DP4 inhibitor activity of the compounds of the invention may be determined by use of an in vitro assay system which measures the potentiation of inhibition of DP4. Inhibition constants (Ki values) for the DP4 inhibitors of the invention may be determined by the method described below.
Purification of Porcine Dipeptidyl Peptidase IV
Porcine enzyme was purified as previously described (1), with several modifications. Kidneys from 15-20 animals were obtained, and the cortex was dissected away and frozen at -80 C. Frozen tissue (2000 -2500 g) was homogenized in 12 L of 0.25 M sucrose in a Waring*
blender. The homogenate then was left at 37 C for 18 hours to facilitate cleavage of DP-4 from cell membranes.
After the cleavage step, the homogenate was clarified by centrifugation at 7000 X g for 20 min at 4 C, and the supernatant was collected. Solid ammonium sulfate was added to 60% saturation, and the precipitate was collected by centrifugation at 10,000 X g and was discarded. Additional ammonium sulfate was added to the supernatant to 80% saturation,' and the 80% pellet was collected and dissolved in 20 mM Na2HP04, pH 7.4.
'After dialysis against 20 mM Na2HP04r pH 7.4, the preparation was clarified by centrifugation at 10,000 X
g. The clarified preparation then was applied to 300 mL
of ConA Sepharose that had been equilibrated in the same buffer. After washing with buffer to a constant A280 , the column was eluted with 5% (w/v) methyl a-D-mannopyranoside. Active fractions were pooled, concentrated, and dialyzed against 5 mM sodium acetate, pH 5Ø Dialyzed material then was flowed through'a 100 35' mL Pharmacia Resource S column equilibrated in the same buffer. The flow through material was collected and contained most of the enzyme activity. Active material
- 34 -* Trade-mark again was concentrated and dialyzed into 20 mM Na2HPO4, pH
7.4. Lastly, the concentrated enzyme was chromatographed on a Pharmacia S-200 gel filtration column to removed low molecular weight contaminants. Purity of column fractions was analyzed by reducing SDS-PAGE, and the purest fractions were pooled and concentrated. Purified enzyme was stored in 20% glycerol at -80 C.
Assay of Porcine Dipeptidyl Peptidase IV
Enzyme was assayed under steady-state conditions as previously described (2) with gly-pro-p-nitroanilide as substrate, with the following modifications. Reactions contained, in a final volume of 100 l, 100 mM Aces, 52 mM TRIS, 52 mM ethanolamine, 500 M gly-pro-p-nitroanilide, 0.2 % DMSO, and 4.5 nM enzyme at 25 C, pH
7.4. For single assays at 10 M test compound, buffer, compound, and enzyme were added to wells of a 96 well microtiter plate, and were incubated at room temperature for 5 min. Reactions were started by addition of substrate. The continuous production of p-nitroaniline was measured at 405 nM for 15 min using a Molecular Devices Tmax plate reader, with a read every 9 seconds.
The linear rate of p-nitroaniline production was obtained over the linear portion of each progress curve. A
standard curve for p-nitroaniline absorbance was obtained at the beginning of each experiment, and enzyme catalyzed p-nitroaniline production was quantitated from the standard curve. Compounds giving greater than 50%
inhibition were selected for further analysis.
For analysis of positive compounds, steady-state kinetic inhibition constants were determined as a function of both substrate and inhibitor concentration.
Substrate saturation curves were obtained at gly-pro-p-nitroanilide concentrations from 60 M to 3600 M.
Additional saturation curves also were obtained in the presence of inhibitor. Complete inhibition experiments contained 11 substrate and 7 inhibitor concentrations,
7.4. Lastly, the concentrated enzyme was chromatographed on a Pharmacia S-200 gel filtration column to removed low molecular weight contaminants. Purity of column fractions was analyzed by reducing SDS-PAGE, and the purest fractions were pooled and concentrated. Purified enzyme was stored in 20% glycerol at -80 C.
Assay of Porcine Dipeptidyl Peptidase IV
Enzyme was assayed under steady-state conditions as previously described (2) with gly-pro-p-nitroanilide as substrate, with the following modifications. Reactions contained, in a final volume of 100 l, 100 mM Aces, 52 mM TRIS, 52 mM ethanolamine, 500 M gly-pro-p-nitroanilide, 0.2 % DMSO, and 4.5 nM enzyme at 25 C, pH
7.4. For single assays at 10 M test compound, buffer, compound, and enzyme were added to wells of a 96 well microtiter plate, and were incubated at room temperature for 5 min. Reactions were started by addition of substrate. The continuous production of p-nitroaniline was measured at 405 nM for 15 min using a Molecular Devices Tmax plate reader, with a read every 9 seconds.
The linear rate of p-nitroaniline production was obtained over the linear portion of each progress curve. A
standard curve for p-nitroaniline absorbance was obtained at the beginning of each experiment, and enzyme catalyzed p-nitroaniline production was quantitated from the standard curve. Compounds giving greater than 50%
inhibition were selected for further analysis.
For analysis of positive compounds, steady-state kinetic inhibition constants were determined as a function of both substrate and inhibitor concentration.
Substrate saturation curves were obtained at gly-pro-p-nitroanilide concentrations from 60 M to 3600 M.
Additional saturation curves also were obtained in the presence of inhibitor. Complete inhibition experiments contained 11 substrate and 7 inhibitor concentrations,
- 35 -with triplicate determinations across plates. For tight binding inhibitors with Kis less than 20 nM, the enzyme concentration was reduced to 0.5 nM and reaction times were increased to 120 min. Pooled datasets from the three plates were fitted to the appropriate equation for either competitive, noncompetitive or uncompetitive inhibition.
(1) Rahfeld, J. Schutkowski, M., Faust, J., Neubert., Barth, A., and Heins, J. (1991) Biol. Chem.
Hoppe-Seyler, 372, 313-318.
(2) Nagatsu, T., Hino, M., Fuyamada, H., Hayakawa, T., Sakakibara, S., Nakagawa, Y., and Takemoto, T. (1976) Anal. Biochem., 74, 466-476.
The following abbreviations are employed in the Examples and elsewhere herein:
Ph = phenyl Bn = benzyl i-Bu = iso-butyl Me = methyl Et = ethyl Pr = propyl Bu = butyl TMS = trimethylsilyl FMOC = fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl Boc or BOC = tert-butoxycarbonyl Cbz = carbobenzyloxy or carbobenzoxy or benzyloxycarbonyl HOAc or AcOH = acetic acid DMF = N,N-dimethylformamide EtOAc = ethyl acetate THE = tetrahydrofuran TFA = trifluoroacetic acid Et2NH = diethylamine NMM = N-methyl morpholine
(1) Rahfeld, J. Schutkowski, M., Faust, J., Neubert., Barth, A., and Heins, J. (1991) Biol. Chem.
Hoppe-Seyler, 372, 313-318.
(2) Nagatsu, T., Hino, M., Fuyamada, H., Hayakawa, T., Sakakibara, S., Nakagawa, Y., and Takemoto, T. (1976) Anal. Biochem., 74, 466-476.
The following abbreviations are employed in the Examples and elsewhere herein:
Ph = phenyl Bn = benzyl i-Bu = iso-butyl Me = methyl Et = ethyl Pr = propyl Bu = butyl TMS = trimethylsilyl FMOC = fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl Boc or BOC = tert-butoxycarbonyl Cbz = carbobenzyloxy or carbobenzoxy or benzyloxycarbonyl HOAc or AcOH = acetic acid DMF = N,N-dimethylformamide EtOAc = ethyl acetate THE = tetrahydrofuran TFA = trifluoroacetic acid Et2NH = diethylamine NMM = N-methyl morpholine
36 -n-BuLi = n-butyllithium Pd/C = palladium on carbon Pt02 = platinum oxide TEA = triethylamine EDAC = 3-ethyl-3'-(dimethylamino)propyl-carbodiimide hydrochloride (or l-[(3-(dimethyl)amino)propyl])-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride) HOST or HOBT=H20 = 1-hydroxybenzotriazole hydrate HOAT = 1-hydroxy-7-azabenzotriazole PyBOP reagent = benzotriazol-l-yloxy-tripyrrolidino phosphonium hexafluorophosphate min = minute(s) h or hr = hour(s) L = liter mL = milliliter L = microliter g = gram(s) mg = milligram(s) mol = mole(s) mmol = millimole(s) meq = milliequivalent rt = room temperature sat or sat'd = saturated aq. = aqueous TLC = thin layer chromatography HPLC = high performance liquid chromatography LC/MS = high performance liquid chromatography/mass spectrometry MS or Mass Spec = mass spectrometry NMR = nuclear magnetic resonance mp = melting point The following Examples represent preferred embodiments of the invention.
- 37 -Example 1 TFA
O NC
Step 1.
BocN
COOEt Step 1 title compound was synthesized by following the literature procedure [Stephen Hanessian, Ulrich Reinhold, Michel Saulnier, and Stephen Claridge; Bioorganic &
Medicinal Chemistry Letters 8 (1998) 2123-2128] or with the following modifications. L-pyroglutamic acid ethyl ester was N-protected as the t-butylcarbamate (Boc20, DMAP
or NaH) and then dehydrated to the 4,5-dehydroproline ethyl ester in one pot by carbonyl reduction (triethylborohydride, toluene, -78 C) followed by dehydration (TFAA, lutidine). The title compound was obtained by cyclopropanation of the 4,5-dehydroproline ethyl ester (Et2Zn, C1CH2I, 1,2-dichloroethane, -15 C). A
more detailed protocol is as follows:
Synthesis of 4,5-dehydro-L-proline ethyl ester: L-pyroglutamic acid ethyl ester (200 g, 1.27 mol) was dissolved in 1.2 liters of methylene chloride and treated sequentially with di-tert-butyldicarbonate (297 g, 1.36 mol) and a catalytic DMAP (1.55 g, 0.013 mol) at ambient temperature. After 6 h, the mixture was quenched with
O NC
Step 1.
BocN
COOEt Step 1 title compound was synthesized by following the literature procedure [Stephen Hanessian, Ulrich Reinhold, Michel Saulnier, and Stephen Claridge; Bioorganic &
Medicinal Chemistry Letters 8 (1998) 2123-2128] or with the following modifications. L-pyroglutamic acid ethyl ester was N-protected as the t-butylcarbamate (Boc20, DMAP
or NaH) and then dehydrated to the 4,5-dehydroproline ethyl ester in one pot by carbonyl reduction (triethylborohydride, toluene, -78 C) followed by dehydration (TFAA, lutidine). The title compound was obtained by cyclopropanation of the 4,5-dehydroproline ethyl ester (Et2Zn, C1CH2I, 1,2-dichloroethane, -15 C). A
more detailed protocol is as follows:
Synthesis of 4,5-dehydro-L-proline ethyl ester: L-pyroglutamic acid ethyl ester (200 g, 1.27 mol) was dissolved in 1.2 liters of methylene chloride and treated sequentially with di-tert-butyldicarbonate (297 g, 1.36 mol) and a catalytic DMAP (1.55 g, 0.013 mol) at ambient temperature. After 6 h, the mixture was quenched with
- 38 -saturated brine and the organic phase was dried (Na2SO4) and filtered through a short silica gel column to give 323 g (100%) of N-Boc- L-pyroglutamic acid ethyl ester.
N-Boc- L-pyroglutamic acid ethyl ester ( 160 g, 0.62 mol) was dissolved in 1 liter of toluene, cooled to -78 C and treated with lithium triethylborohydride (666 mL of a 1.0 M soln in THF) and added dropwise over 90 minutes. After 3 h, 2,6-lutidine (423 mL, 3.73 mol) was added dropwise followed by DMAP (0.2 g, 0.0016 mol). To this mixture was added TFAA (157 g, 0.74 mol) and the reaction was allowed to come to ambient temperature over 2 h. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc and water and the organics were washed with 3 N HC1, water, aqueous bicarbonate and brine and dried (Na2SO4) and filtered through a silica gel plug to give 165 g of the crude 4,5-dehydroproline ethyl ester that was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel with 1:5 ethyl acetate:hexanes to give 120 g, 75% of the olefin.
Cyclopropanation of 4,5-dehydro-L-proline ethyl ester:
4,5-Dehydro-L-proline ethyl ester (35.0 g, 0.145 mol) was added to a solution of neat Et2Zn (35.8 g, 0.209 mol) in 1 liter of 1,2-dichloroethane at -15 C. To this mixture was added a dropwise addition of ClCH2I (102 g, 0.58 mol) over 1 h and the mixture stirred at -15 C for 18 h. The .reaction was quenched with saturated aqueous bicarbonate and the solvent was evaporated and the reaction was taken up in EtOAc, washed with brine and purified by silica gel chromatography using a stepwise gradient of from 20%
EtOAc/hexanes to 50% EtOAc/hexanes to give 17.5 g (50%) of diastereomerically pure step 1 title compound.
N-Boc- L-pyroglutamic acid ethyl ester ( 160 g, 0.62 mol) was dissolved in 1 liter of toluene, cooled to -78 C and treated with lithium triethylborohydride (666 mL of a 1.0 M soln in THF) and added dropwise over 90 minutes. After 3 h, 2,6-lutidine (423 mL, 3.73 mol) was added dropwise followed by DMAP (0.2 g, 0.0016 mol). To this mixture was added TFAA (157 g, 0.74 mol) and the reaction was allowed to come to ambient temperature over 2 h. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc and water and the organics were washed with 3 N HC1, water, aqueous bicarbonate and brine and dried (Na2SO4) and filtered through a silica gel plug to give 165 g of the crude 4,5-dehydroproline ethyl ester that was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel with 1:5 ethyl acetate:hexanes to give 120 g, 75% of the olefin.
Cyclopropanation of 4,5-dehydro-L-proline ethyl ester:
4,5-Dehydro-L-proline ethyl ester (35.0 g, 0.145 mol) was added to a solution of neat Et2Zn (35.8 g, 0.209 mol) in 1 liter of 1,2-dichloroethane at -15 C. To this mixture was added a dropwise addition of ClCH2I (102 g, 0.58 mol) over 1 h and the mixture stirred at -15 C for 18 h. The .reaction was quenched with saturated aqueous bicarbonate and the solvent was evaporated and the reaction was taken up in EtOAc, washed with brine and purified by silica gel chromatography using a stepwise gradient of from 20%
EtOAc/hexanes to 50% EtOAc/hexanes to give 17.5 g (50%) of diastereomerically pure step 1 title compound.
39 -Step 2.
TFA = HN
COOEt To a stirred solution of Step 1 compound (411 mg, 1.61 mmol) in CH2C12 (1. 5 mL) at rt was added TFA (1. 5 mL) The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 2 h and evaporated. The residue was diluted with CH2C12 and then evaporated and re-evaporated three times to give the title compound as a colorless oil, 433 mg, 100% yield.
Step 3.
BocHN N
O
COOEt To a stirred solution of (S)-N-tert-butoxycarbonyl-isoleucine (372.6 mg, 1.61 mmol) and benzotriazol-l-yloxytripyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate (1.25 g, 2.42 mmol) in CH2C12 (6 mL) under nitrogen at rt was added 4-methylmorpholine (NMM) (0.36 mL, 3.2 mmol).
After 5 min, a solution of Step 2 compound (433 mg, 1.61 mmol) and NMM (0.27 mL, 2.4 mmol) in CH2C12 (1,mL) was added. After addition, the reaction mixture was stirred under nitrogen at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with CH2C12 (40 mL) and washed with 4% KHSO4(10 mL), aqueous NaHCO3(10 mL) and brine (10 mL), dried (Na2SO4) and evaporated.
Purification by flash chromatography (1:4 EtOAc/hexane) gave the title compound as a colorless oil, 530 mg, 89%
yield.
TFA = HN
COOEt To a stirred solution of Step 1 compound (411 mg, 1.61 mmol) in CH2C12 (1. 5 mL) at rt was added TFA (1. 5 mL) The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 2 h and evaporated. The residue was diluted with CH2C12 and then evaporated and re-evaporated three times to give the title compound as a colorless oil, 433 mg, 100% yield.
Step 3.
BocHN N
O
COOEt To a stirred solution of (S)-N-tert-butoxycarbonyl-isoleucine (372.6 mg, 1.61 mmol) and benzotriazol-l-yloxytripyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate (1.25 g, 2.42 mmol) in CH2C12 (6 mL) under nitrogen at rt was added 4-methylmorpholine (NMM) (0.36 mL, 3.2 mmol).
After 5 min, a solution of Step 2 compound (433 mg, 1.61 mmol) and NMM (0.27 mL, 2.4 mmol) in CH2C12 (1,mL) was added. After addition, the reaction mixture was stirred under nitrogen at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with CH2C12 (40 mL) and washed with 4% KHSO4(10 mL), aqueous NaHCO3(10 mL) and brine (10 mL), dried (Na2SO4) and evaporated.
Purification by flash chromatography (1:4 EtOAc/hexane) gave the title compound as a colorless oil, 530 mg, 89%
yield.
40 -Step 4 BocHN N
O COOH
To a stirred solution of Step 3 compound (530 mg, 1.44 mmol) in MeOH (4 mL) and H2O (4 mL) at rt was added LiOH-H2O (91 mg, 2.16 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt overnight and evaporated. Water (10 mL) was added to the residue and extracted with Et20 (2 x 10 mL) The aqueous layer was acidified to -pH 4 by adding 4% KHSO4 dropwise. The milky solution was extracted with EtOAc (15 mL x 3). Combined EtOAc layers were washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated to give the title compound as a white solid, 440 mg, 90% yield.
Step 5 BocHN N
O
To a stirred solution of Step 4 compound (300 mg, 0.88 mmol) in THE (6 mL) at -15 C under nitrogen, was added 4-.
methylmorpholine (0.12 mL, 1.06 mmol) and then isobutyl chloroformate (0.13 mL, 0.97 mmol) over 2 min. White precipitate was formed. The reaction mixture was stirred at -15 C under nitrogen for 25 min and a solution of NH3 in dioxane ( 8.8 mL, 4.4 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at -15 C for 30 min, warmed to rt and stirred at rt overnight. The reaction mixture was quenched by 4% KHSO4 to -pH 4 and extracted with EtOAc (20 mL x 3). The extracts were combined, washed with brine
O COOH
To a stirred solution of Step 3 compound (530 mg, 1.44 mmol) in MeOH (4 mL) and H2O (4 mL) at rt was added LiOH-H2O (91 mg, 2.16 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt overnight and evaporated. Water (10 mL) was added to the residue and extracted with Et20 (2 x 10 mL) The aqueous layer was acidified to -pH 4 by adding 4% KHSO4 dropwise. The milky solution was extracted with EtOAc (15 mL x 3). Combined EtOAc layers were washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated to give the title compound as a white solid, 440 mg, 90% yield.
Step 5 BocHN N
O
To a stirred solution of Step 4 compound (300 mg, 0.88 mmol) in THE (6 mL) at -15 C under nitrogen, was added 4-.
methylmorpholine (0.12 mL, 1.06 mmol) and then isobutyl chloroformate (0.13 mL, 0.97 mmol) over 2 min. White precipitate was formed. The reaction mixture was stirred at -15 C under nitrogen for 25 min and a solution of NH3 in dioxane ( 8.8 mL, 4.4 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at -15 C for 30 min, warmed to rt and stirred at rt overnight. The reaction mixture was quenched by 4% KHSO4 to -pH 4 and extracted with EtOAc (20 mL x 3). The extracts were combined, washed with brine
41 -(10 mL) dried (Na2SO4) and evaporated. Purification by flash column chromatography (1:1 EtOAc/hexane) gave the title compound as a white foam, 268 mg, 90% yield.
Step 6 BocHN N
O
CN
To a stirred solution of Step 5 compound (248 mg, 1.38 mmol) and imidazole (94 mg, 1.38 mmol) in dry pyridine (12 mL) at -35 C under nitrogen was added POC13 (0.26 mL, 2.76 mmol) dropwise. The reaction mixture was stirred between -35 C to -20 C for 1 h and evaporated. CH2C12 (10 mL) was added and white precipitates were formed. After filtration, the filtrate was concentrated and purified by flash chromatography (2:5 EtOAc/hexane) to give the title compound as a colorless oil, 196 mg, 88% yield.
Step 7 TFA = H2N N
O
NC
To a stirred solution of Step 6 compound (130 mg, 0.4 mmol) in CH2C12 (2 mL) at rt was added TFA (2 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 2 h. The reaction mixture was added slowly to a pre-cooled slurry of NaHCO3 (3.8 g) in H2O (3 mL) . The mixture was extracted with CH2C12 (6 mL x 5), and the combined CH2C12 layers were evaporated and purified by preparative HPLC to give the title compound as a white powder, 77 mg. 57% yield, mp =
Step 6 BocHN N
O
CN
To a stirred solution of Step 5 compound (248 mg, 1.38 mmol) and imidazole (94 mg, 1.38 mmol) in dry pyridine (12 mL) at -35 C under nitrogen was added POC13 (0.26 mL, 2.76 mmol) dropwise. The reaction mixture was stirred between -35 C to -20 C for 1 h and evaporated. CH2C12 (10 mL) was added and white precipitates were formed. After filtration, the filtrate was concentrated and purified by flash chromatography (2:5 EtOAc/hexane) to give the title compound as a colorless oil, 196 mg, 88% yield.
Step 7 TFA = H2N N
O
NC
To a stirred solution of Step 6 compound (130 mg, 0.4 mmol) in CH2C12 (2 mL) at rt was added TFA (2 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 2 h. The reaction mixture was added slowly to a pre-cooled slurry of NaHCO3 (3.8 g) in H2O (3 mL) . The mixture was extracted with CH2C12 (6 mL x 5), and the combined CH2C12 layers were evaporated and purified by preparative HPLC to give the title compound as a white powder, 77 mg. 57% yield, mp =
- 42 -141-143 C. LC/MS gave the correct molecular ion [(M+H)+ _ 222] for the desired compound.
Example 2 O
TFA = H2N"JN XN`
Z-Z
NC
Step 1 BocN
COOEt Step 1 title compound was synthesized by following the literature procedure. [Stephen Hanessian, Ulrich Reinhold, Michel Saulnier, and Stephen Claridge;
Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters 8 (1998) 2123-2128.1 Step 2 O
TFA H2N _ xww N
NC
The title compound was prepared from Step 1 compound, employing the same procedure as that described for Example 1, Steps 2-6. LC/MS gave the correct molecular ion [(M+H)+ = 222] for the desired compound.
Example 2 O
TFA = H2N"JN XN`
Z-Z
NC
Step 1 BocN
COOEt Step 1 title compound was synthesized by following the literature procedure. [Stephen Hanessian, Ulrich Reinhold, Michel Saulnier, and Stephen Claridge;
Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters 8 (1998) 2123-2128.1 Step 2 O
TFA H2N _ xww N
NC
The title compound was prepared from Step 1 compound, employing the same procedure as that described for Example 1, Steps 2-6. LC/MS gave the correct molecular ion [(M+H)+ = 222] for the desired compound.
- 43 -Example 3 O
HCI = H2N,-JL H
N
H
Step 1 HCI = HN
L::
Step 1 title compound was prepared by following the literature procedure. [Willy D. Kollmeyer, U.S. Patent 4,183,857.1.
Step 2 O
BocHNH
flH
To a stirred solution of (S)-N-tert-butoxycarbonyl-isoleucine (231 mg, 1 mmol) and benzotriazol-1-yloxytripyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate (780 mg, 1.5 mmol) in CH2C12 (6 mL) under nitrogen at rt was added 4-methylmorpholine (0.33 mL, 3 mmol). After 5 min, Step 1 compound (120 mg, 1 mmol) was added in one portion. The reaction mixture was stirred under nitrogen at rt overnight and then diluted with CH2C12 (30 mL), washed with 4.1o KHSO4 (10 mL), aqueous NaHCO3 (10 mL), brine (10 mL) , dried (Na2SO4) and evaporated.
Purification by flash chromatography on silica gel (2.4 x 20 cm column, 1:3 EtOAc/hexane) gave the title compound as a colorless oil, 290 mg, 90% yield. LC/MS gave the correct molecular ion [(M+H)+ = 297] for the desired compound.
HCI = H2N,-JL H
N
H
Step 1 HCI = HN
L::
Step 1 title compound was prepared by following the literature procedure. [Willy D. Kollmeyer, U.S. Patent 4,183,857.1.
Step 2 O
BocHNH
flH
To a stirred solution of (S)-N-tert-butoxycarbonyl-isoleucine (231 mg, 1 mmol) and benzotriazol-1-yloxytripyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate (780 mg, 1.5 mmol) in CH2C12 (6 mL) under nitrogen at rt was added 4-methylmorpholine (0.33 mL, 3 mmol). After 5 min, Step 1 compound (120 mg, 1 mmol) was added in one portion. The reaction mixture was stirred under nitrogen at rt overnight and then diluted with CH2C12 (30 mL), washed with 4.1o KHSO4 (10 mL), aqueous NaHCO3 (10 mL), brine (10 mL) , dried (Na2SO4) and evaporated.
Purification by flash chromatography on silica gel (2.4 x 20 cm column, 1:3 EtOAc/hexane) gave the title compound as a colorless oil, 290 mg, 90% yield. LC/MS gave the correct molecular ion [(M+H)+ = 297] for the desired compound.
- 44 -Step 3 O
N
HCI=H2N~JIH
H
The reaction mixture of Step 2 compound (220 mg, 0.74 mmol) and 4 M HC1 in dioxane (1.5 mL, 6 mmol) was stirred at rt for 2 h and evaporated under reduced pressure. Et20 was added to the residue and a precipitate was formed.
Et20 was decanted and this was done three times. The precipitate was dried in vacuo to give the title compound as a white powder, 130 mg (76% yield), mp 205-206 C.
LC/MS gave the correct molecular ion [(M+H)+ = 197] for the desired compound.
Examples 4-4A
TFA = H2N'-JIN TFA = H2N"JLN
NC NC
(Example 4) (Example 4A) Step 1 Him HN
NC NCB
Step 1 title compound, as a 1:1 ratio of enantiomers, was prepared by following the literature procedure. [Willy D. Kollmeyer, U.S. Patent 4,183,857.]
N
HCI=H2N~JIH
H
The reaction mixture of Step 2 compound (220 mg, 0.74 mmol) and 4 M HC1 in dioxane (1.5 mL, 6 mmol) was stirred at rt for 2 h and evaporated under reduced pressure. Et20 was added to the residue and a precipitate was formed.
Et20 was decanted and this was done three times. The precipitate was dried in vacuo to give the title compound as a white powder, 130 mg (76% yield), mp 205-206 C.
LC/MS gave the correct molecular ion [(M+H)+ = 197] for the desired compound.
Examples 4-4A
TFA = H2N'-JIN TFA = H2N"JLN
NC NC
(Example 4) (Example 4A) Step 1 Him HN
NC NCB
Step 1 title compound, as a 1:1 ratio of enantiomers, was prepared by following the literature procedure. [Willy D. Kollmeyer, U.S. Patent 4,183,857.]
45 -Step 2 O O
BocHNI'J'N BocHN"-["N
+
NC NC
A slurry of (S)-N-tert-butoxycarbonyl-isoleucine (92.5 mg, 0.4 mmol), 1-[(3-(dimethyl)amino)propyl]-3-ethylcarbodiimide(77 mg, 0.4 mmol) and HOAT (54.4 mg, 0.4 mmol) in C1CH2CH2C1 (0.3 mL) was stirred under nitrogen at rt for 1 h, then Step 1 compound (22 mg, 0.2 mmol) was added, followed by Et3N (0.015 mL, 0.1 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred under nitrogen at rt overnight and then diluted with CH2C12 (3 mL), washed with H2O (1 mL), aqueous NaHCO3(1 mL) and brine (1 mL), dried (Na2SO4) and evaporated. Purification by flash chromatography on silica gel (2.4 x 12 cm column, 2:7 EtOAc/hexane) gave the title compound as a colorless oil, 33 mg, 51% yield. LC/MS gave the correct molecular ion [(M+H)+ = 322] for the desired compound.
Step 3 O O
TFA = H2NLN TFA = H2N` LN
NC NC
(Example 4) (Example 4A) To a stirred solution of Step 2 compound (30 mg, 0.4 mmol) in CH2C12 (0. 5 mL) at rt was added TFA (0. 5 mL) The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 2 h. The reaction mixture was added slowly to a precooled slurry of NaHCO3 (0.8 g) in H2O (1 mL) . The mixture was extracted with CH2C12 (2 mL x 5) , and combined CH2C12 layers were evaporated and purified by preparative HPLC
to give the title compounds as a 1:1 ratio of
BocHNI'J'N BocHN"-["N
+
NC NC
A slurry of (S)-N-tert-butoxycarbonyl-isoleucine (92.5 mg, 0.4 mmol), 1-[(3-(dimethyl)amino)propyl]-3-ethylcarbodiimide(77 mg, 0.4 mmol) and HOAT (54.4 mg, 0.4 mmol) in C1CH2CH2C1 (0.3 mL) was stirred under nitrogen at rt for 1 h, then Step 1 compound (22 mg, 0.2 mmol) was added, followed by Et3N (0.015 mL, 0.1 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred under nitrogen at rt overnight and then diluted with CH2C12 (3 mL), washed with H2O (1 mL), aqueous NaHCO3(1 mL) and brine (1 mL), dried (Na2SO4) and evaporated. Purification by flash chromatography on silica gel (2.4 x 12 cm column, 2:7 EtOAc/hexane) gave the title compound as a colorless oil, 33 mg, 51% yield. LC/MS gave the correct molecular ion [(M+H)+ = 322] for the desired compound.
Step 3 O O
TFA = H2NLN TFA = H2N` LN
NC NC
(Example 4) (Example 4A) To a stirred solution of Step 2 compound (30 mg, 0.4 mmol) in CH2C12 (0. 5 mL) at rt was added TFA (0. 5 mL) The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 2 h. The reaction mixture was added slowly to a precooled slurry of NaHCO3 (0.8 g) in H2O (1 mL) . The mixture was extracted with CH2C12 (2 mL x 5) , and combined CH2C12 layers were evaporated and purified by preparative HPLC
to give the title compounds as a 1:1 ratio of
- 46 -diastereomers, 22 mg, 73% yield. LC/MS gave the correct molecular ion [(M+H)+ = 222] for the desired compounds.
Examples 5-5A
TFA H2N~LN TFA ' H2NLN
and NC NCB
(Example 5) (Example 5A) Step 1 HN HC..' nrr NC NCB
To a solution of Example 4, Step 1 compound (150 mg, 1.39 mmol) in 2-propanol (0.8 mL), was added NaCN (40 mg, 1.0 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated to reflux for 3 h. After cooling to rt, the reaction mixture was evaporated and then slurried in Et20 (5 mL) . After filtration, the filtrate was evaporated to give Example 4 Step 1 compounds and Example 5 Step 1 compounds (140 mg, 93%) as a 2:1 mixture of diastereomers, each as a racemic mixture.
Step 2 O O
BocHN `-1~1 BocHN
NC NC
A slurry of (S)-N-tert-butoxycarbonyl-isoleucine (595 mg, 2.57 mmol), 1-[(3-(dimethyl)amino)propyl]-3-ethylcarbodiimide(493 mg, 2.57 mmol) and 1-hydroxy-7-azabenzotriazole (350 mg, 2.57 mmol) in C1CH2CH2C1 (2 mL) was stirred under nitrogen at rt for 1 h, then Step 1 compound mixture (139 mg, 1.28 mmol) was added. The
Examples 5-5A
TFA H2N~LN TFA ' H2NLN
and NC NCB
(Example 5) (Example 5A) Step 1 HN HC..' nrr NC NCB
To a solution of Example 4, Step 1 compound (150 mg, 1.39 mmol) in 2-propanol (0.8 mL), was added NaCN (40 mg, 1.0 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated to reflux for 3 h. After cooling to rt, the reaction mixture was evaporated and then slurried in Et20 (5 mL) . After filtration, the filtrate was evaporated to give Example 4 Step 1 compounds and Example 5 Step 1 compounds (140 mg, 93%) as a 2:1 mixture of diastereomers, each as a racemic mixture.
Step 2 O O
BocHN `-1~1 BocHN
NC NC
A slurry of (S)-N-tert-butoxycarbonyl-isoleucine (595 mg, 2.57 mmol), 1-[(3-(dimethyl)amino)propyl]-3-ethylcarbodiimide(493 mg, 2.57 mmol) and 1-hydroxy-7-azabenzotriazole (350 mg, 2.57 mmol) in C1CH2CH2C1 (2 mL) was stirred under nitrogen at rt for 1 h, then Step 1 compound mixture (139 mg, 1.28 mmol) was added. The
- 47 -reaction mixture was stirred under nitrogen at rt overnight and then diluted with CH2C12 (30 mL), washed with H2O (10 mL), saturated aqueous NaHCO3 (10 mL) and brine (10 mL), dried (Na2SO4) and evaporated.
Purification by flash chromatography on silica gel (2.4 x 20 cm column, 1:3 EtOAc/hexane) gave the Example 4, Step 2 compound (260 mg), and the title compounds (105 mg) as a ratio of 1:1 diastereomers. LC/MS gave the correct molecular ion [(M+H)+ = 322] for the desired compounds.
Step 3 TFA H2N~N TFA ' H2NLN
and N- N(?
(Example 5) (Example 5A) To a stirred solution of Step 2 compounds (104 mg, 0.32 mmol) in CH2C12 (1 mL) at rt was added TFA (1 mL) . The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 2 h. The reaction mixture was added slowly to a precooled slurry of NaHCO3 (2 g) in H2O (2 mL) . The mixture was extracted with CH2C12 (4 mL x 4), and combined CH2C12 layers were evaporated and purified by preparative HPLC to give the title compound Example 5 (36 mg) and Example 5A (36 mg).
LC/MS gave the correct molecular ion [(M+H)+ = 222] for the desired compounds.
Example 6 General Method A: Parallel array synthesis methods for preparation of inhibitors from commercially available amino acids. As shown in Scheme 3, the ester 11, described in Example 1 Step 1, was saponified to the acid with LiOH in THF/H20 and converted to the amide 12 by treatment with isobutyl chloroformate/NMM followed by ammonia in dioxane. The Boc protecting group was removed under acidic conditions using TFA in methylene chloride to give 13. The TFA salt was coupled to Boc-t-
Purification by flash chromatography on silica gel (2.4 x 20 cm column, 1:3 EtOAc/hexane) gave the Example 4, Step 2 compound (260 mg), and the title compounds (105 mg) as a ratio of 1:1 diastereomers. LC/MS gave the correct molecular ion [(M+H)+ = 322] for the desired compounds.
Step 3 TFA H2N~N TFA ' H2NLN
and N- N(?
(Example 5) (Example 5A) To a stirred solution of Step 2 compounds (104 mg, 0.32 mmol) in CH2C12 (1 mL) at rt was added TFA (1 mL) . The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 2 h. The reaction mixture was added slowly to a precooled slurry of NaHCO3 (2 g) in H2O (2 mL) . The mixture was extracted with CH2C12 (4 mL x 4), and combined CH2C12 layers were evaporated and purified by preparative HPLC to give the title compound Example 5 (36 mg) and Example 5A (36 mg).
LC/MS gave the correct molecular ion [(M+H)+ = 222] for the desired compounds.
Example 6 General Method A: Parallel array synthesis methods for preparation of inhibitors from commercially available amino acids. As shown in Scheme 3, the ester 11, described in Example 1 Step 1, was saponified to the acid with LiOH in THF/H20 and converted to the amide 12 by treatment with isobutyl chloroformate/NMM followed by ammonia in dioxane. The Boc protecting group was removed under acidic conditions using TFA in methylene chloride to give 13. The TFA salt was coupled to Boc-t-
- 48 -butylglycine using either EDAC/HOBT/DMF or EDAC/DMAP/CH2C12 to give 14. The amide was dehydrated to the nitrile 15 using POC13/imidazole in pyridine at -20 C
and finally deprotected with TFA in CH2C12 at ambient temperature to afford the target 16.
Scheme 3, General Method A (Examples 6-27) H, ,,H H, ,H H" H
a, b c d ,N ,N TFAHN
Boc Boc H' CO2Et CONH2 CONH2 JH, H H, H H, H
e f BocHN N BocHN N TFAH2N N
a. LIOH inTHF/H20 or MeOH/ H2O b. i-BuOCOCI/ NMM or i-BuOCOCI/TEA at -30C or EDAC, then NH3 in dioxane or Et20 at RT c.TFA, CH2CI2, RT d. Boc-t-butylglycine and PyBop/ NMM
or EDAC, DMAP, CH2CI2 e. POCI3, pyridine, imidazole, -20C f. TFA, CH2CI2, RT
TFA = H2N
O N
NC
Step 1 Boc O
OH
To a stirred solution of Example 1 Step 1 compound (1.40 g, 5.49 mmol) in 40 mL of a 1:1 methanol:water solution at rt was added lithium hydroxide (0.20 g, 8.30 mmol).
The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 18 h and then
and finally deprotected with TFA in CH2C12 at ambient temperature to afford the target 16.
Scheme 3, General Method A (Examples 6-27) H, ,,H H, ,H H" H
a, b c d ,N ,N TFAHN
Boc Boc H' CO2Et CONH2 CONH2 JH, H H, H H, H
e f BocHN N BocHN N TFAH2N N
a. LIOH inTHF/H20 or MeOH/ H2O b. i-BuOCOCI/ NMM or i-BuOCOCI/TEA at -30C or EDAC, then NH3 in dioxane or Et20 at RT c.TFA, CH2CI2, RT d. Boc-t-butylglycine and PyBop/ NMM
or EDAC, DMAP, CH2CI2 e. POCI3, pyridine, imidazole, -20C f. TFA, CH2CI2, RT
TFA = H2N
O N
NC
Step 1 Boc O
OH
To a stirred solution of Example 1 Step 1 compound (1.40 g, 5.49 mmol) in 40 mL of a 1:1 methanol:water solution at rt was added lithium hydroxide (0.20 g, 8.30 mmol).
The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 18 h and then
49 -heated to 50 C for 2 h. The mixture was diluted with equal volumes of ether and water (50 mL) and then acidified with KHSO4 to pH 3. The milky solution was extracted with ether (3 X 20 mL). The combined ether layers were dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated. The residue was stripped from toluene (2 X 10 mL) and dried under reduced pressure to give the title compound as a thick syrup, 1.20 g, 96%.
Step 2 Boc O
To a stirred solution of Step 1 compound (1.20 g, 5.28 mmol) in THE (20 mL) at -15 C under nitrogen was added 4-methylmorpholine (0.71 mL, 6.50 mmol) and then isobutyl chloroformate (0.78 mL, 6.00 mmol) over 5 min. The reaction was stirred at -15 C for 30 min, cooled to -30 C
and treated with a solution of NH3 in dioxane (50 mL, 25 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at -30 C for 30 min, warmed to rt and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was quenched with citric acid solution (pH 4) and extracted with ether (3 X 50 mL). The combined organic fractions were washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated. Purification by flash column chromatography on silica gel with EtOAc gave the Step 2 compound, 1.00 g, 84%.
Step 3 TFA - HN
Step 2 Boc O
To a stirred solution of Step 1 compound (1.20 g, 5.28 mmol) in THE (20 mL) at -15 C under nitrogen was added 4-methylmorpholine (0.71 mL, 6.50 mmol) and then isobutyl chloroformate (0.78 mL, 6.00 mmol) over 5 min. The reaction was stirred at -15 C for 30 min, cooled to -30 C
and treated with a solution of NH3 in dioxane (50 mL, 25 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at -30 C for 30 min, warmed to rt and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was quenched with citric acid solution (pH 4) and extracted with ether (3 X 50 mL). The combined organic fractions were washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated. Purification by flash column chromatography on silica gel with EtOAc gave the Step 2 compound, 1.00 g, 84%.
Step 3 TFA - HN
- 50 -To a stirred solution of Step 2 compound (0..90 g, 4.00 mmol) in CH2C12 (3 mL) at 0 C was added TFA (3 mL) . The reaction mixture was stirred at 0 C for 18 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure to produce title compound in the form of a thick oil, 0.98 g, 100%. The oil gradually solidified upon prolonged standing.
Step 4 BocHN
O N
O
An oven-dried 15-mL test tube was charged with Step 3 compound (56 mg, 0.22 mmol), N-tert-butoxycarbonyl-(L)-tert-leucine (53 mg, 0.23 mmol), dimethylaminopyridine (0.11 g, 0.88 mmol), and CH2C12 (4 mL) The tube was sealed under nitrogen atmosphere and treated with 1-[(3-(dimethyl)amino)propyl]-3-ethylcarbodiimide (84 mg, 0.44 mmol). The mixture was placed in a shaker and vortexed overnight. The product was purified by solid phase extraction using a United Technology SCX column (2 g of sorbent in a 6 mL column) by loading the material on a SCX ion exchange column and successively washing with CH2C12 (5 mL), 30% methanol in CH2C12 (5 mL), 50% methanol in CH2C12 (5 mL) and methanol (10 mL). The product containing fractions were concentrated under reduced pressure to give the desired amide. Further purification by reverse phase preparative column chromatography on a YMC S5 ODS 20 X 250 mm column gave the title compound, 50 mg (68% yield). Purification conditions: Gradient elution from 30% methanol/water/0.1 TFA to 90%
methanol/water/0.1 TFA over 15 min. 5 min. hold at 90%
Step 4 BocHN
O N
O
An oven-dried 15-mL test tube was charged with Step 3 compound (56 mg, 0.22 mmol), N-tert-butoxycarbonyl-(L)-tert-leucine (53 mg, 0.23 mmol), dimethylaminopyridine (0.11 g, 0.88 mmol), and CH2C12 (4 mL) The tube was sealed under nitrogen atmosphere and treated with 1-[(3-(dimethyl)amino)propyl]-3-ethylcarbodiimide (84 mg, 0.44 mmol). The mixture was placed in a shaker and vortexed overnight. The product was purified by solid phase extraction using a United Technology SCX column (2 g of sorbent in a 6 mL column) by loading the material on a SCX ion exchange column and successively washing with CH2C12 (5 mL), 30% methanol in CH2C12 (5 mL), 50% methanol in CH2C12 (5 mL) and methanol (10 mL). The product containing fractions were concentrated under reduced pressure to give the desired amide. Further purification by reverse phase preparative column chromatography on a YMC S5 ODS 20 X 250 mm column gave the title compound, 50 mg (68% yield). Purification conditions: Gradient elution from 30% methanol/water/0.1 TFA to 90%
methanol/water/0.1 TFA over 15 min. 5 min. hold at 90%
- 51 -methanol/water/0.1 TFA. Flow rate: 20 mL/min. Detection wavelength: 220. Retention Time: 14 min.
Step 5 BocHN
N
NC
An oven-dried 15-mL test tube was charged with Step 4 compound (50 mg, 0.15 mmol), imidazole (31 mg, 0.46 mmol), and pyridine (1 mL). The tube was sealed under nitrogen atmosphere and cooled to -30 C. Slow addition of POC13 (141 mg, 88 uL, 0.92 mmol) gave after mixing a thick slurry. The tube was mixed at -30 C for 3 h and the volatiles evaporated. The product was purified by solid phase extraction using a United Technology silica extraction column (2 g of sorbent in a 6 mL column) by loading the material on a silica column and successively washing with CH2C12 (5 mL), 5% methanol in CH2C12 (5 mL), 7% methanol in CH2C12 (5 mL) and 12% methanol in CH2C12 (10 mL). The product containing fractions were pooled and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the title compound, 46 mg, 96%.
Step 6 O N
NC
An oven-dried 15-mL test tube was charged with Step 5 compound (0.45 mg, 0.14 mmol), CH2C12 (1 mL), and TFA (1 mL). The reaction mixture was vortexed for 40 min at rt,
Step 5 BocHN
N
NC
An oven-dried 15-mL test tube was charged with Step 4 compound (50 mg, 0.15 mmol), imidazole (31 mg, 0.46 mmol), and pyridine (1 mL). The tube was sealed under nitrogen atmosphere and cooled to -30 C. Slow addition of POC13 (141 mg, 88 uL, 0.92 mmol) gave after mixing a thick slurry. The tube was mixed at -30 C for 3 h and the volatiles evaporated. The product was purified by solid phase extraction using a United Technology silica extraction column (2 g of sorbent in a 6 mL column) by loading the material on a silica column and successively washing with CH2C12 (5 mL), 5% methanol in CH2C12 (5 mL), 7% methanol in CH2C12 (5 mL) and 12% methanol in CH2C12 (10 mL). The product containing fractions were pooled and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the title compound, 46 mg, 96%.
Step 6 O N
NC
An oven-dried 15-mL test tube was charged with Step 5 compound (0.45 mg, 0.14 mmol), CH2C12 (1 mL), and TFA (1 mL). The reaction mixture was vortexed for 40 min at rt,
- 52 -diluted with toluene (4 mL) and concentrated under reduced pressure to a thick oil. The product was purified by reverse phase preparative column chromatography on a YMC S5 ODS 20 X 250 mm column to give the Example 6 compound, 14 mg, 35%. Purification conditions: gradient elution from 10% methanol/water/0.1 TFA to 90% methanol/water/0.1 TFA over 18 min; 5 min hold at 90% methanol/water/0.1 TFA. Flow rate: 20 mL/min.
Detection wavelength: 220. Retention Time: 10 min.
Examples 7-27 were prepared from amino acids available from commercial sources according to the procedure in Example 6.
Detection wavelength: 220. Retention Time: 10 min.
Examples 7-27 were prepared from amino acids available from commercial sources according to the procedure in Example 6.
- 53 -Table 1 RAN
CN
Example R [M + H]
7 g 302 O
O
O
O
-NH
O
O
CN
Example R [M + H]
7 g 302 O
O
O
O
-NH
O
O
54 -O
H
H O
17 LL~ 256 O
O
19 ,\ 220 C H
N
H
O
H
20 ~`~~ 220 N
H
O
21 = O 210
H
H O
17 LL~ 256 O
O
19 ,\ 220 C H
N
H
O
H
20 ~`~~ 220 N
H
O
21 = O 210
55 -H
24 = 210 O
NC
25. 281 O
Example 27 HO
CN
Step 1 BnO
BocHN N
(2S,4S,5S)-4,5-methano-L-proline carboxylamide, TFA salt (53 mg, 0.22 mmol) was coupled to N-Boc-L-Tyrosine-benzyl ether(82 mg, 0.22 mmol) using PyBop (172 mg, 0.33 mmol) and N-methylmorpholine (67 mg, 0.66 mmol) in 4 mL CH2C12.
The reaction stirred for 16 h, was taken up in EtOAc, washed with H20, 1N aqueous HC1, brine, then evaporated and purified by silica gel flash chromatography to give the coupled product (FAB MH+ 480).
24 = 210 O
NC
25. 281 O
Example 27 HO
CN
Step 1 BnO
BocHN N
(2S,4S,5S)-4,5-methano-L-proline carboxylamide, TFA salt (53 mg, 0.22 mmol) was coupled to N-Boc-L-Tyrosine-benzyl ether(82 mg, 0.22 mmol) using PyBop (172 mg, 0.33 mmol) and N-methylmorpholine (67 mg, 0.66 mmol) in 4 mL CH2C12.
The reaction stirred for 16 h, was taken up in EtOAc, washed with H20, 1N aqueous HC1, brine, then evaporated and purified by silica gel flash chromatography to give the coupled product (FAB MH+ 480).
- 56 -Step 2 rN
~ J7:ZCN
O I
Boc The Step 1 amide was dehydrated to the nitrile using the general method C (which follows Example 29) (FAB MH+
462).
Step 3 N
CN
HO I
HN
Boc The Step 2 benzyl ether was cleaved by catalytic hydrogenolysis using 10% palladium on carbon and 1 atmosphere hydrogen gas in MeOH at rt for 1.5 h. The reaction was filtered through celite and concentrated to an oil and taken on without further purification (FAB MH+
372).
Step 4 HO
N
~ J7:ZCN
O I
Boc The Step 1 amide was dehydrated to the nitrile using the general method C (which follows Example 29) (FAB MH+
462).
Step 3 N
CN
HO I
HN
Boc The Step 2 benzyl ether was cleaved by catalytic hydrogenolysis using 10% palladium on carbon and 1 atmosphere hydrogen gas in MeOH at rt for 1.5 h. The reaction was filtered through celite and concentrated to an oil and taken on without further purification (FAB MH+
372).
Step 4 HO
N
57 -Step 3 N-[N-Boc-L-Tyrosine-]-(2S,4S,5S)-2-cyano-4,5-methano-L-prolylamide was dissolved in CH2C12 and TFA was added at rt. The reaction stirred for 1 h and was evaporated and purified by preparative HPLC as described in general method B (set out following Example 29) to afford the title compound (FAB MH+ 272).
Example 28 HO
O CN
The title compound was prepared by coupling (2S,4S,5S)-4,5-methano-L-proline carboxylamide, TFA salt described in Example 6 Step 3 compound with N-(tert-butyloxy-carbonylhydroxyvaline. After hydroxyl protection with triethylsilyl chloride and dehydration of the amide with POC13/imidazole in pyridine and deprotection (N-terminal nitrogen and valine hydroxyl) with TFA using general method C (FAB MH+ 224), the title compound was obtained.
Example 29 O
HON
Step 1 H O
N/i. OH
O
OTBS
N-Boc-L-homoserine (1.20 g, 5.47 mmol) upon treatment with tert-butyldimethylsilyl chloride (1.67 g, 11.04
Example 28 HO
O CN
The title compound was prepared by coupling (2S,4S,5S)-4,5-methano-L-proline carboxylamide, TFA salt described in Example 6 Step 3 compound with N-(tert-butyloxy-carbonylhydroxyvaline. After hydroxyl protection with triethylsilyl chloride and dehydration of the amide with POC13/imidazole in pyridine and deprotection (N-terminal nitrogen and valine hydroxyl) with TFA using general method C (FAB MH+ 224), the title compound was obtained.
Example 29 O
HON
Step 1 H O
N/i. OH
O
OTBS
N-Boc-L-homoserine (1.20 g, 5.47 mmol) upon treatment with tert-butyldimethylsilyl chloride (1.67 g, 11.04
- 58 -mmol) and imidazole (938 mg, 13.8 mmol) in THE (17 mL) was stirred as thick slurry for 48 h under N2. The solvent was evaporated, and the crude material was dissolved in NeOH (10 mL). The resulting solution was stirred at rt for 2 h. The solvent was evaporated, and the crude material was diluted with CH2C12 (50 mL) and treated with 0.1N HC1 (2x10 mL). The CH2C12 layer was washed with brine and dried over MgSO4. Removal of the volatiles gave title compound as an oil (1.8 g), which was used without further purification (LC/Mass, + ion):
334 (M+H).
Step 2 O H O
& N
O
To a stirred solution of Step 1 compound (333 mg, 1.0 mmol) in 6 mL of CH2C12 was added 1-[3-(dimethylamino)-propyl]-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (256 mg, 1.32 mmol). The solution was then stirred at rt for 30 min, followed by addition with Example 6 Step 3 amine TFA salt (160 mg, 0.66 mmol) and 4-(dimethylamino)pyridine (244 mg, 2.0 mmol). The solution was then stirred at rt overnight. The mixture was diluted with CH2C12 (5 mL) and washed sequentially with H20, 10% citric acid, brine, then dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated to give the title compound (350 mg) which was used without further purification (LC/Mass, + ion): 442 (M+H).
334 (M+H).
Step 2 O H O
& N
O
To a stirred solution of Step 1 compound (333 mg, 1.0 mmol) in 6 mL of CH2C12 was added 1-[3-(dimethylamino)-propyl]-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (256 mg, 1.32 mmol). The solution was then stirred at rt for 30 min, followed by addition with Example 6 Step 3 amine TFA salt (160 mg, 0.66 mmol) and 4-(dimethylamino)pyridine (244 mg, 2.0 mmol). The solution was then stirred at rt overnight. The mixture was diluted with CH2C12 (5 mL) and washed sequentially with H20, 10% citric acid, brine, then dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated to give the title compound (350 mg) which was used without further purification (LC/Mass, + ion): 442 (M+H).
59 -Step 3 O H O
N/i. N
CN
OTBS
An oven-dried 10-mL round bottomed flask was charged with Step 2 compound (350 mg, 0.79 mmol), imidazole (108 mg, 1.58 mmol), pyridine (3 mL). The flask under argon was cooled to -30 C. Slow addition of POC13 (0.30 mL, 3.16 mmol) gave after mixing a thick slurry. The slurry was mixed at -30 C for 3 h and the volatiles evaporated.
Dichloromethane (5 mL) was then added and the insoluble solid was removed by filtration. The organic layer was washed with H20, 10% citric acid, brine and dried over Na2SO4. Removal of solvent gave crude desired nitrile (330 mg) (LC/Mass, + ion): 424 (M+H).
Step 4 O
HO,,,,,,,kN
Trifluoroacetic acid (3.3 mL) was added to a stirred solution of Step 3 compound (330 mg, 0.58 mmol) in 3.3 mL
CH2C12. The solution was then stirred at rt for 30 min, a few drops of water were added and the mixture mixture stirred for 0.5 h. The mixture was diluted with CH2C12 (5 mL) and concentrated under reduced pressure to a thick oil. The product was purified by reverse phase preparative column chromatography on a YMC S5 ODS 20x100 mm column to give the title compound, 59 mg, 17%.
Purification conditions: gradient elution from 10%
methanol/water/0.1 TFA to 90% methanol/water/ 0.1 TFA
N/i. N
CN
OTBS
An oven-dried 10-mL round bottomed flask was charged with Step 2 compound (350 mg, 0.79 mmol), imidazole (108 mg, 1.58 mmol), pyridine (3 mL). The flask under argon was cooled to -30 C. Slow addition of POC13 (0.30 mL, 3.16 mmol) gave after mixing a thick slurry. The slurry was mixed at -30 C for 3 h and the volatiles evaporated.
Dichloromethane (5 mL) was then added and the insoluble solid was removed by filtration. The organic layer was washed with H20, 10% citric acid, brine and dried over Na2SO4. Removal of solvent gave crude desired nitrile (330 mg) (LC/Mass, + ion): 424 (M+H).
Step 4 O
HO,,,,,,,kN
Trifluoroacetic acid (3.3 mL) was added to a stirred solution of Step 3 compound (330 mg, 0.58 mmol) in 3.3 mL
CH2C12. The solution was then stirred at rt for 30 min, a few drops of water were added and the mixture mixture stirred for 0.5 h. The mixture was diluted with CH2C12 (5 mL) and concentrated under reduced pressure to a thick oil. The product was purified by reverse phase preparative column chromatography on a YMC S5 ODS 20x100 mm column to give the title compound, 59 mg, 17%.
Purification conditions: gradient elution from 10%
methanol/water/0.1 TFA to 90% methanol/water/ 0.1 TFA
- 60 -over 15 min; 5 min hold at 90% methanol/water/0.1 TFA.
Flow rate: 20 mL/min. Detection wavelength: 220.
Retention Time 10.Min. (LC/Mass, + ion): 210 (M+H).
General Method B: Claisen rearrangement sequence to Boc-protected amino acids.
BocHN OH
General method B affords the quaternary Boc-protected amino acids. Examples 30-47 contain the vinyl sidechain by coupling amino acids of which Scheme 4, compound 20 is representative. Cyclopentanone was olefinated under Horner-Emmons conditions to afford 17 which was reduced to the allylic alcohol 18 using DIBAL-H in toluene -78 C
to rt. Allylic alcohol 18 was esterified with N-Boc glycine using DCC/DMAP in CH2C12 to give 19. Glycine ester 19 was subjected to a Lewis acid mediated Claisen rearrangement by complexation with anhydrous zinc chloride and deprotonation at -78 C with lithium diisopropylamide followed by warming to ambient temperature to afford 20.
Flow rate: 20 mL/min. Detection wavelength: 220.
Retention Time 10.Min. (LC/Mass, + ion): 210 (M+H).
General Method B: Claisen rearrangement sequence to Boc-protected amino acids.
BocHN OH
General method B affords the quaternary Boc-protected amino acids. Examples 30-47 contain the vinyl sidechain by coupling amino acids of which Scheme 4, compound 20 is representative. Cyclopentanone was olefinated under Horner-Emmons conditions to afford 17 which was reduced to the allylic alcohol 18 using DIBAL-H in toluene -78 C
to rt. Allylic alcohol 18 was esterified with N-Boc glycine using DCC/DMAP in CH2C12 to give 19. Glycine ester 19 was subjected to a Lewis acid mediated Claisen rearrangement by complexation with anhydrous zinc chloride and deprotonation at -78 C with lithium diisopropylamide followed by warming to ambient temperature to afford 20.
- 61 -Scheme 4, General Method B, Examples 30-47 a _ b c O OR OH
O
0 d 0 N"I~Ok OAN OH
H H
O ~ O
a. Triethylphosphonoacetate, NaH, THE 0 C to RT b. DIBAL-H, toluene, -78 C to RT c. N-Boc glycine, DCC, DMAP, CH2CI2, RT
d. ZnCI2, THF, LDA, -78 C to RT
Step 1 Cyclopentylideneacetic acid ethyl ester.
To a flame-dried 500-mL round-bottomed flask containing NaH (5.10 g of a 60% dispersion in mineral oil, 128 mmol, 1.10 equiv) in 120 mL anhydrous THF at 0 C under argon was added triethylphosphonoacetate (25.6 mL, 128 mmol, 1.10 equiv) dropwise through an addition funnel. The mixture was allowed to warm to rt, stirring for an additional 1 h. A solution of cyclopentanone (10.3 mL, 116 mmol) in 10 mL anhydrous THF was added dropwise over 20 min through an addition funnel, and the mixture was allowed to stir at rt for 2.5 h. Ether (200 mL) and water (100 mL) were then added, and the layers were separated. The organic phase was washed successively with water (100 mL) and brine (100 mL), dried (Na2SO4), and concentrated under reduced pressure, giving 17.5 g (98%) of the desired ester as a colorless oil.
O
0 d 0 N"I~Ok OAN OH
H H
O ~ O
a. Triethylphosphonoacetate, NaH, THE 0 C to RT b. DIBAL-H, toluene, -78 C to RT c. N-Boc glycine, DCC, DMAP, CH2CI2, RT
d. ZnCI2, THF, LDA, -78 C to RT
Step 1 Cyclopentylideneacetic acid ethyl ester.
To a flame-dried 500-mL round-bottomed flask containing NaH (5.10 g of a 60% dispersion in mineral oil, 128 mmol, 1.10 equiv) in 120 mL anhydrous THF at 0 C under argon was added triethylphosphonoacetate (25.6 mL, 128 mmol, 1.10 equiv) dropwise through an addition funnel. The mixture was allowed to warm to rt, stirring for an additional 1 h. A solution of cyclopentanone (10.3 mL, 116 mmol) in 10 mL anhydrous THF was added dropwise over 20 min through an addition funnel, and the mixture was allowed to stir at rt for 2.5 h. Ether (200 mL) and water (100 mL) were then added, and the layers were separated. The organic phase was washed successively with water (100 mL) and brine (100 mL), dried (Na2SO4), and concentrated under reduced pressure, giving 17.5 g (98%) of the desired ester as a colorless oil.
- 62 -Step 2 2-Cyclopentylideneethanol.
To a flame-dried 500-mL round-bottomed flask containing cyclopentylideneacetic acid ethyl ester (17.5 g, 113 mmol) in 100 mL anhydrous toluene at -78 C under argon was added DIBAL-H (189 mL of a 1.5 M solution in toluene, 284 mmol, 2.50 equiv) dropwise over a 30 min period through an addition funnel, and the mixture was then allowed to warm to rt, stirring for 18 h. The reaction mixture was then recooled to -78 C, and quenched by the careful addition of 30 mL anhydrous MeOH. Upon warming to rt, 1 N Rochelle's salt (100 mL) was added, and the mixture was stirred 90 min. The biphasic reaction mixture was then diluted with Et20 (200 mL) in a separatory funnel, and the layers were separated. The organic layer was then washed with brine (100 mL), dried (Na2SO4), and concentrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash column chromatography (silica gel, CH2C12 / EtOAc, 10:1) gave 11.6 g (92%) of the desired allylic alcohol as a colorless oil.
Step 3 (2-Cyclopentylideneethyl)-N-(tert-Butyloxycarbonyl) glycinate.
O
ON
To a flame-dried 500-mL round-bottomed flask containing N-(tert-butyloxycarbonyl)glycine (13.45 g, 76.75 mmol) in 100 mL CH2C12 at rt was added Step 2 compound (8.61 g, 76.75 mmol, 1.00 equiv) in 20 mL CH2C12, followed by dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (16.63 g, mmol, 1.05 equiv) in 80 mL CH2C12. To this reaction mixture was then added 4-
To a flame-dried 500-mL round-bottomed flask containing cyclopentylideneacetic acid ethyl ester (17.5 g, 113 mmol) in 100 mL anhydrous toluene at -78 C under argon was added DIBAL-H (189 mL of a 1.5 M solution in toluene, 284 mmol, 2.50 equiv) dropwise over a 30 min period through an addition funnel, and the mixture was then allowed to warm to rt, stirring for 18 h. The reaction mixture was then recooled to -78 C, and quenched by the careful addition of 30 mL anhydrous MeOH. Upon warming to rt, 1 N Rochelle's salt (100 mL) was added, and the mixture was stirred 90 min. The biphasic reaction mixture was then diluted with Et20 (200 mL) in a separatory funnel, and the layers were separated. The organic layer was then washed with brine (100 mL), dried (Na2SO4), and concentrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash column chromatography (silica gel, CH2C12 / EtOAc, 10:1) gave 11.6 g (92%) of the desired allylic alcohol as a colorless oil.
Step 3 (2-Cyclopentylideneethyl)-N-(tert-Butyloxycarbonyl) glycinate.
O
ON
To a flame-dried 500-mL round-bottomed flask containing N-(tert-butyloxycarbonyl)glycine (13.45 g, 76.75 mmol) in 100 mL CH2C12 at rt was added Step 2 compound (8.61 g, 76.75 mmol, 1.00 equiv) in 20 mL CH2C12, followed by dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (16.63 g, mmol, 1.05 equiv) in 80 mL CH2C12. To this reaction mixture was then added 4-
- 63 -dimethylaminopyridine (0.94 mg, mmol, 0.10 equiv), and the mixture was allowed to stir overnight. The reaction mixture was then filtered through a medium sintered-glass funnel, rinsing with 100 mL CH2C12, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was then purified by flash chromatography (silica gel, hexanes/EtOAc, 20:1 to 1:1 gradient) to give 19.43 g (94%) of the desired glycinyl ester as a colorless oil.
Step 4 N-(tert-Butyloxycarbonyl)(1'vinylcyclopentyl)-glycine BocHN OH
A flame-dried 500-mL round-bottomed flask under argon was charged with ZnC12 (11.8 g, mmol, 1.20 equiv) and 20 mL
toluene. The mixture was heated under vacuum with vigorous stirring to azeotrope off any traces of moisture with the distilling toluene, repeating this process (2 x). The flask was then cooled to rt under argon, (2-cyclopentylideneethyl) N-(tert-butyloxycarbonyl)glycinate (19.36 g, 71.88 mmol) was added via cannula as a solution in 180 mL THF, and the mixture was then cooled to -78 C.
In a separate flame-dried 200-mL round-bottomed flask containing diisopropylamine (26.3 mL, mmol, 2.60 equiv) in 90 mL THE at -78 C was added n-butyllithium (71.89 mL
of a 2.5 M solution in hexanes, mmol, 2.5 equiv), and the mixture was allowed to warm to 0 C for 30 min before recooling to -78 C. The lithium diisopropylamine thus generated was then added via cannula to the ZnC12 ester mixture dropwise at a steady rate over 40 min, and the
Step 4 N-(tert-Butyloxycarbonyl)(1'vinylcyclopentyl)-glycine BocHN OH
A flame-dried 500-mL round-bottomed flask under argon was charged with ZnC12 (11.8 g, mmol, 1.20 equiv) and 20 mL
toluene. The mixture was heated under vacuum with vigorous stirring to azeotrope off any traces of moisture with the distilling toluene, repeating this process (2 x). The flask was then cooled to rt under argon, (2-cyclopentylideneethyl) N-(tert-butyloxycarbonyl)glycinate (19.36 g, 71.88 mmol) was added via cannula as a solution in 180 mL THF, and the mixture was then cooled to -78 C.
In a separate flame-dried 200-mL round-bottomed flask containing diisopropylamine (26.3 mL, mmol, 2.60 equiv) in 90 mL THE at -78 C was added n-butyllithium (71.89 mL
of a 2.5 M solution in hexanes, mmol, 2.5 equiv), and the mixture was allowed to warm to 0 C for 30 min before recooling to -78 C. The lithium diisopropylamine thus generated was then added via cannula to the ZnC12 ester mixture dropwise at a steady rate over 40 min, and the
64 -resultant reaction mixture was allowed to slowly warm to rt and stir overnight. The yellow reaction mixture was then poured into a separatory funnel, diluted with 300 mL
Et20, and the resultant organic solution was washed successively with 300 mL 1N HC1 and 300 mL brine, dried (Na2SO4), and concentrated under reduced pressure.
Purification by flash chromatography (silica gel, 3% MeOH
in CH2C12 with 0.5% HOAc) gave 17.8 g (92%) of the desired amino acid product as a white solid. (FAB MH+ 270).
Example 30 General Method C: Peptide coupling to 4,5-methano-prolinamide, amide dehydration and final deprotection.
O CN
The TFA salt of amide 13 was coupled to a variety of racemic quaternary protected amino acids using HOBT/EDC
in DMF at rt to give a D/L mixture of diastereomers at the N-terminal amino acid. The desired L diastereomer was chromatographically isolated either as the amide 21 or as the nitrile 22. Nitrile 22 was obtained by treatment of the amide with POC13/imidazole in pyridine at -20 C. The final target 23 was obtained by deprotection under acidic conditions using TFA in CH2C12.
Et20, and the resultant organic solution was washed successively with 300 mL 1N HC1 and 300 mL brine, dried (Na2SO4), and concentrated under reduced pressure.
Purification by flash chromatography (silica gel, 3% MeOH
in CH2C12 with 0.5% HOAc) gave 17.8 g (92%) of the desired amino acid product as a white solid. (FAB MH+ 270).
Example 30 General Method C: Peptide coupling to 4,5-methano-prolinamide, amide dehydration and final deprotection.
O CN
The TFA salt of amide 13 was coupled to a variety of racemic quaternary protected amino acids using HOBT/EDC
in DMF at rt to give a D/L mixture of diastereomers at the N-terminal amino acid. The desired L diastereomer was chromatographically isolated either as the amide 21 or as the nitrile 22. Nitrile 22 was obtained by treatment of the amide with POC13/imidazole in pyridine at -20 C. The final target 23 was obtained by deprotection under acidic conditions using TFA in CH2C12.
65 -Scheme 5, General Method C
H, H, H, H
a b TFAHN N N
BocHN BocHN
H CONH2 BocHN OH O HCONH2 O H CN
H, H
C
N
H
a. EDAC, HOBT, DMF b. POCI3, pyridine, imidazole, -20C c.TFA, CH2CI2, RT
Step 1 BocHN N
Example 6 Step 3 compound (877 mg, 3.65 mmol) and N-Boc cyclopentylvinylamino acid, described in Step 4 of general method B (1.13 g, 4.20 mmol) were dissolved in 20 mL anhydrous DMF, cooled to 0 C and to this mixture was added EDAC (1.62 g, 8.4 mmol), HOBT hydrate (2.54 g, 12.6 mmol, and TEA (1.27 g, 12.6 mmol) and the reaction was allowed to warm to rt and stirred for 24 h. The reaction mixture was taken up in EtOAc (100 mL), washed with H2O (3 x 20 mL), dried (Na2SO4), and purified by silica gel flash column chromatography (100% EtOAc) to give 1.38.g (86%) of Step 1 compound (MH+, 378).
H, H, H, H
a b TFAHN N N
BocHN BocHN
H CONH2 BocHN OH O HCONH2 O H CN
H, H
C
N
H
a. EDAC, HOBT, DMF b. POCI3, pyridine, imidazole, -20C c.TFA, CH2CI2, RT
Step 1 BocHN N
Example 6 Step 3 compound (877 mg, 3.65 mmol) and N-Boc cyclopentylvinylamino acid, described in Step 4 of general method B (1.13 g, 4.20 mmol) were dissolved in 20 mL anhydrous DMF, cooled to 0 C and to this mixture was added EDAC (1.62 g, 8.4 mmol), HOBT hydrate (2.54 g, 12.6 mmol, and TEA (1.27 g, 12.6 mmol) and the reaction was allowed to warm to rt and stirred for 24 h. The reaction mixture was taken up in EtOAc (100 mL), washed with H2O (3 x 20 mL), dried (Na2SO4), and purified by silica gel flash column chromatography (100% EtOAc) to give 1.38.g (86%) of Step 1 compound (MH+, 378).
- 66 -Step 2 BocHN N
Step 1 compound (1.38 g, 3.65 mmol) and imidazole (497 mg, 7.30 mmol) were dried by toluene azeotrope (5 mL x 2), dissolved in 10 mL anhydrous pyridine, cooled to -30 C
under nitrogen gas and POC13 (2.23 g, 14.60 mmol) was added by syringe. The reaction was complete after 1 h and was evaporated to dryness and the remainder purified by two sequential flash column chromatographies over silica gel. The first column (100% EtOAc) was used to isolate the mixture of diastereomers (1.15 g, 88%) from the by-products of the reaction. The second column (gradient of 25% EtOAC/hexanes to 50% EtOAc/hexanes) was run to resolve the mixture of diastereomers and provided 504 mg of the desired Step 2 nitrile (MH+360).
Step 3 N
O CN
Step 2 compound (32 mg, 0.09 mmol) was dissolved in 1 mL
of CH2C12 and 1 mL of TFA was added and the reaction stirred for 30 min at rt and was evaporated to dryness.
The product was purified by reverse phase preparative column chromatography on a YMC S5 ODS 20 X 250 mm column to give 12 mg of the TFA salt (lyophilized from water or isolated after evaporation of eluent and trituration with ether) the title compound. Purification conditions:
gradient elution from 10% methanol/water/0.1 TFA to 90%
Step 1 compound (1.38 g, 3.65 mmol) and imidazole (497 mg, 7.30 mmol) were dried by toluene azeotrope (5 mL x 2), dissolved in 10 mL anhydrous pyridine, cooled to -30 C
under nitrogen gas and POC13 (2.23 g, 14.60 mmol) was added by syringe. The reaction was complete after 1 h and was evaporated to dryness and the remainder purified by two sequential flash column chromatographies over silica gel. The first column (100% EtOAc) was used to isolate the mixture of diastereomers (1.15 g, 88%) from the by-products of the reaction. The second column (gradient of 25% EtOAC/hexanes to 50% EtOAc/hexanes) was run to resolve the mixture of diastereomers and provided 504 mg of the desired Step 2 nitrile (MH+360).
Step 3 N
O CN
Step 2 compound (32 mg, 0.09 mmol) was dissolved in 1 mL
of CH2C12 and 1 mL of TFA was added and the reaction stirred for 30 min at rt and was evaporated to dryness.
The product was purified by reverse phase preparative column chromatography on a YMC S5 ODS 20 X 250 mm column to give 12 mg of the TFA salt (lyophilized from water or isolated after evaporation of eluent and trituration with ether) the title compound. Purification conditions:
gradient elution from 10% methanol/water/0.1 TFA to 90%
- 67 -methanol/water/0.1 TFA over 18 min; 5 min. hold at 90%
methanol/water/0.1 trifluoroacetic acid. Flow rate: 20 mL/min. Detection wavelength: 220.
Examples 30-39 were prepared by the methods outlined in General Method B and General Method C starting from cyclopentanone, cyclobutanone, cyclohexanone, cycloheptanone, cyclooctanone, cis-3,4-dimethylcyclopentanone, and 4-pyranone, cyclopropaneethylhemiacetal, acetone, and 3-pentanone respectively.
Table 2 R
N
HZN
NC
MS
Example R
[M + H]
rr F
methanol/water/0.1 trifluoroacetic acid. Flow rate: 20 mL/min. Detection wavelength: 220.
Examples 30-39 were prepared by the methods outlined in General Method B and General Method C starting from cyclopentanone, cyclobutanone, cyclohexanone, cycloheptanone, cyclooctanone, cis-3,4-dimethylcyclopentanone, and 4-pyranone, cyclopropaneethylhemiacetal, acetone, and 3-pentanone respectively.
Table 2 R
N
HZN
NC
MS
Example R
[M + H]
rr F
- 68 O
37* 232 * Step 3 compound was prepared by the method described in Tetrahedron Letters 1986, 1281-1284.
Example 40 N
RCN
Step 1 OH
FH N O
Boc
37* 232 * Step 3 compound was prepared by the method described in Tetrahedron Letters 1986, 1281-1284.
Example 40 N
RCN
Step 1 OH
FH N O
Boc
69 -Step 1 compound was prepared employing general method B
starting from cyclopentanone and 2-fluoro-triethylphos-phonoacetate instead of triethylphosphonoacetate.
Step 2 N
CN
Title compound was prepared by the peptide coupling of Step 1 acid followed by dehydration and final deprotection as described in general method C [MS (M+H) 278].
Example 41 N
CN
Step 1 O
OH
F NHBoc Step 1 compound was prepared employing general method B
starting from cyclobutanone and 2-fluoro-triethylphos-phonoacetate instead of triethylphosphonoacetate.
starting from cyclopentanone and 2-fluoro-triethylphos-phonoacetate instead of triethylphosphonoacetate.
Step 2 N
CN
Title compound was prepared by the peptide coupling of Step 1 acid followed by dehydration and final deprotection as described in general method C [MS (M+H) 278].
Example 41 N
CN
Step 1 O
OH
F NHBoc Step 1 compound was prepared employing general method B
starting from cyclobutanone and 2-fluoro-triethylphos-phonoacetate instead of triethylphosphonoacetate.
- 70 -Step 2 N
CN
Title compound was prepared by the peptide coupling of Step 1 acid followed by dehydration and final deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) 264.
Example 42 Y
O
CN
Step 1 OH
NHBoc Step 1 compound was prepared employing general method B
starting from cyclopentanone and triethylphosphono-propionate instead of triethylphosphonoacetate.
CN
Title compound was prepared by the peptide coupling of Step 1 acid followed by dehydration and final deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) 264.
Example 42 Y
O
CN
Step 1 OH
NHBoc Step 1 compound was prepared employing general method B
starting from cyclopentanone and triethylphosphono-propionate instead of triethylphosphonoacetate.
- 71 -Step 2 Y
O
CN
Title compound was prepared by the peptide coupling of Step 1 acid followed by dehydration and final deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) Example 43 Y
O
CN
Step 1 O
OH
NHBoc Step 1 compound was prepared employing general method B
starting from cyclobutanone and triethylphosphono-propionate instead of triethylphosphonoacetate.
O
CN
Title compound was prepared by the peptide coupling of Step 1 acid followed by dehydration and final deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) Example 43 Y
O
CN
Step 1 O
OH
NHBoc Step 1 compound was prepared employing general method B
starting from cyclobutanone and triethylphosphono-propionate instead of triethylphosphonoacetate.
- 72 -Step 2 O
CN
Title compound was prepared by the peptide coupling of Step 1 acid followed by dehydration and final deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) 260.
Example 44 General Method D: Oxidative cleavage of vinyl substituent by ozonolysis. The protected cyclopentylvinyl nitrile 22 was treated with ozone for 6-8 min and subjected to a reductive quench with sodium borohydride to furnish the hydroxymethyl analog 24 directly. This compound was deprotected under acidic conditions with TFA in CH2C12 at 0 C to give the target compound 25.
Scheme 6, General Method D, Examples 44,46,48 a HO b HO
BocHN N BocHiN TFAH2N N
a. 03, McOH:CH2CI2, 10:4, -78 C; then NaBH4, -78 C to 0 C, 79%
b. TFA:CH2CI2, 1:2, 0 degrees C.
CN
Title compound was prepared by the peptide coupling of Step 1 acid followed by dehydration and final deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) 260.
Example 44 General Method D: Oxidative cleavage of vinyl substituent by ozonolysis. The protected cyclopentylvinyl nitrile 22 was treated with ozone for 6-8 min and subjected to a reductive quench with sodium borohydride to furnish the hydroxymethyl analog 24 directly. This compound was deprotected under acidic conditions with TFA in CH2C12 at 0 C to give the target compound 25.
Scheme 6, General Method D, Examples 44,46,48 a HO b HO
BocHN N BocHiN TFAH2N N
a. 03, McOH:CH2CI2, 10:4, -78 C; then NaBH4, -78 C to 0 C, 79%
b. TFA:CH2CI2, 1:2, 0 degrees C.
- 73 -Step 1 HO
BocHN N
Cyclopentylvinyl compound prepared in Step 2 of general method C (1.28 g, 3.60 mmol) was dissolved in 56 mL of a 2:5 mixture of CH2C12:methanol, cooled to -78 C and was treated with a stream of ozone until the reaction mixture took on a blue color, at which time, NaBH4 (566 mg, 15.0 mmol, 4.2 equiv) was added and the reaction was warmed to 0 C. After 30 min, the reaction was quenched with 2 mL
saturated aqueous NaHCO3 and then warmed to rt. The reaction mixture was evaporated to dryness and taken up in EtOAc. A small amount of water was added to dissolve the inorganics and the layers separated. The EtOAc layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered and evaporated to an oil that was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel with EtOAc to give 922 mg (71%) of Step 1 compound.
MS(M+H)364.
Step 2 HO
N
Step 1 compound (900 mg, 2.48 mmol) was dissolved in 60 mL of CH2C12, cooled to 0 C and treated with 20 mL of freshly distilled TFA. The reaction was complete in 80 min and the mixture was evaporated to dryness and purified by preparative HPLC (YMC S5 ODS 30 x 100 mm, 18 minute gradient 80% Solv A:Solv B to 100% Solv B, Solvent A = 10% MeOH-90%H20-0.1% TFA, Solvent B = 90% MeOH-10%
BocHN N
Cyclopentylvinyl compound prepared in Step 2 of general method C (1.28 g, 3.60 mmol) was dissolved in 56 mL of a 2:5 mixture of CH2C12:methanol, cooled to -78 C and was treated with a stream of ozone until the reaction mixture took on a blue color, at which time, NaBH4 (566 mg, 15.0 mmol, 4.2 equiv) was added and the reaction was warmed to 0 C. After 30 min, the reaction was quenched with 2 mL
saturated aqueous NaHCO3 and then warmed to rt. The reaction mixture was evaporated to dryness and taken up in EtOAc. A small amount of water was added to dissolve the inorganics and the layers separated. The EtOAc layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered and evaporated to an oil that was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel with EtOAc to give 922 mg (71%) of Step 1 compound.
MS(M+H)364.
Step 2 HO
N
Step 1 compound (900 mg, 2.48 mmol) was dissolved in 60 mL of CH2C12, cooled to 0 C and treated with 20 mL of freshly distilled TFA. The reaction was complete in 80 min and the mixture was evaporated to dryness and purified by preparative HPLC (YMC S5 ODS 30 x 100 mm, 18 minute gradient 80% Solv A:Solv B to 100% Solv B, Solvent A = 10% MeOH-90%H20-0.1% TFA, Solvent B = 90% MeOH-10%
- 74 -H2O -.1% TFA, collected product from 5.1-6.5 min) to give, after lyophillization from water, 660 mg (71%) of title compound, TFA salt as a white lyophillate. (MH+264).
Example 45 General Method E: Oxidative cleavage of vinyl substituent by osmium tetroxide-sodium periodate followed by sodium borohydride reduction to alcohol. The cyclobutylolefin 26 was treated with osmium tetroxide and sodium periodate in THF:water, 1:1, and the intermediate aldehyde was isolated crude and immediately reduced with sodium borohydride to give 27 in 56% yield. Standard deprotection conditions using TFA afforded the target compound 28.
Scheme 7, General Method E, Examples 45, 47 HO HO
a b BocHN N BocHN N TFAH2N N
a.OsO4, THF:H20, 1:1; Na1O4; workup,then NaBH4, MeOH, RT. 56%
b. TFA:CH2CI2, 1:2, 0 degrees C to RT.
%CN
HO
Example 45 General Method E: Oxidative cleavage of vinyl substituent by osmium tetroxide-sodium periodate followed by sodium borohydride reduction to alcohol. The cyclobutylolefin 26 was treated with osmium tetroxide and sodium periodate in THF:water, 1:1, and the intermediate aldehyde was isolated crude and immediately reduced with sodium borohydride to give 27 in 56% yield. Standard deprotection conditions using TFA afforded the target compound 28.
Scheme 7, General Method E, Examples 45, 47 HO HO
a b BocHN N BocHN N TFAH2N N
a.OsO4, THF:H20, 1:1; Na1O4; workup,then NaBH4, MeOH, RT. 56%
b. TFA:CH2CI2, 1:2, 0 degrees C to RT.
%CN
HO
- 75 -Step 1 N
CN
HO
HN O
Boc N-Boc protected cyclobutylvinyl compound (Example 31, prepared by general method C) (0.16 g, 0.46 mmol) was dissolved in 10 mL of a 1:1 mixture of THF:water and treated with Os04 (12 mg, catalyst) and Na104 (0.59 g, 2.76 mmol, 6 equiv). After 2 h, the reaction mixture was diluted with 50 mL of ether and 10 mL of water. The layers were equilibrated and the organic fraction was washed one time with NaHCO3 solution, dried over MgSO4 and concentrated to give a dark oil. The oil was diluted with 10 mL of methanol and treated with NaBH4 (0.08 g, 2.0 mmol). The mixture turned very dark and after 30 min was diluted with ether and the reaction was quenched with aqueous NaHCO3 solution. The mixture was equilibrated and layers separated. The organic fraction was washed with solutions of NaHCO3 and 0.1 M HC1. The organics were dried (MgSO4) and concentrated to give 90 mg (56%) of the Step 1 compound as a dark oil.
Step 2 N
CN
HO
HZN O
CN
HO
HN O
Boc N-Boc protected cyclobutylvinyl compound (Example 31, prepared by general method C) (0.16 g, 0.46 mmol) was dissolved in 10 mL of a 1:1 mixture of THF:water and treated with Os04 (12 mg, catalyst) and Na104 (0.59 g, 2.76 mmol, 6 equiv). After 2 h, the reaction mixture was diluted with 50 mL of ether and 10 mL of water. The layers were equilibrated and the organic fraction was washed one time with NaHCO3 solution, dried over MgSO4 and concentrated to give a dark oil. The oil was diluted with 10 mL of methanol and treated with NaBH4 (0.08 g, 2.0 mmol). The mixture turned very dark and after 30 min was diluted with ether and the reaction was quenched with aqueous NaHCO3 solution. The mixture was equilibrated and layers separated. The organic fraction was washed with solutions of NaHCO3 and 0.1 M HC1. The organics were dried (MgSO4) and concentrated to give 90 mg (56%) of the Step 1 compound as a dark oil.
Step 2 N
CN
HO
HZN O
76 -Step 1 compound (90 mg, 0.26 mmol) was dissolved in 3 mL
of CH2C12, cooled to 0 C and treated with 3 mL of freshly distilled TFA. The reaction was complete in 80 min and evaporated to dryness and purified by preparative HPLC
(YMC S5 ODS 30 x 100 mm, 10 minute gradient 100%A to 100%B, Solvent A = 10% MeOH-90%H20-0.1% TFA, Solvent B =
90% MeOH-10% H2O -0.1% TFA, to give, after removal of water, 50 mg (60%) of title compound. (MH+250).
Table 3 R
N
HZN
NC
Method of Example R Preparation [M + H]
Ozonolysis/
44 borohydride 264 HO
Osmium/periodate/
45 borohydride 250 HOJ
Ozonolysis/
46 borohydride 278 -9/ HO
Osmium/periodate/
47 borohydride 292 HO
Ozonolysis/
borohydride HO
of CH2C12, cooled to 0 C and treated with 3 mL of freshly distilled TFA. The reaction was complete in 80 min and evaporated to dryness and purified by preparative HPLC
(YMC S5 ODS 30 x 100 mm, 10 minute gradient 100%A to 100%B, Solvent A = 10% MeOH-90%H20-0.1% TFA, Solvent B =
90% MeOH-10% H2O -0.1% TFA, to give, after removal of water, 50 mg (60%) of title compound. (MH+250).
Table 3 R
N
HZN
NC
Method of Example R Preparation [M + H]
Ozonolysis/
44 borohydride 264 HO
Osmium/periodate/
45 borohydride 250 HOJ
Ozonolysis/
46 borohydride 278 -9/ HO
Osmium/periodate/
47 borohydride 292 HO
Ozonolysis/
borohydride HO
77 -Example 49 cN
HO
HzN O
Step i NH
I
Part A. A 50-mL flask was charged with dihydro-4,4-dimethyl-2,3-furandione (5.0 g, 39.0 mmol), acetic acid (10 mL), sodium acetate (3.82 g, 39.0 mmol) and hydroxylamine hydrochloride (2.71 g, 39.0 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 2 h at rt and concentrated under reduced pressure to remove most of the acetic acid. The remainder was poured into water (100 mL) and the aqueous phase extracted with EtOAc (3 X 40 mL). The organics were dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to a colorless oil which solidified on standing.
Part B. A 200-mL round bottomed flask was charged with Part A solid (@ 39 mmol) and diluted with 80 mL of ethanol and 39 mL of 2N HC1 (78 mmol). The mixture was treated with 1.0 g of 5% Pd/carbon and the mixture degassed. The flask was placed under an atmosphere of H2 for 8 h. The mixture was filtered through celite*and the filtrate concentrated to an off white solid.
HO
HzN O
Step i NH
I
Part A. A 50-mL flask was charged with dihydro-4,4-dimethyl-2,3-furandione (5.0 g, 39.0 mmol), acetic acid (10 mL), sodium acetate (3.82 g, 39.0 mmol) and hydroxylamine hydrochloride (2.71 g, 39.0 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 2 h at rt and concentrated under reduced pressure to remove most of the acetic acid. The remainder was poured into water (100 mL) and the aqueous phase extracted with EtOAc (3 X 40 mL). The organics were dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to a colorless oil which solidified on standing.
Part B. A 200-mL round bottomed flask was charged with Part A solid (@ 39 mmol) and diluted with 80 mL of ethanol and 39 mL of 2N HC1 (78 mmol). The mixture was treated with 1.0 g of 5% Pd/carbon and the mixture degassed. The flask was placed under an atmosphere of H2 for 8 h. The mixture was filtered through celite*and the filtrate concentrated to an off white solid.
- 78 -* Trade-mark Part C. A 250-mL round bottomed flask was charged with Part B solid and diluted with THE (50 mL) and water (15 mL). The mixture was treated with di-tert-butyldicarbonate (12.7 g, 117 mmol) and sodium bicarbonate (10.0 g, 11.7 mmol). After 4 h of stirring the mixture was diluted with 50 mL of ether and 50 mL of water. The layers were separated and the organic fraction dried over MgSO4 and concentrated. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel with 30% EtOAc in hexanes to give 2.00 g (22% overall) of Step 1 compound as a white solid.
Step 2 HO
NH
TBS-O Boc To a stirred solution of Step 1 compound (1.00 g, 3.80 mmol) in THE (20 mL) at rt under nitrogen was added LiOH
hydrate (0.16 g, 3.80 mmol) and then water (5 mL). The reaction was stirred at 40 C for 0.5 h and then cooled to rt. The mixture was concentrated to dryness and the remainder was stripped from THE (2X), toluene (2X) and THE (1X). The remaining glass was diluted with 5 mL of THE and treated with imidazole (0.63 g, 9.19 mmol) followed by t-butyl-dimethylsilyl chloride (1.26 g, 8.36 mmol). The reaction was stirred overnight and quenched with 10 mL of methanol. After 1 h of stirring the mixture was concentrated. An additional portion of methanol was added and the mixture concentrated. The oil was diluted with ether and 0.1 N HC1 (pH 2). The layers were equilibrated and aqueous drawn off. The organic
Step 2 HO
NH
TBS-O Boc To a stirred solution of Step 1 compound (1.00 g, 3.80 mmol) in THE (20 mL) at rt under nitrogen was added LiOH
hydrate (0.16 g, 3.80 mmol) and then water (5 mL). The reaction was stirred at 40 C for 0.5 h and then cooled to rt. The mixture was concentrated to dryness and the remainder was stripped from THE (2X), toluene (2X) and THE (1X). The remaining glass was diluted with 5 mL of THE and treated with imidazole (0.63 g, 9.19 mmol) followed by t-butyl-dimethylsilyl chloride (1.26 g, 8.36 mmol). The reaction was stirred overnight and quenched with 10 mL of methanol. After 1 h of stirring the mixture was concentrated. An additional portion of methanol was added and the mixture concentrated. The oil was diluted with ether and 0.1 N HC1 (pH 2). The layers were equilibrated and aqueous drawn off. The organic
- 79 -fraction was dried over MgSO4 and concentrated to give 1.25 g (83%) of Step 2 compound as a colorless glass.
Step 3 %CN
HO
HZN O
The Title compound was prepared by the peptide coupling of Step 2 carboxylic acid with Example 6 Step 3 amine, followed by dehydration and deprotection as outlined in General Method C. MS (M+H) 238.
General Method F: Catalytic Hydrogenation of vinyl substituent. As shown in Scheme 8, the protected vinyl substituted amino acid 20 was transformed to the corresponding saturated analog 29 by catalytic hydrogenation using 10% Pd/C and hydrogen at atmospheric pressure.
Scheme 8, General Method F, Examples 50-56 a BoCHN OH BocHN OH
20 a. 10% Pd/C, 1 atm H2, MeOH, 12h, 100%
Step 1.
The N-(tert-Butyloxycarbonyl)(1'vinylcyclopentyl)glycine (2.23 g, 8.30 mmol) was dissolved in 50 mL MeOH and placed in a hydrogenation vessel purged with argon. To this mixture was added 10% Pd-C (224 mg, 10% w/w) and the reaction stirred under 1 atm H2 at rt for 12 h. The reaction was filtered through celite and concentrated and
Step 3 %CN
HO
HZN O
The Title compound was prepared by the peptide coupling of Step 2 carboxylic acid with Example 6 Step 3 amine, followed by dehydration and deprotection as outlined in General Method C. MS (M+H) 238.
General Method F: Catalytic Hydrogenation of vinyl substituent. As shown in Scheme 8, the protected vinyl substituted amino acid 20 was transformed to the corresponding saturated analog 29 by catalytic hydrogenation using 10% Pd/C and hydrogen at atmospheric pressure.
Scheme 8, General Method F, Examples 50-56 a BoCHN OH BocHN OH
20 a. 10% Pd/C, 1 atm H2, MeOH, 12h, 100%
Step 1.
The N-(tert-Butyloxycarbonyl)(1'vinylcyclopentyl)glycine (2.23 g, 8.30 mmol) was dissolved in 50 mL MeOH and placed in a hydrogenation vessel purged with argon. To this mixture was added 10% Pd-C (224 mg, 10% w/w) and the reaction stirred under 1 atm H2 at rt for 12 h. The reaction was filtered through celite and concentrated and
- 80 -purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel with 1:9 methanol:CH2C12 to give the Step 1 compound as a glass. (FAB MH+ 272) Examples 50-56 were prepared by the peptide coupling of amino acids (where the vinyl substituent has been hydrogenated according to general method F) followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C.
Table 4 Rp O
R, N
HZN
NC
R1, R2 MS
Example [M + H]
50 Cyclopentyl 262 51 cyclobutyl 248 52 cycloheptyl 290 53 4-pyranyl 278 54 methyl, 236 methyl 55 ethyl, ethyl 264 56 methyl, ethyl 250 Example 57 N
O CN
The title compound in Example 57 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the isopropyl cyclobutane amino acid
Table 4 Rp O
R, N
HZN
NC
R1, R2 MS
Example [M + H]
50 Cyclopentyl 262 51 cyclobutyl 248 52 cycloheptyl 290 53 4-pyranyl 278 54 methyl, 236 methyl 55 ethyl, ethyl 264 56 methyl, ethyl 250 Example 57 N
O CN
The title compound in Example 57 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the isopropyl cyclobutane amino acid
- 81 -(where the olefin substituent has been hydrogenated according to general method F) followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C.
Example 58 N
NHy The title compound in Example 58 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the isopropyl cyclopentane amino acid (where the olefin substituent has been hydrogenated according to general method F) followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C. MS
(M+H) 276 General Method G: L-Amino acids synthesized by Asymmetric Strecker Reaction. Commercially available adamantyl carboxylic acid was esterified either in MeOH
with HC1 at reflux or using trimethylsilyldiazomethane in Et20/methanol to give 30. The ester was reduced to the alcohol 31 with LAH in THE and then subjected to a Swern oxidation to give aldehyde 32. Aldehyde 32 was transformed to 33 under asymmetric Strecker conditions with KCN, NaHSO3 and R-(-)-2-phenylglycinol. The nitrile of 33 was hydrolyzed under strongly acidic conditions using 12M HC1 in HOAc to give 34. The chiral auxiliary was removed by catalytic reduction using Pearlman's catalyst in acidic methanol under 50 psi hydrogen to give and the resulting amino group was protected as the t-butylcarbamate to give 36.
Example 58 N
NHy The title compound in Example 58 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the isopropyl cyclopentane amino acid (where the olefin substituent has been hydrogenated according to general method F) followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C. MS
(M+H) 276 General Method G: L-Amino acids synthesized by Asymmetric Strecker Reaction. Commercially available adamantyl carboxylic acid was esterified either in MeOH
with HC1 at reflux or using trimethylsilyldiazomethane in Et20/methanol to give 30. The ester was reduced to the alcohol 31 with LAH in THE and then subjected to a Swern oxidation to give aldehyde 32. Aldehyde 32 was transformed to 33 under asymmetric Strecker conditions with KCN, NaHSO3 and R-(-)-2-phenylglycinol. The nitrile of 33 was hydrolyzed under strongly acidic conditions using 12M HC1 in HOAc to give 34. The chiral auxiliary was removed by catalytic reduction using Pearlman's catalyst in acidic methanol under 50 psi hydrogen to give and the resulting amino group was protected as the t-butylcarbamate to give 36.
- 82 -Scheme 9, General Method G, Examples 59-64 a b c ZP H3CO2C OHC
HOB d HO", e N CN N COZH
H H HCI
f a. LAH, THF, 0 C to RT, 96% b. CICOCOCI, DMSO, CH2CI2, -78 C, 98% c. R-(-)-2-Phenylglycinol, NaHSO3, KCN d.12M HCI, HOAc, 80 C, 16h, 78 % e. 20% Pd(OH)2, 50 psi H2, MeOH:HOAc, 5:1 f. (Boc)20, K2CO3, DMF, 92%, 2 steps Step 1 Adamantane-l-carboxylic acid (10.0 g, 55 mmol, 1 equiv) was dissolved in a mixture of Et20 (160 mL) and MeOH (40 mL), and was treated with trimethylsilyl diazomethane (2.0 M in hexane, 30 mL, 60 mmol, 1.1 equiv) and stirred at rt for 3 h. The volatiles were then removed by rotary evaporation and the product purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (5x15 cm) with 40%
CH2C12/hexanes to give the product as a white crystalline solid (10.7 g, 100%).
HOB d HO", e N CN N COZH
H H HCI
f a. LAH, THF, 0 C to RT, 96% b. CICOCOCI, DMSO, CH2CI2, -78 C, 98% c. R-(-)-2-Phenylglycinol, NaHSO3, KCN d.12M HCI, HOAc, 80 C, 16h, 78 % e. 20% Pd(OH)2, 50 psi H2, MeOH:HOAc, 5:1 f. (Boc)20, K2CO3, DMF, 92%, 2 steps Step 1 Adamantane-l-carboxylic acid (10.0 g, 55 mmol, 1 equiv) was dissolved in a mixture of Et20 (160 mL) and MeOH (40 mL), and was treated with trimethylsilyl diazomethane (2.0 M in hexane, 30 mL, 60 mmol, 1.1 equiv) and stirred at rt for 3 h. The volatiles were then removed by rotary evaporation and the product purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (5x15 cm) with 40%
CH2C12/hexanes to give the product as a white crystalline solid (10.7 g, 100%).
- 83 -Step 2 OH
Step 1 compound (10.7 g, 0.055 mmol, 1 equiv) was dissolved in anhydrous THE (150 mL) under argon and was treated with a solution of LiAlH4 (1 M in THF, 69 mL, 69 mmol, 1.25 equiv). After stirring at rt for 1.5 h, the reaction was cooled to 0 C and quenched sequentially with H2O (5.1 mL), 15% aq NaOH (5.1 mL), and H2O (10.2 mL).
After stirring at rt for 15 min, the slurry was vacuum filtered, and the solids washed with EtOAc (2x100 mL).
The filtrate was concentrated by rotary evaporation and the resulting solid purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (5x15 cm) with 10%
EtOAc/CH2C12. This afforded the Step 2 product as a white solid (8.74 g, 96%).
Step 3 OHC
An oven-dried 3-neck flask equipped with 125-mL addition funnel was charged with anhydrous CH2C12 (150 mL) and anhydrous DMSO (10.3 mL, 0.145 mol, 2.5 equiv) under argon atmosphere and cooled to -78 C. Slow dropwise addition of oxalyl chloride (6.7 mL, 0.0768 mol, 1.32 equiv) followed by stirring for 15 min provided an activated DMSO adduct. This was treated with a solution of Step 2 compound (9.67 g, 58.2 mmol, 1 equiv) in dry CH2C12 (75 mL) and the reaction allowed to stir for 1 h.
The resulting white mixture was then treated dropwise with triethylamine (40.5 mL, 0.291 mol, 5 equiv). After
Step 1 compound (10.7 g, 0.055 mmol, 1 equiv) was dissolved in anhydrous THE (150 mL) under argon and was treated with a solution of LiAlH4 (1 M in THF, 69 mL, 69 mmol, 1.25 equiv). After stirring at rt for 1.5 h, the reaction was cooled to 0 C and quenched sequentially with H2O (5.1 mL), 15% aq NaOH (5.1 mL), and H2O (10.2 mL).
After stirring at rt for 15 min, the slurry was vacuum filtered, and the solids washed with EtOAc (2x100 mL).
The filtrate was concentrated by rotary evaporation and the resulting solid purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (5x15 cm) with 10%
EtOAc/CH2C12. This afforded the Step 2 product as a white solid (8.74 g, 96%).
Step 3 OHC
An oven-dried 3-neck flask equipped with 125-mL addition funnel was charged with anhydrous CH2C12 (150 mL) and anhydrous DMSO (10.3 mL, 0.145 mol, 2.5 equiv) under argon atmosphere and cooled to -78 C. Slow dropwise addition of oxalyl chloride (6.7 mL, 0.0768 mol, 1.32 equiv) followed by stirring for 15 min provided an activated DMSO adduct. This was treated with a solution of Step 2 compound (9.67 g, 58.2 mmol, 1 equiv) in dry CH2C12 (75 mL) and the reaction allowed to stir for 1 h.
The resulting white mixture was then treated dropwise with triethylamine (40.5 mL, 0.291 mol, 5 equiv). After
84 -30 min, the cooling bath was removed, and the reaction quenched sequentially with cold 20% aq KH2PO4 (25 mL) and cold H2O (150 mL). After stirring at rt for 15 min the mixture was diluted with Et20 (400 mL)and the layers were separated. The organics were washed organic with cold 10% aq KH2PO4 (3x150 mL) and satd aq NaCl (100 mL) . The organics were dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated.
The residue was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (5x10 cm) with CH2C12 to give the Step 3 compound as a white solid (9.40 g, 980).
Step 4 HOB
N CN
H
Step 3 compound (9.40 g, 57 mmol, 1 equiv) was suspended in H2O (145 mL) and cooled to 0 C. The mixture was treated with NaHSO3 (5.95 g, 57 mmol, 1 equiv), KCN (4.0 g, 59 mmol, 1.04 equiv), and a solution of (R)-(-)-phenylglycinol (8.01 g, 57 mmol, 1 equiv) in MeOH (55 mL). The resulting mixture was stirred at rt for 2 h, then refluxed for 16 h. The mixture was cooled to rt, and 200 mL of EtOAc added. After mixing for 15 min the layers were separated. The aqueous fraction was extracted with EtOAc. The combined EtOAc extracts were washed with brine (50 mL), dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered and the filtrate concentrated. The product was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (6.4x20 cm) with 20% EtOAc/hexanes to give the desired (R,S) product as a white solid (11.6 g, 37.4 mmol, 650):
MS We 311 (M+H)+.
The residue was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (5x10 cm) with CH2C12 to give the Step 3 compound as a white solid (9.40 g, 980).
Step 4 HOB
N CN
H
Step 3 compound (9.40 g, 57 mmol, 1 equiv) was suspended in H2O (145 mL) and cooled to 0 C. The mixture was treated with NaHSO3 (5.95 g, 57 mmol, 1 equiv), KCN (4.0 g, 59 mmol, 1.04 equiv), and a solution of (R)-(-)-phenylglycinol (8.01 g, 57 mmol, 1 equiv) in MeOH (55 mL). The resulting mixture was stirred at rt for 2 h, then refluxed for 16 h. The mixture was cooled to rt, and 200 mL of EtOAc added. After mixing for 15 min the layers were separated. The aqueous fraction was extracted with EtOAc. The combined EtOAc extracts were washed with brine (50 mL), dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered and the filtrate concentrated. The product was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (6.4x20 cm) with 20% EtOAc/hexanes to give the desired (R,S) product as a white solid (11.6 g, 37.4 mmol, 650):
MS We 311 (M+H)+.
- 85 -Step 5 HOB
HCI
i H
The Step 4 nitrile (5.65 g, 18 mmol) was heated in conc.
HC1 (120 mL) and HOAc (30 mL) at 800C for 18 h, at which time the reaction was cooled in an ice bath. Vacuum filtration of the resulting precipitate afforded the desired product as a white solid (5.21 g, 14 mmol, 780).
MS m/e 330 (m+H) +.
Step 6 The Step 6 compound (5.21 g, 14 mmol) was dissolved in MeOH (50 mL) and HOAc (10 mL), and hydrogenated with H2 (50 psi) and Pearlman's catalyst (20% Pd(OH)2, 1.04 g, 20%
w/w) for 18 h. The reaction was filtered through a PTFE
membrane filter and the catalyst washed with MeOH (3x25 mL). The filtrate was concentrated by rotary evaporation to afford a white solid. The product was used in Step 7 without further purification.
Step 7 The crude Step 6 compound (@ 14 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous DMF (50 mL) under argon and treated with K2CO3
HCI
i H
The Step 4 nitrile (5.65 g, 18 mmol) was heated in conc.
HC1 (120 mL) and HOAc (30 mL) at 800C for 18 h, at which time the reaction was cooled in an ice bath. Vacuum filtration of the resulting precipitate afforded the desired product as a white solid (5.21 g, 14 mmol, 780).
MS m/e 330 (m+H) +.
Step 6 The Step 6 compound (5.21 g, 14 mmol) was dissolved in MeOH (50 mL) and HOAc (10 mL), and hydrogenated with H2 (50 psi) and Pearlman's catalyst (20% Pd(OH)2, 1.04 g, 20%
w/w) for 18 h. The reaction was filtered through a PTFE
membrane filter and the catalyst washed with MeOH (3x25 mL). The filtrate was concentrated by rotary evaporation to afford a white solid. The product was used in Step 7 without further purification.
Step 7 The crude Step 6 compound (@ 14 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous DMF (50 mL) under argon and treated with K2CO3
86 -(5.90 g, 42 mmol, 3 equiv) and di-tert-butyldicarbonate (3.14 g, 14 mmol, 1 equiv) under argon at rt. After 19 h, the DMF was removed by rotary evaporation (pump) and the residue dried further under reduced pressure. The residue was mixed with H2O (100 mL) and Et20 (100 mL), the layers separated, and the alkaline aqueous with Et20 (2x100 mL) to remove the by-product from the hydrogenolysis step. The aqueous was cooled to 0 C, diluted with EtOAc (200 mL), and stirred vigorously while carefully acidifying the aqueous to pH 3 with 1N aq HC1.
The layers separated and the aqueous extracted with EtOAc (100 mL). The combined EtOAc extracts were washed with brine (50 mL), dried (Na2SO4), filtered and the filtrate concentrated by rotary evaporation. The residue was purified by Si02 flash column (5x12 cm) with 5%
MeOH/CH2C12 + 0.5% HOAc. The product was chased with hexanes to afford the product as a white foam (4.07 g, 13 mmol, 92%): MS We 310 (m+H)+.
Example 59 The title compound in Example 59 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the Step 7 compound in general method G followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C.MS m/e 300 (m+H)+.
The layers separated and the aqueous extracted with EtOAc (100 mL). The combined EtOAc extracts were washed with brine (50 mL), dried (Na2SO4), filtered and the filtrate concentrated by rotary evaporation. The residue was purified by Si02 flash column (5x12 cm) with 5%
MeOH/CH2C12 + 0.5% HOAc. The product was chased with hexanes to afford the product as a white foam (4.07 g, 13 mmol, 92%): MS We 310 (m+H)+.
Example 59 The title compound in Example 59 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the Step 7 compound in general method G followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C.MS m/e 300 (m+H)+.
- 87 -Example 60 HO
NC
Step 1 HO
A solution of KMnO4 (337 mg, 2.13 mmol, 1.1 equiv) in 2%
aq KOH (6 mL) was heated to 60 C and Step 7 compound in general method G (600 mg, 1.94 mmol, 1 equiv) was added in portions, and heating increased to 90 C. After 1.5 h, the reaction was cooled to 0 C, EtOAc (50 mL) was added, and the mixture was carefully acidified to pH 3 with 1N
HC1. The layers were separated and the aqueous was extracted with EtOAc (50 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (3.8x15 cm) with 2% (200 mL), 3% (200 mL), 4% (200 mL), and 5% (500 mL) NeOH/CH2C12 + 0.5% HOAc. After isolation of the product, the material was chased with hexanes to afford a white solid (324 mg, 51%): MS m/e 326 (m+H)+.
Step 2 HO
BOC-HN N
O
NC
Step 1 HO
A solution of KMnO4 (337 mg, 2.13 mmol, 1.1 equiv) in 2%
aq KOH (6 mL) was heated to 60 C and Step 7 compound in general method G (600 mg, 1.94 mmol, 1 equiv) was added in portions, and heating increased to 90 C. After 1.5 h, the reaction was cooled to 0 C, EtOAc (50 mL) was added, and the mixture was carefully acidified to pH 3 with 1N
HC1. The layers were separated and the aqueous was extracted with EtOAc (50 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (3.8x15 cm) with 2% (200 mL), 3% (200 mL), 4% (200 mL), and 5% (500 mL) NeOH/CH2C12 + 0.5% HOAc. After isolation of the product, the material was chased with hexanes to afford a white solid (324 mg, 51%): MS m/e 326 (m+H)+.
Step 2 HO
BOC-HN N
O
- 88 -The Step 1 compound (404 mg, 1.24 mmol, 1 equiv) was dissolved in anhydrous DMF (10 mL) under argon and cooled to 0 C. The following were added in order: Example 6 Step 3 salt (328 mg, 1.37 mmol, 1.1 equiv), HOBT (520 mg, 3.85 mmol, 3.1 equiv), EDAC (510 mg, 2.61 mmol, 2.1 equiv), and TEA (0.54 mL, 3.85 mmol, 3.1 equiv). The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to rt overnight and the DMF removed by rotary evaporation (pump). The remainder was dried further under vacuum. The residue was dissolved in EtOAc (100 mL), washed with satd aq NaHCO3 (50 mL) and satd aq NaCl (25 mL), dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated by rotary evaporation. The product was purified flash column chromatography on silica gel (3.8x15 cm) with a gradient of 6% (200 mL) , 7% (200 mL) , and 8% (500 mL) McOH/CH2C12 to give the product as a white solid (460 mg, 1.06 mmol, 85%): MS m/e 434 (m+H)+.
Step 3 Et3SiO
BOC-HN N
O
The Step 2 compound (95 mg, 0.22 mmol, 1 equiv) was dissolved in anhydrous CH2C12 (2.5 mL) under argon and cooled to -78 C. The mixture was treated with diisopropylethylamine (65 L, 0.37 mmol, 1.7 equiv), and triethylsilyl triflate (75 L, 0.33 mmol, 1.5 equiv), and stirred at 0 C for 1.5 h. The reaction was mixed with MeOH (0.5 mL), silica gel (200 mg) and H2O (2 drops) and stirred at rt for 18 h. The solvent was removed by rotary evaporation and the residue purified flash column
Step 3 Et3SiO
BOC-HN N
O
The Step 2 compound (95 mg, 0.22 mmol, 1 equiv) was dissolved in anhydrous CH2C12 (2.5 mL) under argon and cooled to -78 C. The mixture was treated with diisopropylethylamine (65 L, 0.37 mmol, 1.7 equiv), and triethylsilyl triflate (75 L, 0.33 mmol, 1.5 equiv), and stirred at 0 C for 1.5 h. The reaction was mixed with MeOH (0.5 mL), silica gel (200 mg) and H2O (2 drops) and stirred at rt for 18 h. The solvent was removed by rotary evaporation and the residue purified flash column
- 89 -chromatography on silica gel(2.5x10 cm) with 4%
MeOH/CH2ClZ to afford the product (92 mg, 0.17 mmol, 77 0) :
MS m/e 548 (m+H) +.
Step 4 EtASiO
BOC-HN N
O NC
The Step 3 compound (90 mg, 0.16 mmol, 1 equiv) was dissolved in anhydrous pyridine (2 mL) under argon and cooled to -30 C. Treatment with imidazole (24 mg, 0.35 mmol, 2.1 equiv) and phosphorous oxychloride (66 L, 0.67 mmol, 4.1 equiv), and continued stirring at -30 C for 45 min gave a thick slurry. Volatiles were by rotary evaporation and the cake dried further under reduced pressure. The product was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (2.5x10 cm) with 7%
EtOAc/CH2ClZ to afford the product as a white foam (76 mg, 87%): MS m/e 530 (m+H) +
Step 5 HO
NC
The Step 4 compound (76 mg, 0.14 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous CH2C12 (1 mL) and cooled to 0 C and treated with TFA (1 mL) and H2O (2 drops) and stirred for 1.5 hr at 0 C. The solvents were removed by rotary evaporation and the residue was chased with toluene (5 mL) and dried
MeOH/CH2ClZ to afford the product (92 mg, 0.17 mmol, 77 0) :
MS m/e 548 (m+H) +.
Step 4 EtASiO
BOC-HN N
O NC
The Step 3 compound (90 mg, 0.16 mmol, 1 equiv) was dissolved in anhydrous pyridine (2 mL) under argon and cooled to -30 C. Treatment with imidazole (24 mg, 0.35 mmol, 2.1 equiv) and phosphorous oxychloride (66 L, 0.67 mmol, 4.1 equiv), and continued stirring at -30 C for 45 min gave a thick slurry. Volatiles were by rotary evaporation and the cake dried further under reduced pressure. The product was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (2.5x10 cm) with 7%
EtOAc/CH2ClZ to afford the product as a white foam (76 mg, 87%): MS m/e 530 (m+H) +
Step 5 HO
NC
The Step 4 compound (76 mg, 0.14 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous CH2C12 (1 mL) and cooled to 0 C and treated with TFA (1 mL) and H2O (2 drops) and stirred for 1.5 hr at 0 C. The solvents were removed by rotary evaporation and the residue was chased with toluene (5 mL) and dried
90 -under reduced pressure. Trituration with Et20 afforded the title compound as a white solid (54 mg, 880): MS m/e 316 (m+H)+.
Example 61 F
NC
Step 1 F
BOC-HN N
O
An oven-dried flask purged with argon was charged with anhydrous CH2C12 (3 mL) and cooled to -78 C. Treatment with diethylaminosulfur trifluoride (DAST, 60 L, 0.45 mmol, 1.5 equiv), followed by a solution of the Example 60 Step 2 compound (131 mg, 0.30 mmol, 1 equiv) in dry CH2C12 (3 mL) . After 15 min, the reaction was poured into a separatory funnel containing satd aq NaHCO3 (25 mL) and the layers were separated. The aqueous fraction was extracted with CH2C12 (25 mL), then the combined organic extracts were washed with brine (10 mL), dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated. The product was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (2.5x10 cm) with 5% MeOH/CH2C12 to give Step 1 compound (124 mg, 0.29 mmol, 94%): MS We 436 (m+H) +.
Example 61 F
NC
Step 1 F
BOC-HN N
O
An oven-dried flask purged with argon was charged with anhydrous CH2C12 (3 mL) and cooled to -78 C. Treatment with diethylaminosulfur trifluoride (DAST, 60 L, 0.45 mmol, 1.5 equiv), followed by a solution of the Example 60 Step 2 compound (131 mg, 0.30 mmol, 1 equiv) in dry CH2C12 (3 mL) . After 15 min, the reaction was poured into a separatory funnel containing satd aq NaHCO3 (25 mL) and the layers were separated. The aqueous fraction was extracted with CH2C12 (25 mL), then the combined organic extracts were washed with brine (10 mL), dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated. The product was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (2.5x10 cm) with 5% MeOH/CH2C12 to give Step 1 compound (124 mg, 0.29 mmol, 94%): MS We 436 (m+H) +.
91 -Step 2 F
BOC-HN N
O NC
The fluorinated amide from Step 1 (161 mg, 0.37 mmol, 1 equiv) was dissolved in anhydrous pyridine (4 mL) under argon and cooled to -30 C. The mixture was treated with imidazole (54 mg, 0.77 mmol, 2.1 equiv) and phosphorous oxychloride (143 L, 1.52 mmol, 4.1 equiv) and stirred at -30 C for 40 min. The solvent was removed by rotary evaporation and dried further under reduced pressure.
The product was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel(2.5x10 cm) with 5% EtOAc/CH2C12 to give the Step 2 compound as a white foam (126 mg, 820): MS m/e 418 (m+H) +.
Step 3 F
O NC
The Step 2 compound (125 mg, 0.30 mmol) was dissolved in TFA/CH2C12 (1:1 v/v, 2 mL), and stirred at rt. After 30 min, the solvents were removed by rotary evaporation, the remainder was chased with toluene (2x5 mL), and the solid dried under reduced pressure. Trituration with Et20 afforded the title compound as a white solid.(93 mg, 0.21 mmol, 72%): MS m/e 318 (m+H) +.
BOC-HN N
O NC
The fluorinated amide from Step 1 (161 mg, 0.37 mmol, 1 equiv) was dissolved in anhydrous pyridine (4 mL) under argon and cooled to -30 C. The mixture was treated with imidazole (54 mg, 0.77 mmol, 2.1 equiv) and phosphorous oxychloride (143 L, 1.52 mmol, 4.1 equiv) and stirred at -30 C for 40 min. The solvent was removed by rotary evaporation and dried further under reduced pressure.
The product was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel(2.5x10 cm) with 5% EtOAc/CH2C12 to give the Step 2 compound as a white foam (126 mg, 820): MS m/e 418 (m+H) +.
Step 3 F
O NC
The Step 2 compound (125 mg, 0.30 mmol) was dissolved in TFA/CH2C12 (1:1 v/v, 2 mL), and stirred at rt. After 30 min, the solvents were removed by rotary evaporation, the remainder was chased with toluene (2x5 mL), and the solid dried under reduced pressure. Trituration with Et20 afforded the title compound as a white solid.(93 mg, 0.21 mmol, 72%): MS m/e 318 (m+H) +.
- 92 -Example 62 O NC
Step 1 OH
BocHN
The Step 1 compound was prepared beginning with 2-adamantanal and elaborated to the homochiral Boc-amino acid by an asymmetric Strecker synthesis according to general method G.
Step 2 NC
The title compound in Example 62 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the 2-adamantyl amino acid described in Step 1 followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C.MS (M+H) 300.
Step 1 OH
BocHN
The Step 1 compound was prepared beginning with 2-adamantanal and elaborated to the homochiral Boc-amino acid by an asymmetric Strecker synthesis according to general method G.
Step 2 NC
The title compound in Example 62 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the 2-adamantyl amino acid described in Step 1 followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C.MS (M+H) 300.
- 93 -Example 63 N
O CN
Step 1 4b An oven-dried flask equipped with a condenser and drying tube was charged with norbornane-2-carboxylic acid (4.92 g, 35 mmol, 1 equiv) and treated with bromine (2.1 mL, 41 mmol, 1.15 equiv) and phosphorous trichloride (0.153 mL, 1.8 mmol, 0.05 equiv). The mixture was heated at 85 C for 7 h protected from light. Additional bromine (0.4 mL, 7.8 mmol, 0.22 equiv) was added with continued heating for 1 h. The mixture was cooled to rt, and Et20 (100 mL) was added. The mixture was washed with 10% aq NaHSO3 (50 mL), H2O (2x50 mL), and brine (25 mL) . The ether fraction was dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated by rotary evaporation. The product was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (5x15 cm) with 2% to 4%
MeOH/CH2C12 + 0.5o HOAc. The product was chased with hexanes to remove residual HOAc. The isolated material consists of two inseparable materials (4.7 g), which was used without further purification in the next step.
Z~7 ~~_ Br The crude product from above, exo-2- bromonorbornane-1-carboxylic acid (4.7 g, impure) in Et20 (80 mL) and MeOH
(20 mL), was mixed with trimethylsilyldiazomethane (2.0 M
in hexane, 11.8 mL, 23.6 mol), and stirred at rt for 1 h.
O CN
Step 1 4b An oven-dried flask equipped with a condenser and drying tube was charged with norbornane-2-carboxylic acid (4.92 g, 35 mmol, 1 equiv) and treated with bromine (2.1 mL, 41 mmol, 1.15 equiv) and phosphorous trichloride (0.153 mL, 1.8 mmol, 0.05 equiv). The mixture was heated at 85 C for 7 h protected from light. Additional bromine (0.4 mL, 7.8 mmol, 0.22 equiv) was added with continued heating for 1 h. The mixture was cooled to rt, and Et20 (100 mL) was added. The mixture was washed with 10% aq NaHSO3 (50 mL), H2O (2x50 mL), and brine (25 mL) . The ether fraction was dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated by rotary evaporation. The product was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (5x15 cm) with 2% to 4%
MeOH/CH2C12 + 0.5o HOAc. The product was chased with hexanes to remove residual HOAc. The isolated material consists of two inseparable materials (4.7 g), which was used without further purification in the next step.
Z~7 ~~_ Br The crude product from above, exo-2- bromonorbornane-1-carboxylic acid (4.7 g, impure) in Et20 (80 mL) and MeOH
(20 mL), was mixed with trimethylsilyldiazomethane (2.0 M
in hexane, 11.8 mL, 23.6 mol), and stirred at rt for 1 h.
- 94 -Solvent was removed by rotary evaporation, and purification of the oil by flash column chromatography on silica gel (5x18 cm) with a gradient of CH2C12/hexanes (600 mL each of 20% and 30%) followed by CH2C12 afforded the product as a white solid (3.97 g, 0.017 mol, 79% for 2 steps): MS m/e 233/235 (m+H)+.
4b Methyl exo-2-bromonorbornane-l-carboxylate (2.0 g, 8.58 mmol, 1 equiv) was dissolved in anhydrous THE (50 mL) in an oven-dried 3-neck flask equipped with a condenser, and purged with argon. The mixture was treated with AIBN
(288 mg, 1.71 mmol, 0.2 equiv) and tributyltin hydride (3.6 mL, 12.87 mmol, 1.5 equiv), and then heated to reflux for 2 h. The flask was cooled to rt, and the THE
was removed by rotary evaporation to give the crude product. The product was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel(5x10 cm) with 5%
EtOAc/hexanes. The resulting material was used in the next step without further purification.
Step 2 The Step 1 compound was prepared beginning with 1-norbonyl methyl carboxylate and elaborated to the homochiral Boc amino acid by an asymmetric Strecker synthesis according to general method G.
4b Methyl exo-2-bromonorbornane-l-carboxylate (2.0 g, 8.58 mmol, 1 equiv) was dissolved in anhydrous THE (50 mL) in an oven-dried 3-neck flask equipped with a condenser, and purged with argon. The mixture was treated with AIBN
(288 mg, 1.71 mmol, 0.2 equiv) and tributyltin hydride (3.6 mL, 12.87 mmol, 1.5 equiv), and then heated to reflux for 2 h. The flask was cooled to rt, and the THE
was removed by rotary evaporation to give the crude product. The product was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel(5x10 cm) with 5%
EtOAc/hexanes. The resulting material was used in the next step without further purification.
Step 2 The Step 1 compound was prepared beginning with 1-norbonyl methyl carboxylate and elaborated to the homochiral Boc amino acid by an asymmetric Strecker synthesis according to general method G.
95 -Step 3 N
O CN
The title compound in Example 63 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the 1-norbonyl amino acid described in Step 2, followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) 260.
Example 64 O
O CN
Step 1 BocHN OH
The Step 1 compound was prepared beginning with 4-formylpyran and elaborated to the homochiral Boc amino acid by an asymmetric Strecker synthesis according to general method G.
Step 2 O
O CN
O CN
The title compound in Example 63 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the 1-norbonyl amino acid described in Step 2, followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) 260.
Example 64 O
O CN
Step 1 BocHN OH
The Step 1 compound was prepared beginning with 4-formylpyran and elaborated to the homochiral Boc amino acid by an asymmetric Strecker synthesis according to general method G.
Step 2 O
O CN
96 -The title compound in Example 64 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the 4-pyranyl amino acid described in Step 2, followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) 250.
General Method H: Strecker Synthesis of Racemic Amino Acids.
Scheme 10, General Method H, Examples 65-66 p BocHN
a. celite, PCC, CH2CI2, RT, 91% b. NH4CI, NaCN, MeOH; 12M HCI, HOAc;
(Boc)20, TEA, DMF.
Step 1 HO
To a stirred solution of 1-phenylcyclo-l-pentane-carboxylic acid (5.00 g, 26.3 mmol) in 25 mL of THE at 0 C
was added LAH (52 mL , 52 mmol, 1M) in THF. The reaction mixture was slowly warmed to rt and then refluxed for 18 h. The reaction was quenched according to the Fieser procedure: careful addition of 2 mL of water; 6 mL of 15% NaOH in water; and 2 mL of water. The biphasic mixture was diluted with 100 mL of ether and the granular white solid filtered off. The ether fraction was dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated to give 4.30 g (93%) of the Step 1 compound.
General Method H: Strecker Synthesis of Racemic Amino Acids.
Scheme 10, General Method H, Examples 65-66 p BocHN
a. celite, PCC, CH2CI2, RT, 91% b. NH4CI, NaCN, MeOH; 12M HCI, HOAc;
(Boc)20, TEA, DMF.
Step 1 HO
To a stirred solution of 1-phenylcyclo-l-pentane-carboxylic acid (5.00 g, 26.3 mmol) in 25 mL of THE at 0 C
was added LAH (52 mL , 52 mmol, 1M) in THF. The reaction mixture was slowly warmed to rt and then refluxed for 18 h. The reaction was quenched according to the Fieser procedure: careful addition of 2 mL of water; 6 mL of 15% NaOH in water; and 2 mL of water. The biphasic mixture was diluted with 100 mL of ether and the granular white solid filtered off. The ether fraction was dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated to give 4.30 g (93%) of the Step 1 compound.
- 97 -Step 2 OHC
To a stirred solution of Step 1 compound (0.80 g, 4.50 mmol) in 15 mL of CH2C12 at rt was added celite (5 g) followed by PCC (1.95 g, 5.00 mmol). After stirring for 3 h the reaction mixture was diluted with 40 mL of CH2C12 and filtered through celite. The filtrate was filtered an additional time through silica gel resulting in a colorless filtrate. The CH2C12 fraction was evaporated to give 0.72 g (91%) of the aldehyde as a colorless oil.
Step 3 i H
Boc-N
Y
COOH
To a 50-mL round-bottomed flask containing Step 2 compound (0.72 g, 4.20 mmol) in 8 mL of water at rt was added NaCN (0.20 g, 4.20 mmol) followed by NH4C1 (0.20 g, 5.00 mmol). To this reaction mixture was then added methanol (8 mL) and the mixture was allowed to stir overnight. The reaction mixture was then extracted with ether (2X15 mL), dried (MgSO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude Strecker product.
To a 100-mL round-bottomed flask containing the crude Strecker product was added 10 mL.of HOAc and 10 mL of conc. HC1. The mixture was refluxed overnight. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure to give a
To a stirred solution of Step 1 compound (0.80 g, 4.50 mmol) in 15 mL of CH2C12 at rt was added celite (5 g) followed by PCC (1.95 g, 5.00 mmol). After stirring for 3 h the reaction mixture was diluted with 40 mL of CH2C12 and filtered through celite. The filtrate was filtered an additional time through silica gel resulting in a colorless filtrate. The CH2C12 fraction was evaporated to give 0.72 g (91%) of the aldehyde as a colorless oil.
Step 3 i H
Boc-N
Y
COOH
To a 50-mL round-bottomed flask containing Step 2 compound (0.72 g, 4.20 mmol) in 8 mL of water at rt was added NaCN (0.20 g, 4.20 mmol) followed by NH4C1 (0.20 g, 5.00 mmol). To this reaction mixture was then added methanol (8 mL) and the mixture was allowed to stir overnight. The reaction mixture was then extracted with ether (2X15 mL), dried (MgSO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude Strecker product.
To a 100-mL round-bottomed flask containing the crude Strecker product was added 10 mL.of HOAc and 10 mL of conc. HC1. The mixture was refluxed overnight. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure to give a
- 98 -yellow solid. The solid was triturated with 5 mL of 1:1 mixture of ether and hexanes. The white solid was treated with triethylamine (1.4 mL, 9.99 mmol) and di-tert-butyldicarbonate (1.00 g, 4.60 mmol) in 50 mL DMF.
After 4 h the pH of the mixture was adjusted to 9 with saturated Na2C03 soln. After an additional 3 h of stirring the mixture was extracted with 1:1 ether and hexanes and the aqueous fraction acidified to pH 2 with 5% KHSO4 solution. The aqueous phase was washed with ether (2 X 40 mL), the organics dried (MgS04), and evaporated to an oil that was purified by silica gel flash chromatography with 8:92 methanol:CH2C12 to give 0.3 g (23%) of the Boc-protected amino acid as a light oil (M-H, 318).
Example 65 HZN N
O CN
Step 1 H
Boc-N
COOH
The synthesis of the Step 1 compound was described in general method H for the Strecker synthesis of racemic amino acids.
After 4 h the pH of the mixture was adjusted to 9 with saturated Na2C03 soln. After an additional 3 h of stirring the mixture was extracted with 1:1 ether and hexanes and the aqueous fraction acidified to pH 2 with 5% KHSO4 solution. The aqueous phase was washed with ether (2 X 40 mL), the organics dried (MgS04), and evaporated to an oil that was purified by silica gel flash chromatography with 8:92 methanol:CH2C12 to give 0.3 g (23%) of the Boc-protected amino acid as a light oil (M-H, 318).
Example 65 HZN N
O CN
Step 1 H
Boc-N
COOH
The synthesis of the Step 1 compound was described in general method H for the Strecker synthesis of racemic amino acids.
- 99 -Step 2 N
O
CN
The title compound in Example 65 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the cyclopentylphenyl amino acid described in Step 1 and general method H followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) 310.
Example 66 HzN
NC
Step 1 O
OH
BocHN
Step 1 compound was prepared using racemic Strecker synthesis according to general method H starting from 2,2-dimethyl-phenylacetic acid.
Step 2 O
N
NC
O
CN
The title compound in Example 65 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the cyclopentylphenyl amino acid described in Step 1 and general method H followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) 310.
Example 66 HzN
NC
Step 1 O
OH
BocHN
Step 1 compound was prepared using racemic Strecker synthesis according to general method H starting from 2,2-dimethyl-phenylacetic acid.
Step 2 O
N
NC
100 -The title compound in Example 66 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the dimethylphenyl amino acid described in step 1 followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) 284.
Example 67 -~ N
N
O CN
Step 1 N-(Benzyloxycarbonyl) succinimide (5.6 g, 22.4 mmol) was dissolved in CH2C12 (25 mL) and the solution was added to a cooled (0 C) and stirred solution of diethyl aminomalonate hydrochloride (5.0 g, 23.6 mmol) and triethylamine (13.4 mL, 95 mmol) in CH2C12 (125 ml) The resulting solution was stirred at 0 C for 10 min and then at rt for 1 h. The solution was washed with 10% citric acid (2 x 50 mL),10% sodium hydrogen carbonate (2 x 50 mL), and water (50mL) and was then dried (Na2SO4) and evaporated to.afford diethyl N-benzyloxycarbonylamino-malonate as a colorless oil, which crystallized upon standing at 0 C (6.3 g) (LC/Mass + ion) :310 (M+H) Step 2 AOH
H HCI
Step 1 compound (6.18 g, 20 mmol) was dissolved in dry ethanol (30 mL) and added to a solution of sodium ethoxide (2.85 g, 8.8 m mol; 21% w/w solution in ethanol (6 mL). A solution of 3-methyl-2-butenal (1.68 g, 20
Example 67 -~ N
N
O CN
Step 1 N-(Benzyloxycarbonyl) succinimide (5.6 g, 22.4 mmol) was dissolved in CH2C12 (25 mL) and the solution was added to a cooled (0 C) and stirred solution of diethyl aminomalonate hydrochloride (5.0 g, 23.6 mmol) and triethylamine (13.4 mL, 95 mmol) in CH2C12 (125 ml) The resulting solution was stirred at 0 C for 10 min and then at rt for 1 h. The solution was washed with 10% citric acid (2 x 50 mL),10% sodium hydrogen carbonate (2 x 50 mL), and water (50mL) and was then dried (Na2SO4) and evaporated to.afford diethyl N-benzyloxycarbonylamino-malonate as a colorless oil, which crystallized upon standing at 0 C (6.3 g) (LC/Mass + ion) :310 (M+H) Step 2 AOH
H HCI
Step 1 compound (6.18 g, 20 mmol) was dissolved in dry ethanol (30 mL) and added to a solution of sodium ethoxide (2.85 g, 8.8 m mol; 21% w/w solution in ethanol (6 mL). A solution of 3-methyl-2-butenal (1.68 g, 20
- 101 -mmol) in ethanol (12 mL) was added, and the solution stirred at 25 C for 24 h. Acetic acid (0.56 mL) was then added the solution hydrogenated at 50 psi for 24 h using 10% Pd/C (2.0 g) as catalyst. The solution was filtered, evaporated and the residue chromatographed on silica with CH2C12 / EtOAc (9:1) to give 2,2-dicarboethoxy-3,3-dimethyl-pyrrolidine (1.6 g) (LC/Mass, + ion): 244 (M+H).
This diester (850 mg) was refluxed in 5 M hydrochloric acid (10 mL)/TFA (1 mL) for 8 h to give, after evaporation, a powdery white solid. Crystallization from methanol/ether gave 3,3-dimethyl-dl-proline hydrochloride (190 mg) as white crystals mp 110-112 C.
Step 3 A OH
N
BOC
Step 2 compound (173 mg, 0.97 mmol) was dissolved in DMF
(3 mL)/ water (3 mL). To this clear solution was added triethylamine (0.46 mL, 3.18 mmol) and di-t-butyl dicarbonate (0.23 g, 1.06 mmol), and the reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 5 h. The solution was evaporated and the residue chromatographed on silica column using CH2C12/methanol (9:1) as eluent to yield t-butyloxy-carbonyl-3,3-dimethyl-dl-proline (200 mg) as an oil (LC/Mass, + ion): 244 (M+H).
This diester (850 mg) was refluxed in 5 M hydrochloric acid (10 mL)/TFA (1 mL) for 8 h to give, after evaporation, a powdery white solid. Crystallization from methanol/ether gave 3,3-dimethyl-dl-proline hydrochloride (190 mg) as white crystals mp 110-112 C.
Step 3 A OH
N
BOC
Step 2 compound (173 mg, 0.97 mmol) was dissolved in DMF
(3 mL)/ water (3 mL). To this clear solution was added triethylamine (0.46 mL, 3.18 mmol) and di-t-butyl dicarbonate (0.23 g, 1.06 mmol), and the reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 5 h. The solution was evaporated and the residue chromatographed on silica column using CH2C12/methanol (9:1) as eluent to yield t-butyloxy-carbonyl-3,3-dimethyl-dl-proline (200 mg) as an oil (LC/Mass, + ion): 244 (M+H).
- 102 -Step 4 H N
N
O CN
The title compound in Example 67 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the t-butyloxycarbonyl-3,3-dimethyl-dl-proline amino acid described in Step 3 followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) 220.
Example 68 N
O CN
Step 1 O
O-N
HO O,~,O
Sodium ethoxide (940 mg of 21 wt% solution in ethanol, 2.9 mmol) in ethanol (2 mL) was added to a stirred solution of diethyl acetamidomalonate (4.31g, 19.8 mmol) in EtOH (23 mL) at rt under argon. The reaction mixture was cooled to 0 C; and trans-2-pentenal (1.51 g, 18.0 mmol) was added dropwise maintaining the reaction temperature at < 5 C. After the addition, the reaction was allowed to warm to rt, stirred for 4 h, then quenched with acetic acid (460 l). The solution was concentrated in vacuo, and the residue dissolved in EtOAc (25 mL), washed with 10% NaHCO3 solution (2x5 mL), brine and dried (MgSO4). The solution was filtered and concentrated to a
N
O CN
The title compound in Example 67 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the t-butyloxycarbonyl-3,3-dimethyl-dl-proline amino acid described in Step 3 followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) 220.
Example 68 N
O CN
Step 1 O
O-N
HO O,~,O
Sodium ethoxide (940 mg of 21 wt% solution in ethanol, 2.9 mmol) in ethanol (2 mL) was added to a stirred solution of diethyl acetamidomalonate (4.31g, 19.8 mmol) in EtOH (23 mL) at rt under argon. The reaction mixture was cooled to 0 C; and trans-2-pentenal (1.51 g, 18.0 mmol) was added dropwise maintaining the reaction temperature at < 5 C. After the addition, the reaction was allowed to warm to rt, stirred for 4 h, then quenched with acetic acid (460 l). The solution was concentrated in vacuo, and the residue dissolved in EtOAc (25 mL), washed with 10% NaHCO3 solution (2x5 mL), brine and dried (MgSO4). The solution was filtered and concentrated to a
103 -mL volume, then heated to reflux and diluted with hexane (20 mL). Upon cooling to rt, the title compound precipitated and was collected to give 3.0 g (50%) of the Step 1 compound (mp 106-109 C; LC/Mass: + ions, 324 5 M+Na).
Step 2 O
N
O
O~-10 To a solution of Step 1 compound (2.87 g, 9.5 mmol) and triethylsilane (2.28 mL, 14.3 mmol) in CH2C12 (30 mL) under argon was added TFA (7.35 mL, 95.3 mmol) dropwise with stirring while maintaining the internal temperature at 25 C by means of an ice bath. After stirring for 4 h at rt, the solution was concentrated. The residue was diluted with CH2C12 (100 mL), then treated with H2O (50 mL) and solid Na2CO3 with vigorous stirring until the mixture was basic. The organic layer was separated, dried (Na2SO4), filtered, then concentrated to give the Step 2 compound as a yellow oil which was used without further purification (LC/Mass: + ions, 308 M+Na).
Step 3 OH
NH =HCI
Step 2 compound (3.73 g, 9.5 mmol) was suspended in 6 N
HC1 (20 mL) and HOAc (5 mL) and heated at reflux for 20 h. The reaction mixture was then cooled, washed with EtOAc (20 mL), then concentrated to give an oil which crystallized upon trituration with ether to give the
Step 2 O
N
O
O~-10 To a solution of Step 1 compound (2.87 g, 9.5 mmol) and triethylsilane (2.28 mL, 14.3 mmol) in CH2C12 (30 mL) under argon was added TFA (7.35 mL, 95.3 mmol) dropwise with stirring while maintaining the internal temperature at 25 C by means of an ice bath. After stirring for 4 h at rt, the solution was concentrated. The residue was diluted with CH2C12 (100 mL), then treated with H2O (50 mL) and solid Na2CO3 with vigorous stirring until the mixture was basic. The organic layer was separated, dried (Na2SO4), filtered, then concentrated to give the Step 2 compound as a yellow oil which was used without further purification (LC/Mass: + ions, 308 M+Na).
Step 3 OH
NH =HCI
Step 2 compound (3.73 g, 9.5 mmol) was suspended in 6 N
HC1 (20 mL) and HOAc (5 mL) and heated at reflux for 20 h. The reaction mixture was then cooled, washed with EtOAc (20 mL), then concentrated to give an oil which crystallized upon trituration with ether to give the
- 104 -title compound (1.2 g, 70.6%) (LC/Mass, + ion): 144 (M+H).
Step 4 O
OH
N\
BOC
Step 3 compound (692 mg, 3.76 mmol) was dissolved in acetone (12 mL)/ water (12 mL). To this clear solution was added triethylamine (1.9 mL, 12.8 mmol) and di-t-butyl dicarbonate (928 mg, 4.24 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 18 h. The solvents were evaporated and the residue chromatographed on silica with 1:9 methanol:CH2C12 to give the Step 4 compound as an oil (LC/Mass: + ions, 266 M+Na).
Step 5 N
O CN
Example 68 compound was prepared by peptide coupling of Step 4 amino acid followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C (MS (M+H) 234).
Exam=le 69 H
N N
O CN
Step 4 O
OH
N\
BOC
Step 3 compound (692 mg, 3.76 mmol) was dissolved in acetone (12 mL)/ water (12 mL). To this clear solution was added triethylamine (1.9 mL, 12.8 mmol) and di-t-butyl dicarbonate (928 mg, 4.24 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 18 h. The solvents were evaporated and the residue chromatographed on silica with 1:9 methanol:CH2C12 to give the Step 4 compound as an oil (LC/Mass: + ions, 266 M+Na).
Step 5 N
O CN
Example 68 compound was prepared by peptide coupling of Step 4 amino acid followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C (MS (M+H) 234).
Exam=le 69 H
N N
O CN
- 105 -Step 1 /
vO
O~
N
HO O,~,O
Sodium ethoxide (940 mg, 2.9 mmol; 21% w/w solution in ethanol) in ethanol (2 mL) was added to a stirred solution of diethyl acetamidomalonate (4.31 g, 19.8 mmol) in EtOH (23 mL) at rt under argon. The reaction mixture was cooled to 0 C; and 4-methyl-2-pentenal (1.77 g, 18.0 mmol)was added dropwise maintaining the reaction temperature at < 5 C. After the addition, the reaction was allowed to warm to rt, stirred for 4 h, then quenched with acetic acid (460 l). The solution was concentrated and the remainder dissolved in EtOAc (25 mL). The organics were washed with 10% NaHCO3 solution (2x5 mL), brine and dried (MgSO4). The solution was filtered and concentrated to 10 mL volume, then heated to reflux and treated with hexane (20 mL). On cooling, the Step 1 compound precipitated and was collected (3.3 g) (LC/Mass, + ion): 338 (M+Na).
Step 2 JO
O
N
To a solution of Step 1 compound (3.0g, 9.5 mmol) and triethylsilane (2.28 mL, 14.3 mmol) in CH2C12 (30 mL) under argon was added TFA (7.35 mL, 95.3 mmol) dropwise with stirring while maintaining the internal temperature at 25 C, by means of an ice bath. After stirring for 4 h
vO
O~
N
HO O,~,O
Sodium ethoxide (940 mg, 2.9 mmol; 21% w/w solution in ethanol) in ethanol (2 mL) was added to a stirred solution of diethyl acetamidomalonate (4.31 g, 19.8 mmol) in EtOH (23 mL) at rt under argon. The reaction mixture was cooled to 0 C; and 4-methyl-2-pentenal (1.77 g, 18.0 mmol)was added dropwise maintaining the reaction temperature at < 5 C. After the addition, the reaction was allowed to warm to rt, stirred for 4 h, then quenched with acetic acid (460 l). The solution was concentrated and the remainder dissolved in EtOAc (25 mL). The organics were washed with 10% NaHCO3 solution (2x5 mL), brine and dried (MgSO4). The solution was filtered and concentrated to 10 mL volume, then heated to reflux and treated with hexane (20 mL). On cooling, the Step 1 compound precipitated and was collected (3.3 g) (LC/Mass, + ion): 338 (M+Na).
Step 2 JO
O
N
To a solution of Step 1 compound (3.0g, 9.5 mmol) and triethylsilane (2.28 mL, 14.3 mmol) in CH2C12 (30 mL) under argon was added TFA (7.35 mL, 95.3 mmol) dropwise with stirring while maintaining the internal temperature at 25 C, by means of an ice bath. After stirring for 4 h
- 106 -at rt, the solution was concentrated, the residue diluted with CH2C12 (100 mL), then treated with H2O (50 mL) and solid Na2CO3 with vigorous stirring until the mixture was basic. The organic layer was separated, dried (Na2SO4), filtered, then concentrated to give the title compound as an oil which was used without further purification (LC/Mass:+ ions, 300 M+H).
Step 3 OH
Step 2 compound (3.8 g, 9.5 mmol) was suspended in 6 N
HC1 (20 mL) and HOAc (5 mL) and heated at reflux for 20 h. The reaction mixture was cooled, washed with EtOAc (20 mL), then concentrated to give an oil which crystallized upon trituration with ether to give the step 3 compound (1.4 g, 76.00). LC/Mass: + ions, 158 (M+H).
Step 4 v_O
OH
N, BOC
Step 3 compound (728 mg, 3.76 mmol) was dissolved in a 1:1 acetone/water solution (24 mL). To this clear solution was added triethylamine (1.9 mL, 12.8 mmol) and di-t-butyl dicarbonate (928 mg, 4.24 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 18 h. The solution was evaporated and the residue chromatographed on silica column using CH2C12/ methanol (9:1) as eluent to give the title compound as an oil (LC/Mass, + ion): 258 (M+H).
Step 3 OH
Step 2 compound (3.8 g, 9.5 mmol) was suspended in 6 N
HC1 (20 mL) and HOAc (5 mL) and heated at reflux for 20 h. The reaction mixture was cooled, washed with EtOAc (20 mL), then concentrated to give an oil which crystallized upon trituration with ether to give the step 3 compound (1.4 g, 76.00). LC/Mass: + ions, 158 (M+H).
Step 4 v_O
OH
N, BOC
Step 3 compound (728 mg, 3.76 mmol) was dissolved in a 1:1 acetone/water solution (24 mL). To this clear solution was added triethylamine (1.9 mL, 12.8 mmol) and di-t-butyl dicarbonate (928 mg, 4.24 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 18 h. The solution was evaporated and the residue chromatographed on silica column using CH2C12/ methanol (9:1) as eluent to give the title compound as an oil (LC/Mass, + ion): 258 (M+H).
- 107 -Step 5 H
N N
CN
Example 69 compound was prepared by peptide coupling of Step 4 amino acid followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C (MS (M+H) 248).
Example 70 O O
S N
CN
Step 1 O
NHBoc CN
Step 1 compound was prepared by the procedure described in General Method C starting from N-Boc-S-t-butylcysteine.
Step 2 O
4 11 ~A S'N
O NHBoc CN
A 25-mL round-bottomed flask equipped with a magnetic stirring bar and N2 inlet was charged with Step 1 compound
N N
CN
Example 69 compound was prepared by peptide coupling of Step 4 amino acid followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C (MS (M+H) 248).
Example 70 O O
S N
CN
Step 1 O
NHBoc CN
Step 1 compound was prepared by the procedure described in General Method C starting from N-Boc-S-t-butylcysteine.
Step 2 O
4 11 ~A S'N
O NHBoc CN
A 25-mL round-bottomed flask equipped with a magnetic stirring bar and N2 inlet was charged with Step 1 compound
108 -(78 mg, 0.21 mmol) and chloroform (3 mL). The mixture was cooled to 0 C and treated with m-chloroperoxybenzoic acid (85 mg, 0.44 mmol) in CHC13 (2 mL) After 3 h the solution was diluted with CHC13 (7 mL), washed with 5%
NaHCO3 (2x5 mL), H2O and dried over Na2SO4. Removal of solvent gave crude sulfoxide (100 mg), which was used without further purification (LC/Mass, + ions): 384 (M+H).
Step 3 O O
S N
Trifluoroacetic acid (1.5 mL) was added to a cooled (0 C) solution of Step 2 compound (100 mg, 0.26 mmol) in 5 mL
CH2C12. The solution was then stirred at 0 C for 1.5 h, diluted with CH2C12 (5 mL) and concentrated under reduced pressure to a thick oil. The product was purified by reverse phase preparative column chromatography on a YMC
S5 ODS 20x100 mm column to give the title compound of Example 70 , 17 mg, 16%. Purification conditions:
gradient elution from 10% methanol/water/0.1 TFA to 90%
methanol/water/ 0.1 TFA over 15 min 5 min hold at 90%
methanol/water/0.1 TFA. Flow rate: 20 mL/min. Detection wavelength: 220. Retention Time 10 Min (LC/Mass, + ion):
284 (M+H).
Example 71 S N
u
NaHCO3 (2x5 mL), H2O and dried over Na2SO4. Removal of solvent gave crude sulfoxide (100 mg), which was used without further purification (LC/Mass, + ions): 384 (M+H).
Step 3 O O
S N
Trifluoroacetic acid (1.5 mL) was added to a cooled (0 C) solution of Step 2 compound (100 mg, 0.26 mmol) in 5 mL
CH2C12. The solution was then stirred at 0 C for 1.5 h, diluted with CH2C12 (5 mL) and concentrated under reduced pressure to a thick oil. The product was purified by reverse phase preparative column chromatography on a YMC
S5 ODS 20x100 mm column to give the title compound of Example 70 , 17 mg, 16%. Purification conditions:
gradient elution from 10% methanol/water/0.1 TFA to 90%
methanol/water/ 0.1 TFA over 15 min 5 min hold at 90%
methanol/water/0.1 TFA. Flow rate: 20 mL/min. Detection wavelength: 220. Retention Time 10 Min (LC/Mass, + ion):
284 (M+H).
Example 71 S N
u
- 109 -Step 1 11m N O NHBoc CN
A 25-mL round-bottomed flask equipped with a magnetic stirring bar and N2 inlet was charged with compound from Example 70, Step 1 (78 mg, 0.21 mmol) in chloroform (3 mL). The mixture was cooled to 0 C and treated with m-chloroperoxybenzoic acid (144 mg, 0.84 mmol) in CHC13 (2 mL). After 30 min at rt, the solution was diluted with CHC13 (7 mL), washed with 5% NaHCO3 (2x10 mL), H2O and dried over Na2SO4. Removal of solvent gave the crude sulfone (100 mg), which was used without further purification (LC/Mass, + ion): 344 (M+H-Bu).
Step 2 S
N
Trifluoroacetic acid (1.5 mL) was added to a cooled (0 C) and stirred solution of Step 1 compound (100 mg, 0.26 mmol) in 5 mL CH2C12. The solution was stirred at 0 C for min, diluted with CH2C12 (5 mL) and concentrated under reduced pressure to a thick oil. The product was 25 purified by reverse phase preparative column chromatography on a YMC S5 ODS 20x100 mm column to give the title compound, 14 mg, 17%. Purification conditions:
gradient elution from 10% methanol/water/0.1 TFA to 90%
methanol/water/ 0.1 TFA over 15 min. 5 min hold at 90%
30 methanol/water/0.1 TFA. Flow rate:20 mL/min. Detection
A 25-mL round-bottomed flask equipped with a magnetic stirring bar and N2 inlet was charged with compound from Example 70, Step 1 (78 mg, 0.21 mmol) in chloroform (3 mL). The mixture was cooled to 0 C and treated with m-chloroperoxybenzoic acid (144 mg, 0.84 mmol) in CHC13 (2 mL). After 30 min at rt, the solution was diluted with CHC13 (7 mL), washed with 5% NaHCO3 (2x10 mL), H2O and dried over Na2SO4. Removal of solvent gave the crude sulfone (100 mg), which was used without further purification (LC/Mass, + ion): 344 (M+H-Bu).
Step 2 S
N
Trifluoroacetic acid (1.5 mL) was added to a cooled (0 C) and stirred solution of Step 1 compound (100 mg, 0.26 mmol) in 5 mL CH2C12. The solution was stirred at 0 C for min, diluted with CH2C12 (5 mL) and concentrated under reduced pressure to a thick oil. The product was 25 purified by reverse phase preparative column chromatography on a YMC S5 ODS 20x100 mm column to give the title compound, 14 mg, 17%. Purification conditions:
gradient elution from 10% methanol/water/0.1 TFA to 90%
methanol/water/ 0.1 TFA over 15 min. 5 min hold at 90%
30 methanol/water/0.1 TFA. Flow rate:20 mL/min. Detection
110 -wavelength: 220. Retention Time 10 Min. (LC/Mass, +
ion): 300 (M+H).
Example 72 TFAHN
The title compound was prepared following a published procedure (Sasaki et al, Tetrahedron Lett. 1995, 36, 3149, Sasaki et al. Tetrahedron 1994, 50, 7093) used to synthesize (2S,3R,4S)-N-Boc-3,4-methano-L-proline carboxylate. The corresponding amide was prepared by general method A and deprotected with TFA to give the TFA
salt also as described in general method A.
Example 73 O CN
The title compound was prepared by coupling (2S,3R,4S)-3,4-methano-L-proline carboxamide-N-trifluoroacetate described in Example 72 with L-cyclohexylglycine and then dehydrated to the amide with POC13/imidazole and deprotected (N-terminal nitrogen) with TFA using general C (FAB MH+ 248).
Example 74 O CN
ion): 300 (M+H).
Example 72 TFAHN
The title compound was prepared following a published procedure (Sasaki et al, Tetrahedron Lett. 1995, 36, 3149, Sasaki et al. Tetrahedron 1994, 50, 7093) used to synthesize (2S,3R,4S)-N-Boc-3,4-methano-L-proline carboxylate. The corresponding amide was prepared by general method A and deprotected with TFA to give the TFA
salt also as described in general method A.
Example 73 O CN
The title compound was prepared by coupling (2S,3R,4S)-3,4-methano-L-proline carboxamide-N-trifluoroacetate described in Example 72 with L-cyclohexylglycine and then dehydrated to the amide with POC13/imidazole and deprotected (N-terminal nitrogen) with TFA using general C (FAB MH+ 248).
Example 74 O CN
- 111 -The title compound was prepared by coupling (2S,3R,4S)-3,4-methano-L-proline carboxamide-N-trifluoroacetate described in Example 72 with L-tert-butylglycine and then dehydrated to the amide with POC13/imidazole and deprotected (N-terminal nitrogen) with TFA using general C (FAB MH+ 222).
Example 75 The title compound was prepared by coupling (2S,3R,4S)-3,4-methano-L-proline carboxamide-N-trifluoroacetate described in Example 72 with L-valine and then dehydrated to the amide with POC13/imidazole and deprotected (N-terminal nitrogen) with TFA using general C (FAB MH+
207).
Example 76 O CN
The title compound was prepared by coupling (2S,3R,4S)-3,4-methano-L-proline carboxamide-N-trifluoroacetate described in Example 72 with N-(tert-butyloxycarbonyl)-(1'ethylcyclopentyl)glycine described in General Method B
and then dehydrated to the amide with POC13/imidazole and deprotected (N-terminal nitrogen) with TFA using general C (FAB MH+ 262).
Example 75 The title compound was prepared by coupling (2S,3R,4S)-3,4-methano-L-proline carboxamide-N-trifluoroacetate described in Example 72 with L-valine and then dehydrated to the amide with POC13/imidazole and deprotected (N-terminal nitrogen) with TFA using general C (FAB MH+
207).
Example 76 O CN
The title compound was prepared by coupling (2S,3R,4S)-3,4-methano-L-proline carboxamide-N-trifluoroacetate described in Example 72 with N-(tert-butyloxycarbonyl)-(1'ethylcyclopentyl)glycine described in General Method B
and then dehydrated to the amide with POC13/imidazole and deprotected (N-terminal nitrogen) with TFA using general C (FAB MH+ 262).
112 -Example 77 O CN
The title compound was prepared by coupling (2S,3R,4S)-3,4-methano-L-proline carboxamide-N-trifluoroacetate described in Example 72 with N-(tert-butyloxycarbonyl)-(1'vinylcyclopentyl)glycine described in General Method B
and then dehydrated to the amide with POC13/imidazole and deprotected (N-terminal nitrogen) with TFA using General Method C (FAB MH+ 260).
Example 78 HO
HO N
HZN
O CN
N-[((S)-cyclopentylvinyl)-N-tert-butoxycarbonylglycinyl]-(2S,4S,5S)-2-cyano-4,5-methano-L-prolylamide (70 mg, 0.19 mmol) described in General Method C, Step 2 was dissolved in a mixture of 2 mL t-BuOH / 3 mL THE and N-methylmorpholine-N-oxide (33mg, 0.28 mmol) was added followed by osmium tetroxide (0.1 mmol, 50 mol%). The reaction was quenched with 1 mL of 10% aqueous Na2SO3 and was taken up in EtOAc and washed with H2O 5 mL, dried (Na2SO4), filtered, evaporated and purified by silica gel flash chromatography (5% MeOH/CH2C12) to give 41 mg (55%) of the protected diol as an oil. The title compound was obtained by deprotection of the amine functionality with TFA according to General Method C (FAB MH+ 294).
The title compound was prepared by coupling (2S,3R,4S)-3,4-methano-L-proline carboxamide-N-trifluoroacetate described in Example 72 with N-(tert-butyloxycarbonyl)-(1'vinylcyclopentyl)glycine described in General Method B
and then dehydrated to the amide with POC13/imidazole and deprotected (N-terminal nitrogen) with TFA using General Method C (FAB MH+ 260).
Example 78 HO
HO N
HZN
O CN
N-[((S)-cyclopentylvinyl)-N-tert-butoxycarbonylglycinyl]-(2S,4S,5S)-2-cyano-4,5-methano-L-prolylamide (70 mg, 0.19 mmol) described in General Method C, Step 2 was dissolved in a mixture of 2 mL t-BuOH / 3 mL THE and N-methylmorpholine-N-oxide (33mg, 0.28 mmol) was added followed by osmium tetroxide (0.1 mmol, 50 mol%). The reaction was quenched with 1 mL of 10% aqueous Na2SO3 and was taken up in EtOAc and washed with H2O 5 mL, dried (Na2SO4), filtered, evaporated and purified by silica gel flash chromatography (5% MeOH/CH2C12) to give 41 mg (55%) of the protected diol as an oil. The title compound was obtained by deprotection of the amine functionality with TFA according to General Method C (FAB MH+ 294).
113 -Example 79 N
General Procedure I: Synthesis of Quaternary Amino Acids Via Michael Addition to Malonates followed by Selective Hydrolysis and Curtius Rearrangement. Examples 79-84.
Cyclohexanone and diethylmalonate underwent Knoevenagel condensation mediated by titanium tetrachloride in THF
and CC14 to give 40. Copper (I) mediated Grignard addition of methylmagnesium bromide gave 41 which was selectively saponified to 42. Curtius rearrangement with trapping by benzyl alcohol gave 43 which was converted to 44 by a standard deprotection-protection protocol. Ester 44 was saponified to give the quaternary amino acid 45.
Scheme 11, General Method I
q a b c 0 EtO I OEt Et0 OEt Et0 OH
d e f EtO NH EtO NH HO NH
I I I
0 CBZ 0 Boc 0 Boc a. THF, CC14, TiCl4, diethylmalonate, 0 C; pyridine, THF, 0 to RT 72 h b.
MeMgBr, Cul, Et20, 0 C c. 1N NaOH, EtOH, RT 6 days d. Ph2PON3, TEA, RT to reflux to RT, BnOH e. 10% Pd(OH)2/C, EtOAc; (Boc)20, K2CO3, THF f. IN NaOH, dioxane
General Procedure I: Synthesis of Quaternary Amino Acids Via Michael Addition to Malonates followed by Selective Hydrolysis and Curtius Rearrangement. Examples 79-84.
Cyclohexanone and diethylmalonate underwent Knoevenagel condensation mediated by titanium tetrachloride in THF
and CC14 to give 40. Copper (I) mediated Grignard addition of methylmagnesium bromide gave 41 which was selectively saponified to 42. Curtius rearrangement with trapping by benzyl alcohol gave 43 which was converted to 44 by a standard deprotection-protection protocol. Ester 44 was saponified to give the quaternary amino acid 45.
Scheme 11, General Method I
q a b c 0 EtO I OEt Et0 OEt Et0 OH
d e f EtO NH EtO NH HO NH
I I I
0 CBZ 0 Boc 0 Boc a. THF, CC14, TiCl4, diethylmalonate, 0 C; pyridine, THF, 0 to RT 72 h b.
MeMgBr, Cul, Et20, 0 C c. 1N NaOH, EtOH, RT 6 days d. Ph2PON3, TEA, RT to reflux to RT, BnOH e. 10% Pd(OH)2/C, EtOAc; (Boc)20, K2CO3, THF f. IN NaOH, dioxane
- 114 -Step 1 OEt Et0 O O
According to literature procedure (Tetrahedron 1973, 29, 435), a mixture of dry tetrahydrofuran (400 mL) and dry carbon tetrachloride (50 mL) was cooled to 0 C (ice-salt bath) and treated with titanium tetrachloride (22.0 mL, 0.2 mole). The resulting yellow suspension was stirred at 0 C for 5 min, treated sequentially with cyclohexanone (10.3 mL, 0.1 mole) and distilled diethylmalonate (15.2 mL, 0.1 mole) then stirred at 0 C for 30 min. The reaction mixture was then treated with a solution of dry pyridine (32 mL, 0.40 mole) in dry THE (60 mL), stirred at 0 C for 1.0 h, then at rt for 72 h. The reaction mixture was quenched with water (100 mL), stirred for 5 min then extracted with ether (2 x 200 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with saturated sodium chloride (100 mL), saturated sodium bicarbonate (100 mL) and brine (100 mL), dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated. Flash chromatography using 5% EtOAc in hexane gave step 1 compound as a light yellow oil. Yield: 5.25 g (22%). MS (M + Na) 263.
According to literature procedure (Tetrahedron 1973, 29, 435), a mixture of dry tetrahydrofuran (400 mL) and dry carbon tetrachloride (50 mL) was cooled to 0 C (ice-salt bath) and treated with titanium tetrachloride (22.0 mL, 0.2 mole). The resulting yellow suspension was stirred at 0 C for 5 min, treated sequentially with cyclohexanone (10.3 mL, 0.1 mole) and distilled diethylmalonate (15.2 mL, 0.1 mole) then stirred at 0 C for 30 min. The reaction mixture was then treated with a solution of dry pyridine (32 mL, 0.40 mole) in dry THE (60 mL), stirred at 0 C for 1.0 h, then at rt for 72 h. The reaction mixture was quenched with water (100 mL), stirred for 5 min then extracted with ether (2 x 200 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with saturated sodium chloride (100 mL), saturated sodium bicarbonate (100 mL) and brine (100 mL), dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated. Flash chromatography using 5% EtOAc in hexane gave step 1 compound as a light yellow oil. Yield: 5.25 g (22%). MS (M + Na) 263.
- 115 -Step 2 EtO OEt O O
According to literature (Org. Syn. VI, 442, 1988; Liebigs Ann. Chem. 1981, 748) a mixture of 3.0 M methylmagnesium iodide (3.1 mL, 9.36 mmol) and cuprous chloride (9.0 mg) was stirred at 0 C (ice-salt water bath), treated with a solution of Step 1 compound (1.5 g, 6.24 mmol) in dry ether (1.8 mL) over 5 min and stirred at 0 C for 1 h, then at rt for 40 min. The mixture was slowly added to a slurry of ice and water (15 mL), treated dropwise with 10% HC1 (3.7 mL) then extracted with EtOAc (3 x 25 mL).
The combined organic extracts were washed with 1% sodium thiosulfate (2.0 mL) and saturated sodium chloride (2.0 mL), dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated. Flash chromatography on a silica gel column using 5% ether in hexane (1.0 L) gave step 2 compound as a clear syrup. Yield: 1.09 g,(68%). MS
(M+H)257.
Step 3 Et0 OH
A solution of Step 2 compound (1.09 g, 4.03 mmol) in a mixture of methanol (5.4 mL) and water (2.7 mL) was treated with 1N sodium hydroxide (4.84 mL, 4.84 mmol or
According to literature (Org. Syn. VI, 442, 1988; Liebigs Ann. Chem. 1981, 748) a mixture of 3.0 M methylmagnesium iodide (3.1 mL, 9.36 mmol) and cuprous chloride (9.0 mg) was stirred at 0 C (ice-salt water bath), treated with a solution of Step 1 compound (1.5 g, 6.24 mmol) in dry ether (1.8 mL) over 5 min and stirred at 0 C for 1 h, then at rt for 40 min. The mixture was slowly added to a slurry of ice and water (15 mL), treated dropwise with 10% HC1 (3.7 mL) then extracted with EtOAc (3 x 25 mL).
The combined organic extracts were washed with 1% sodium thiosulfate (2.0 mL) and saturated sodium chloride (2.0 mL), dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated. Flash chromatography on a silica gel column using 5% ether in hexane (1.0 L) gave step 2 compound as a clear syrup. Yield: 1.09 g,(68%). MS
(M+H)257.
Step 3 Et0 OH
A solution of Step 2 compound (1.09 g, 4.03 mmol) in a mixture of methanol (5.4 mL) and water (2.7 mL) was treated with 1N sodium hydroxide (4.84 mL, 4.84 mmol or
- 116 -1.2 equiv) and stirred at rt for 6 days. The reaction mixture still showed the presence of starting material, so THE (4.0 mL) was added and the entire mixture stirred for another 2 days. The solution was evaporated to dryness and the resulting syrup partitioned between water (8.0 mL) and ether (15 mL). The aqueous phase was acidified with 1N hydrochloric acid (4.8 mL) to pH 2-3 and extracted with EtOAc (3 x 25 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine (10.0 mL), dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated to give step 3 compound as a thick syrup.
Yield: 875 mg, (95.1%). MS (M + H) 229.
Or alternately: solutions of the diester in a mixture of ethanol, THF, dioxane and water or mixtures thereof may be hydrolyzed with sodium hydroxide.
Step 4 Et0 NH
O CBZ
According to literature (J. Org. Chem 1994, 59, 8215), a solution of Step 3 compound (0.875 g, 3.83 mmol) in dry benzene (4.0 mL) was treated with triethylamine (0.52 mL, 3.83 mmol) and diphenylphosphoryl azide (0.85 mL, 3.83 mmol), refluxed under nitrogen for 1 h and cooled to rt.
The solution was treated with benzyl alcohol (0.60 mL, 5.75 mmol or 1.5 equiv), refluxed for 17 h, cooled then diluted with ether (40 mL). The solution was washed with 10% aqueous citric acid (2x3 mL),back-extracting the citric acid wash with ether (40 mL). The combined
Yield: 875 mg, (95.1%). MS (M + H) 229.
Or alternately: solutions of the diester in a mixture of ethanol, THF, dioxane and water or mixtures thereof may be hydrolyzed with sodium hydroxide.
Step 4 Et0 NH
O CBZ
According to literature (J. Org. Chem 1994, 59, 8215), a solution of Step 3 compound (0.875 g, 3.83 mmol) in dry benzene (4.0 mL) was treated with triethylamine (0.52 mL, 3.83 mmol) and diphenylphosphoryl azide (0.85 mL, 3.83 mmol), refluxed under nitrogen for 1 h and cooled to rt.
The solution was treated with benzyl alcohol (0.60 mL, 5.75 mmol or 1.5 equiv), refluxed for 17 h, cooled then diluted with ether (40 mL). The solution was washed with 10% aqueous citric acid (2x3 mL),back-extracting the citric acid wash with ether (40 mL). The combined
- 117 -organic extracts were washed with 5% sodium bicarbonate (2x3 mL), dried (MgSO4), filtered, and concentrated.
Flash chromatography on silica gel of the crude product with 10% EtOAc in hexane (1.0 L) gave step 4 compound as a clear thick syrup. Yield: 1.15 g (90%). MS(M+H) 334.
Step 5 EtO NH
B0c A solution of Step 4 compound (1.15 g, 3.46 mmol) in EtOAc (60 mL) was treated with palladium hydroxide on carbon (298 mg) and hydrogenated at rt for 20 h. The mixture was filtered through a celite pad and then washing the pad well with EtOAc (3 x 25 mL) then the filtrate was concentrated to give the free amine. A
solution of the amine in tetrahydrofuran (12 mL) and water (12 mL) was treated with di-t-butyl dicarbonate (1.0 g, 4.58 mmol or 1.48 equiv) and potassium carbonate (854 mg, 6.18 mmol or 2.0 equiv), then stirred at rt for 20 h. The reaction mixture was partitioned between water (8 mL) and diethyl ether (3 x 40 mL) and the combined organic extracts were washed with brine (8 mL), dried (MgSO4), filtered, and concentrated. Flash chromatography of the crude product with 10% EtOAc in hexane (1 L) gave step 5 compound as a clear thick syrup. Yield: 1.18 g (100%). MS: (M+H) 300.
Other methods can also be employed, for example:
According to Tetrahedron Lett. 1988, 29, 2983, where a solution of the benzylcarbamate in ethanol may be treated
Flash chromatography on silica gel of the crude product with 10% EtOAc in hexane (1.0 L) gave step 4 compound as a clear thick syrup. Yield: 1.15 g (90%). MS(M+H) 334.
Step 5 EtO NH
B0c A solution of Step 4 compound (1.15 g, 3.46 mmol) in EtOAc (60 mL) was treated with palladium hydroxide on carbon (298 mg) and hydrogenated at rt for 20 h. The mixture was filtered through a celite pad and then washing the pad well with EtOAc (3 x 25 mL) then the filtrate was concentrated to give the free amine. A
solution of the amine in tetrahydrofuran (12 mL) and water (12 mL) was treated with di-t-butyl dicarbonate (1.0 g, 4.58 mmol or 1.48 equiv) and potassium carbonate (854 mg, 6.18 mmol or 2.0 equiv), then stirred at rt for 20 h. The reaction mixture was partitioned between water (8 mL) and diethyl ether (3 x 40 mL) and the combined organic extracts were washed with brine (8 mL), dried (MgSO4), filtered, and concentrated. Flash chromatography of the crude product with 10% EtOAc in hexane (1 L) gave step 5 compound as a clear thick syrup. Yield: 1.18 g (100%). MS: (M+H) 300.
Other methods can also be employed, for example:
According to Tetrahedron Lett. 1988, 29, 2983, where a solution of the benzylcarbamate in ethanol may be treated
- 118 -with triethylsilane (2 equiv), di-t-butyldicarbonate (1.1 equiv), catalytic palladium acetate and triethylamine (0.3 equiv) to give the BOC-protected amine in a "one-pot" manner.
Or alternately: Solutions of the benzylcarbamate in methanol may be subjected to hydrogenolysis in the present of di-t-butyldicarbonate to give the BOC-protected amine in a "one-pot" manner.
Step 6 HO NH
O Boc A solution of Step 5 compound (1.18 g, 3.09 mmol) in dioxane (8.0 mL) was treated with 1N sodium hydroxide (9.1 mL, 9.1 mmol or 3.0 equiv) and stirred at 60 C (oil bath) for 28 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated to a syrup which was dissolved in water (15 mL) and extracted with ether (25 mL). The aqueous phase was acidified to pH 2-3 with 1N hydrochloric acid (9.2 mL) then extracted with EtOAc (3 x 50 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with saturated sodium chloride (10 mL), dried (MgSO4), filtered, and concentrated to give Step 6 compound as an off-white solid. Yield: 808 mg (960). MS (M+H) 272.
Or alternately: Solutions of the benzylcarbamate in methanol may be subjected to hydrogenolysis in the present of di-t-butyldicarbonate to give the BOC-protected amine in a "one-pot" manner.
Step 6 HO NH
O Boc A solution of Step 5 compound (1.18 g, 3.09 mmol) in dioxane (8.0 mL) was treated with 1N sodium hydroxide (9.1 mL, 9.1 mmol or 3.0 equiv) and stirred at 60 C (oil bath) for 28 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated to a syrup which was dissolved in water (15 mL) and extracted with ether (25 mL). The aqueous phase was acidified to pH 2-3 with 1N hydrochloric acid (9.2 mL) then extracted with EtOAc (3 x 50 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with saturated sodium chloride (10 mL), dried (MgSO4), filtered, and concentrated to give Step 6 compound as an off-white solid. Yield: 808 mg (960). MS (M+H) 272.
119 -Step 7 N
The title compound was prepared from Step 6 compound according to the procedure in General Method C where the amino acid was coupled, the amide was dehydrated, and the protecting group removed to give the title compound. MS
(M+H) 262.
Compounds 90-100 were prepared by General Method I and General Method C starting from cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone and cyclobutanone, and employing methyl-, ethyl-, allyl- and propylmagnesium halides as Grignard reagents.
Table 5 R
Y
N
CN
Example # Cycloalkane R MS Data M+H
79 cyclohexane Methyl 262 80 cyclohexane Ethyl 276 81 cyclopentane Methyl 248 82 cyclopentane Allyl 274 83 cyclopentane Propyl 276 84 cyclobutane Methyl 234
The title compound was prepared from Step 6 compound according to the procedure in General Method C where the amino acid was coupled, the amide was dehydrated, and the protecting group removed to give the title compound. MS
(M+H) 262.
Compounds 90-100 were prepared by General Method I and General Method C starting from cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone and cyclobutanone, and employing methyl-, ethyl-, allyl- and propylmagnesium halides as Grignard reagents.
Table 5 R
Y
N
CN
Example # Cycloalkane R MS Data M+H
79 cyclohexane Methyl 262 80 cyclohexane Ethyl 276 81 cyclopentane Methyl 248 82 cyclopentane Allyl 274 83 cyclopentane Propyl 276 84 cyclobutane Methyl 234
- 120 -Example 85 N
Step 1 OEt EtO
According to Example 79: A mixture of dry carbon tetrachloride (50 mL) was cooled to 0 C (ice-salt bath) and treated with titanium tetrachloride (11.0 mL, 0.1 mol). The resulting yellow suspension was stirred at 0 C
for 5 min, treated sequentially with cyclopentanone (4.42 mL, 0.05 mol) and distilled diethylmalonate (7.6 mL, 0.05 mol) then stirred at 0 C for 30 min. The reaction mixture was then treated with a solution of dry pyridine (16 mL, 0.20 mol) in dry THE (30 mL), stirred at 0 C for 1.0 h, then at rt for 20 h. The reaction mixture was quenched with water (50 mL), stirred for 5 min then extracted with ether (2 x 100 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with saturated sodium chloride (50 mL), saturated sodium bicarbonate (50 mL) and brine (50 mL), dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated. Flash chromatography using 5% EtOAc in hexane gave Step 1 compound as a light yellow oil. Yield: 7.67 g (68%). MS (M + H) 226.
Step 1 OEt EtO
According to Example 79: A mixture of dry carbon tetrachloride (50 mL) was cooled to 0 C (ice-salt bath) and treated with titanium tetrachloride (11.0 mL, 0.1 mol). The resulting yellow suspension was stirred at 0 C
for 5 min, treated sequentially with cyclopentanone (4.42 mL, 0.05 mol) and distilled diethylmalonate (7.6 mL, 0.05 mol) then stirred at 0 C for 30 min. The reaction mixture was then treated with a solution of dry pyridine (16 mL, 0.20 mol) in dry THE (30 mL), stirred at 0 C for 1.0 h, then at rt for 20 h. The reaction mixture was quenched with water (50 mL), stirred for 5 min then extracted with ether (2 x 100 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with saturated sodium chloride (50 mL), saturated sodium bicarbonate (50 mL) and brine (50 mL), dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated. Flash chromatography using 5% EtOAc in hexane gave Step 1 compound as a light yellow oil. Yield: 7.67 g (68%). MS (M + H) 226.
- 121 -Step 2 OEt EtO
O
O
A solution of Step 1 compound (1.00 g, 4.42 mmol) in methanol (50 mL) was treated with 10% Pd/C (0.20 g, 10 mol%) and hydrogenated (balloon pressure) at rt for 20 h.
The mixture was diluted with methanol and filtered through a pad of celite. The filtrate was concentrated and purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel with 7% EtOAc in hexanes to give 0.84 g (91%) of Step 2 compound. MS (M+H) 229.
Step 3 OH
HN
O
Boc The Step 3 compound was prepared by the process outlined in General Method H, where the ester underwent hydrolysis, Curtius Rearrangement, protecting group exchange, and again final ester hydrolysis.
Step 4 N
O
O
A solution of Step 1 compound (1.00 g, 4.42 mmol) in methanol (50 mL) was treated with 10% Pd/C (0.20 g, 10 mol%) and hydrogenated (balloon pressure) at rt for 20 h.
The mixture was diluted with methanol and filtered through a pad of celite. The filtrate was concentrated and purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel with 7% EtOAc in hexanes to give 0.84 g (91%) of Step 2 compound. MS (M+H) 229.
Step 3 OH
HN
O
Boc The Step 3 compound was prepared by the process outlined in General Method H, where the ester underwent hydrolysis, Curtius Rearrangement, protecting group exchange, and again final ester hydrolysis.
Step 4 N
- 122 -The title compound was prepared from Step 3 compound according to the procedure in General Method C where the amino acid was coupled, the amide was dehydrated, and the protecting group removed to give the title compound. MS
(M+H)234.
Examples 86 and 87 were prepared by the procedures used for Example 85 starting from cyclohexanone and cyclobutanone respectively.
N
Example # Cycloalkane Mass Spec M+H
85 cyclopentyl 234 86 cyclohexyl 248 87 cyclobutyl 220 Example 89 HN IIIIH
O N
NC
Step 1 Boc-N
OH
O
(M+H)234.
Examples 86 and 87 were prepared by the procedures used for Example 85 starting from cyclohexanone and cyclobutanone respectively.
N
Example # Cycloalkane Mass Spec M+H
85 cyclopentyl 234 86 cyclohexyl 248 87 cyclobutyl 220 Example 89 HN IIIIH
O N
NC
Step 1 Boc-N
OH
O
123 -Step 1 compound was prepared in Example 6 Step 1.
Step 2 HN IIIIH
O N
NC
The title compound was prepared from Step 1 compound according to General Method C, where the carboxylic acid underwent a peptide coupling, the amide dehydration and protecting group removal. MS (M+H) 218.
Step 2 HN IIIIH
O N
NC
The title compound was prepared from Step 1 compound according to General Method C, where the carboxylic acid underwent a peptide coupling, the amide dehydration and protecting group removal. MS (M+H) 218.
124 -Examples 90 to 99 Examples of compounds where X = H include the following compounds which may be prepared employing procedures as described hereinbefore.
N
H )Yn N Y
R4 O X=H
Ex. # n x y R1 R2 R3 R4 90 0 0 1 t-Bu H H -91 0 0 1 adamantyl H H -HO
93 0 0 1 H Me -94 0 1 0 t-Bu H H -95 0 1 0 adamantyl H H -HO
97 0 1 0 H Me -98 1 0 1 H H H t-Bu 99 1 1 0 Me H H t-Bu
N
H )Yn N Y
R4 O X=H
Ex. # n x y R1 R2 R3 R4 90 0 0 1 t-Bu H H -91 0 0 1 adamantyl H H -HO
93 0 0 1 H Me -94 0 1 0 t-Bu H H -95 0 1 0 adamantyl H H -HO
97 0 1 0 H Me -98 1 0 1 H H H t-Bu 99 1 1 0 Me H H t-Bu
125 -Examples 100 to 109 Examples of compounds where n = 1 include the following compounds which may be prepared employing procedures as described hereinbefore.
x N N
H n=1 Y
Ex. # X x y R1 R2 R3 R4 100 CN 0 1 H H H t-Bu 101 CN 0 1 H H H adamantyl 102 CN 0 1 H Me H
HO
103 CN 0 1 H Me. H
104 CN 1 0 t-Bu H H H
105 CN 1 0 adamantyl H H Me 106 CN 1 0 Et H H
HO
107 CN 1 0 H H Me 108 H 0 1 t-Bu H H H
109 H 1 0 Me H H t-Bu
x N N
H n=1 Y
Ex. # X x y R1 R2 R3 R4 100 CN 0 1 H H H t-Bu 101 CN 0 1 H H H adamantyl 102 CN 0 1 H Me H
HO
103 CN 0 1 H Me. H
104 CN 1 0 t-Bu H H H
105 CN 1 0 adamantyl H H Me 106 CN 1 0 Et H H
HO
107 CN 1 0 H H Me 108 H 0 1 t-Bu H H H
109 H 1 0 Me H H t-Bu
- 126 -
Claims (28)
1. A compound having the structure wherein x is 0 or 1 and y is 0 or 1, provided that x = 1 when y = 0 and x = 0 when y = 1; and wherein n is 0 or 1;
X is CN;
R1, R2, R3 and R4 are the same or different and are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, bicycloalkyl, tricycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyalkylcycloalkyl, hydroxycycloalkyl, hydroxybicycloalkyl, hydroxytricycloalkyl, bicycloalkylalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylalkylthioalkyl, cycloalkenyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl or cycloheteroalkylalkyl; all optionally substituted through available carbon atoms with 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 groups selected from hydrogen, halo, alkyl, polyhaloalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, polyhaloalkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, polycycloalkyl, heteroarylamino, arylamino, cycloheteroalkyl, cycloheteroalkylalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, nitro, cyano, amino, substituted amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, thiol, alkylthio, alkylcarbonyl, acyl, alkoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, alkynylaminocarbonyl, alkylaminocarbonyl, alkenylaminocarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, alkylcarbonylamino, arylcarbonylamino, alkylsulfonylamino, alkylaminocarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkylsulfonyl, aminosulfinyl, aminosulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonamido or sulfonyl;
and R1 and R3 may optionally be taken together to form -(CR5R6)m- where m is 2 to 6, and R5 and R6 are the same or different and are independently selected from hydroxy, alkoxy, H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, halo, amino, substituted amino, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkenyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, cycloheteroalkylalkyl, alkylcarbonylamino, arylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, aryloxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, or alkylaminocarbonylamino, or R1 and R4 may optionally be taken together to form -(CR7R8)p- wherein p is 2 to 6, and R7 and R8 are the same or different and are independently selected from hydroxy, alkoxy, cyano, H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkenyl, halo, amino, substituted amino, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, cycloheteroalkylalkyl, alkylcarbonylamino, arylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, aryloxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, or alkylaminocarbonylamino, or optionally R1 and R3 together with from a 5 to 7 membered ring containing a total of 2 to 4 heteroatoms selected from N, O, S, SO, or SO2;
or optionally R1 and R3 together with form a 4 to 8 membered cycloheteroalkyl ring wherein the cycloheteroalkyl ring has an optional aryl ring fused thereto or an optional 3 to 7 membered cycloalkyl ring fused thereto;
including all stereoisomers thereof;
and a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and all stereoisomers thereof.
X is CN;
R1, R2, R3 and R4 are the same or different and are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, bicycloalkyl, tricycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyalkylcycloalkyl, hydroxycycloalkyl, hydroxybicycloalkyl, hydroxytricycloalkyl, bicycloalkylalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylalkylthioalkyl, cycloalkenyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl or cycloheteroalkylalkyl; all optionally substituted through available carbon atoms with 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 groups selected from hydrogen, halo, alkyl, polyhaloalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, polyhaloalkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, polycycloalkyl, heteroarylamino, arylamino, cycloheteroalkyl, cycloheteroalkylalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, nitro, cyano, amino, substituted amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, thiol, alkylthio, alkylcarbonyl, acyl, alkoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, alkynylaminocarbonyl, alkylaminocarbonyl, alkenylaminocarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, alkylcarbonylamino, arylcarbonylamino, alkylsulfonylamino, alkylaminocarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkylsulfonyl, aminosulfinyl, aminosulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonamido or sulfonyl;
and R1 and R3 may optionally be taken together to form -(CR5R6)m- where m is 2 to 6, and R5 and R6 are the same or different and are independently selected from hydroxy, alkoxy, H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, halo, amino, substituted amino, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkenyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, cycloheteroalkylalkyl, alkylcarbonylamino, arylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, aryloxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, or alkylaminocarbonylamino, or R1 and R4 may optionally be taken together to form -(CR7R8)p- wherein p is 2 to 6, and R7 and R8 are the same or different and are independently selected from hydroxy, alkoxy, cyano, H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkenyl, halo, amino, substituted amino, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, cycloheteroalkylalkyl, alkylcarbonylamino, arylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, aryloxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, or alkylaminocarbonylamino, or optionally R1 and R3 together with from a 5 to 7 membered ring containing a total of 2 to 4 heteroatoms selected from N, O, S, SO, or SO2;
or optionally R1 and R3 together with form a 4 to 8 membered cycloheteroalkyl ring wherein the cycloheteroalkyl ring has an optional aryl ring fused thereto or an optional 3 to 7 membered cycloalkyl ring fused thereto;
including all stereoisomers thereof;
and a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and all stereoisomers thereof.
2. The compound as defined in Claim 1 having the structure:
3. The compound as defined in Claim 1 having the structure:
4. The compound as defined in Claim 1 having the structure:
5. The compound as defined in Claim 1 having the structure:
6. The compound as defined in Claim 1 wherein:
R3 is H, R1 is H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, bicycloalkyl, tricycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyalkylcycloalkyl, hydroxycycloalkyl hydroxybicycloalkyl, or hydroxytricycloalkyl, R2 is H or alkyl, n is 0, and X is CN.
R3 is H, R1 is H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, bicycloalkyl, tricycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyalkylcycloalkyl, hydroxycycloalkyl hydroxybicycloalkyl, or hydroxytricycloalkyl, R2 is H or alkyl, n is 0, and X is CN.
7. The compound as defined in Claim 1 wherein the cyclopropyl fused to the pyrrolidine has the configuration:
8. The compound as defined in Claim 1 having the structure:
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
9. The compound as defined in Claim 8 wherein the pharmaceutically acceptable salt is the hydrochloride salt or the trifluoroacetic acid salt.
10. The compound as defined in Claim 1 which is wherein R1 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, bicycloalkyl, tricycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxycycloalkyl, hydroxyalkylcycloalkyl, hydroxybicycloalkyl, or hydroxytricycloalkyl, or wherein R1 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, bicycloalkyl, tricycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxycycloalkyl, hydroxyalkylcycloalkyl, hydroxybicycloalkyl, or hydroxytricycloalkyl.
11. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound as defined in Claim 1 and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier therefor.
12. A pharmaceutical combination comprising a DP4 inhibitor compound as defined in Claim 1 and an antidiabetic agent other than a DP4 inhibitor for treating diabetes and related diseases, an anti-obesity agent and/or a lipid-modulating agent.
13. The pharmaceutical combination as defined in Claim 12 comprising said DP4 inhibitor compound and an antidiabetic agent.
14. The combination as defined in Claim 13 wherein the antidiabetic agent is 1, 2, 3 or more of a biguanide, a sulfonyl urea, a glucosidase inhibitor, a PPAR .gamma. agonist, a PPAR .alpha./.gamma. dual agonist, an SGLT2 inhibitor, an aP2 inhibitor, a glycogen phosphorylase inhibitor, an AGE
inhibitor, an insulin sensitizer, a glucagon-like peptide-l (GLP-l) or mimetic thereof, insulin and/or a meglitinide.
inhibitor, an insulin sensitizer, a glucagon-like peptide-l (GLP-l) or mimetic thereof, insulin and/or a meglitinide.
15. The combination as defined in Claim 14 wherein the antidiabetic agent is 1, 2, 3 or more of metformin, glyburide, glimepiride, glipyride, glipizide, chlorpropamide, gliclazide, acarbose, miglitol, pioglitazone, troglitazone, rosiglitazone, insulin, Gl-262570, isaglitazone, JTT-501, NN-2344, L895645, YM-440, R-119702, AJ9677, repaglinide, nateglinide, KAD1129, AR-HO39242, GW-409544, KRP297, AC2993, Exendin-4, LY307161, NN2211, and/or LY315902.
16. The combination as defined in Claim 13 wherein the compound is present in a weight ratio to the antidiabetic agent within the range from about 0.01:1 to about 100:1.
17. The combination as defined in Claim 12 wherein the anti-obesity agent is a beta 3 adrenergic agonist, a lipase inhibitor, a serotonin and dopamine reuptake inhibitor, a thyroid receptor beta compound, an anorectic agent, and/or a fatty acid oxidation upregulator.
18. The combination as defined in Claim 17 wherein the anti-obesity agent is orlistat, ATL-962, AJ9677, L750355, CP331648, sibutramine, topiramate, axokine, dexamphetamine, phentermine, phenylpropanolamine, famoxin, and/or mazindol.
19. The combination as defined in Claim 12 wherein the lipid modulating agent is an MTP inhibitor, an HMG CoA
reductase inhibitor, a squalene synthetase inhibitor, a fibric acid derivative, an upregulator of LDL receptor activity, a lipoxygenase inhibitor, an ACAT inhibitor, a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor, or an ATP
citrate lyase inhibitor.
reductase inhibitor, a squalene synthetase inhibitor, a fibric acid derivative, an upregulator of LDL receptor activity, a lipoxygenase inhibitor, an ACAT inhibitor, a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor, or an ATP
citrate lyase inhibitor.
20. The combination as defined in Claim 19 wherein the lipid modulating agent is pravastatin, lovastatin, simvastatin, atorvastatin, cerivastatin, fluvastatin, nisvastatin, visastatin, fenofibrate, gemfibrozil, clofibrate, implitapide, CP-529,414, avasimibe, TS-962, MD-700, and/or LY295427.
21. The combination as defined in Claim 19 wherein the DP4 inhibitor is present in a weight ratio to the lipid-modulating agent within the range from about 500:1 to about 1:500.
22. A pharmaceutical combination comprising a DP4 inhibitor compound as defined in Claim 1 and an agent for treating infertility, an agent for treating polycystic ovary syndrome, an agent for treating a growth disorder and/or frailty, an anti-arthritis agent, an agent for preventing inhibiting allograft rejection in transplantation, an agent for treating autoimmune disease, an anti-AIDS agent, an agent for treating inflammatory bowel disease/syndrome, an agent for treating anorexia nervosa, an anti-osteoporosis agent and/or an anti-obesity agent.
23. Use of a compound as defined in Claim 1 for the manufacture of a medicament for treating diabetes, insulin resistance, hyperglycemia, hyperisulinemia, or elevated blood levels of free fatty acids or glycerol, obesity, Syndrome X, dysmetabolic syndrome, diabetic complications, hypertriglyceridemia, hyperinsulinemia, atherosclerosis, impaired glucose homeostasis, impaired glucose tolerance, infertility, polycystic ovary syndrome, growth disorders, frailty, arthritis, allograft rejection in transplantation, autoimmune diseases, AIDS, intestinal diseases, inflammatory bowel syndrome, nervosa, osteoporosis, or an immunomodulatory disease or a chronic inflammatory bowel disease.
24. Use of a compound as defined in Claim 1 for treating diabetes, insulin resistance, hyperglycemia, hyperisulinemia, or elevated blood levels of free fatty acids or glycerol, obesity, Syndrome X, dysmetabolic syndrome, diabetic complications, hypertriglyceridemia, hyperinsulinemia, atherosclerosis, impaired glucose homeostasis, impaired glucose tolerance, infertility, polycystic ovary syndrome, growth disorders, frailty, arthritis, allograft rejection in transplantation, autoimmune diseases, AIDS, intestinal diseases, inflammatory bowel syndrome, nervosa, osteoporosis, or an immunomodulatory disease or a chronic inflammatory bowel disease.
25. The use as defined in Claim 23 or 24 for treating type II diabetes and/or obesity.
26. A compound having the structure
27. A method for preparing a protected amino hydroxy admantane carboxylic acid as defined in claim 26 which comprises providing a protected amino adamantane carboxylic acid of the structure treating the protected amino adamantane carboxylic acid with potassium permanagate and potassium hydroxide to form the protected amino hydroxy adamantane carboxylic acid.
28. A method for preparing the protected amino adamantane carboxylic acid of the structure which comprises treating adamantane-1-carboxylic acid with trimethylsilyl diazomethane to form adamantane-1-carboxylic acid methyl ester having the structure treating adamantane-1-carboxylic acid methyl ester with lithium aluminum hydride to 1-hydroxymethyl adamantane having the structure treating the 1-hydroxymethyl adamantane with an activated DMSO adduct formed by treating DMSO with oxalyl chloride, to form the adamantane aldehyde of the structure treating the adamantane aldehyde with potassium cyanide and (R)-(-)-phenylglycinol to form a adamantane nitrile compound of the structure treating the adamantane nitrile compound with hydrochloric acid and acetic acid to form the phenylglycine adamantane carboxylic acid salt of the structure treating the phenylglycine adamantane carboxylic acid salt with H2 to form the corresponding amino adamantane carboxylic acid salt of the structure and treating the amino adamantane carboxylic acid salt with di-tert butyl dicarbonate under argon to form the protected amino adamantane carboxylic acid of the structure
Applications Claiming Priority (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US18855500P | 2000-03-10 | 2000-03-10 | |
US60/188,555 | 2000-03-10 | ||
PCT/US2001/007151 WO2001068603A2 (en) | 2000-03-10 | 2001-03-05 | Cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl iv, processes for their preparation, and their use |
Publications (2)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
CA2402894A1 CA2402894A1 (en) | 2001-09-20 |
CA2402894C true CA2402894C (en) | 2012-04-17 |
Family
ID=22693638
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
CA2402894A Expired - Lifetime CA2402894C (en) | 2000-03-10 | 2001-03-05 | Cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase iv and method |
Country Status (37)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (2) | US6395767B2 (en) |
EP (4) | EP1261586B1 (en) |
JP (5) | JP4460205B2 (en) |
KR (2) | KR100758407B1 (en) |
CN (2) | CN1698601A (en) |
AR (1) | AR027634A1 (en) |
AT (1) | ATE396176T1 (en) |
AU (2) | AU2001245466B2 (en) |
BE (2) | BE2010C008I2 (en) |
BR (1) | BRPI0109115B8 (en) |
CA (1) | CA2402894C (en) |
CO (1) | CO5280198A1 (en) |
CY (3) | CY1108273T1 (en) |
CZ (3) | CZ307821B6 (en) |
DE (3) | DE60134122D1 (en) |
DK (1) | DK1261586T3 (en) |
EG (1) | EG25854A (en) |
ES (4) | ES2768961T3 (en) |
FR (1) | FR10C0010I2 (en) |
HK (2) | HK1049330B (en) |
HU (5) | HU230347B1 (en) |
IL (4) | IL151372A0 (en) |
LU (2) | LU91650I2 (en) |
MX (1) | MXPA02008837A (en) |
MY (1) | MY124512A (en) |
NL (1) | NL300436I1 (en) |
NO (3) | NO324227B1 (en) |
NZ (1) | NZ520821A (en) |
PE (1) | PE20020771A1 (en) |
PL (1) | PL207041B1 (en) |
PT (1) | PT1261586E (en) |
RU (1) | RU2286986C2 (en) |
SG (1) | SG152030A1 (en) |
TW (2) | TWI258468B (en) |
UY (2) | UY26613A1 (en) |
WO (1) | WO2001068603A2 (en) |
ZA (1) | ZA200206816B (en) |
Families Citing this family (310)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPH0487425A (en) * | 1990-07-31 | 1992-03-19 | Fujitsu Ltd | Circuit switching device |
US6414002B1 (en) * | 1999-09-22 | 2002-07-02 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Substituted acid derivatives useful as antidiabetic and antiobesity agents and method |
US6395767B2 (en) * | 2000-03-10 | 2002-05-28 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and method |
US7622503B2 (en) | 2000-08-24 | 2009-11-24 | University Of Tennessee Research Foundation | Selective androgen receptor modulators and methods of use thereof |
US6573287B2 (en) * | 2001-04-12 | 2003-06-03 | Bristo-Myers Squibb Company | 2,1-oxazoline and 1,2-pyrazoline-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and method |
CN1990468A (en) | 2001-06-27 | 2007-07-04 | 史密丝克莱恩比彻姆公司 | Pyrrolidines as dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
WO2003002530A2 (en) * | 2001-06-27 | 2003-01-09 | Smithkline Beecham Corporation | Pyrrolidines as dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
US7183290B2 (en) * | 2001-06-27 | 2007-02-27 | Smithkline Beecham Corporation | Fluoropyrrolidines as dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
WO2003043624A1 (en) * | 2001-11-16 | 2003-05-30 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Dual inhibitors of adipocyte fatty acid binding protein and keratinocyte fatty acid binding protein |
US8853266B2 (en) | 2001-12-06 | 2014-10-07 | University Of Tennessee Research Foundation | Selective androgen receptor modulators for treating diabetes |
US7772433B2 (en) | 2002-02-28 | 2010-08-10 | University Of Tennessee Research Foundation | SARMS and method of use thereof |
GB0205175D0 (en) | 2002-03-06 | 2002-04-17 | Astrazeneca Ab | Chemical compounds |
GB0205165D0 (en) | 2002-03-06 | 2002-04-17 | Astrazeneca Ab | Chemical compounds |
GB0205176D0 (en) | 2002-03-06 | 2002-04-17 | Astrazeneca Ab | Chemical compounds |
GB0205170D0 (en) | 2002-03-06 | 2002-04-17 | Astrazeneca Ab | Chemical compounds |
GB0205166D0 (en) | 2002-03-06 | 2002-04-17 | Astrazeneca Ab | Chemical compounds |
GB0205162D0 (en) | 2002-03-06 | 2002-04-17 | Astrazeneca Ab | Chemical compounds |
WO2003097038A1 (en) * | 2002-05-14 | 2003-11-27 | Ralph Ryback | Method for treating dermatoses and tissue damage |
US7405234B2 (en) * | 2002-05-17 | 2008-07-29 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Bicyclic modulators of androgen receptor function |
US7378385B2 (en) * | 2002-08-08 | 2008-05-27 | University Of Cincinnati | Role for GLP-1 to mediate responses to disparate stressors |
US7407955B2 (en) | 2002-08-21 | 2008-08-05 | Boehringer Ingelheim Pharma Gmbh & Co., Kg | 8-[3-amino-piperidin-1-yl]-xanthines, the preparation thereof and their use as pharmaceutical compositions |
US7262207B2 (en) | 2002-09-19 | 2007-08-28 | Abbott Laboratories | Pharmaceutical compositions as inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase-IV (DPP-IV) |
US20040121964A1 (en) * | 2002-09-19 | 2004-06-24 | Madar David J. | Pharmaceutical compositions as inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase-IV (DPP-IV) |
US7238724B2 (en) * | 2002-09-19 | 2007-07-03 | Abbott Laboratories | Pharmaceutical compositions as inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase-IV (DPP-IV) |
EP1567487A4 (en) * | 2002-11-15 | 2005-11-16 | Bristol Myers Squibb Co | Open chain prolyl urea-related modulators of androgen receptor function |
US8309603B2 (en) | 2004-06-07 | 2012-11-13 | University Of Tennessee Research Foundation | SARMs and method of use thereof |
US7420079B2 (en) * | 2002-12-09 | 2008-09-02 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Methods and compounds for producing dipeptidyl peptidase IV inhibitors and intermediates thereof |
AU2003297219A1 (en) * | 2002-12-20 | 2004-07-22 | Merck & Co., Inc. | 3-amino-4-phenylbutanoic acid derivatives as dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors for the treatment or prevention of diabetes |
US20040242568A1 (en) * | 2003-03-25 | 2004-12-02 | Syrrx, Inc. | Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
CA2524009C (en) | 2003-05-05 | 2014-04-29 | Probiodrug Ag | Use of effectors of glutaminyl and glutamate cyclases |
EP1620091B1 (en) | 2003-05-05 | 2010-03-31 | Probiodrug AG | Inhibitors of glutaminyl cyclase |
NZ572274A (en) | 2003-05-05 | 2009-06-26 | Probiodrug Ag | Use of effectors of glutaminyl and glutamate cyclases |
EP1625122A1 (en) | 2003-05-14 | 2006-02-15 | Takeda San Diego, Inc. | Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
US7459474B2 (en) | 2003-06-11 | 2008-12-02 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Modulators of the glucocorticoid receptor and method |
US6995183B2 (en) * | 2003-08-01 | 2006-02-07 | Bristol Myers Squibb Company | Adamantylglycine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and methods |
BRPI0413452A (en) * | 2003-08-13 | 2006-10-17 | Takeda Pharmaceutical | compound, pharmaceutical composition, kit, article of manufacture, and methods of inhibiting dpp-iv, therapeutic, and treating a disease state, cancer, autoimmune disorders, a condition and HIV infection |
US7169926B1 (en) | 2003-08-13 | 2007-01-30 | Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited | Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
US7678909B1 (en) | 2003-08-13 | 2010-03-16 | Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited | Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
US7205409B2 (en) * | 2003-09-04 | 2007-04-17 | Abbott Laboratories | Pharmaceutical compositions as inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase-IV (DPP-IV) |
WO2005030751A2 (en) * | 2003-09-08 | 2005-04-07 | Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited | Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
WO2005026148A1 (en) * | 2003-09-08 | 2005-03-24 | Takeda San Diego, Inc. | Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
US7371759B2 (en) * | 2003-09-25 | 2008-05-13 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors and method |
AU2004283461B2 (en) | 2003-10-15 | 2010-02-11 | Probiodrug Ag | Use of effectors of glutaminyl and glutamate cyclases |
WO2005049027A2 (en) | 2003-11-03 | 2005-06-02 | Probiodrug Ag | Combinations useful for the treatment of neuronal disorders |
KR20070054762A (en) * | 2003-11-12 | 2007-05-29 | 페노믹스 코포레이션 | Heterocyclic boronic acid compounds |
US7576121B2 (en) * | 2003-11-12 | 2009-08-18 | Phenomix Corporation | Pyrrolidine compounds and methods for selective inhibition of dipeptidyl peptidase-IV |
US7317109B2 (en) * | 2003-11-12 | 2008-01-08 | Phenomix Corporation | Pyrrolidine compounds and methods for selective inhibition of dipeptidyl peptidase-IV |
US7767828B2 (en) * | 2003-11-12 | 2010-08-03 | Phenomix Corporation | Methyl and ethyl substituted pyrrolidine compounds and methods for selective inhibition of dipeptidyl peptidase-IV |
US20070149451A1 (en) * | 2003-11-17 | 2007-06-28 | Holmes David G | Combination of a dpp IV inhibitor and an antiobesity or appetite regulating agent |
KR20060109911A (en) | 2003-11-17 | 2006-10-23 | 노파르티스 아게 | Use of dipeptidyl peptidase iv inhibitors |
US7420059B2 (en) * | 2003-11-20 | 2008-09-02 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors and method |
EP1715893B8 (en) | 2004-01-20 | 2009-12-16 | Novartis Ag | Direct compression formulation and process |
US7470810B2 (en) * | 2004-01-21 | 2008-12-30 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Alkyl and aryl-thiotrifluoroacetates and process |
WO2005073186A1 (en) * | 2004-01-29 | 2005-08-11 | Ono Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. | Pyrrolidine derivatives |
US7304086B2 (en) | 2004-02-05 | 2007-12-04 | Probiodrug Ag | Inhibitors of glutaminyl cyclase |
PL1712547T3 (en) * | 2004-02-05 | 2012-04-30 | Kyorin Seiyaku Kk | Bicycloester derivative |
US7501426B2 (en) | 2004-02-18 | 2009-03-10 | Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh | 8-[3-amino-piperidin-1-yl]-xanthines, their preparation and their use as pharmaceutical compositions |
JPWO2005077900A1 (en) * | 2004-02-18 | 2007-10-18 | 杏林製薬株式会社 | Bicycloamide derivatives |
EP1719757B1 (en) * | 2004-02-27 | 2013-10-09 | Kyorin Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. | Bicyclo derivative |
US20070238753A1 (en) * | 2004-02-27 | 2007-10-11 | Madar David J | Pharmaceutical Compositions as Inhibitors of Dipeptidyl Peptidase-IV (DPP-IV) |
US7732446B1 (en) | 2004-03-11 | 2010-06-08 | Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited | Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
CN102134231B (en) * | 2004-03-15 | 2020-08-04 | 武田药品工业株式会社 | Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
TW200534879A (en) * | 2004-03-25 | 2005-11-01 | Bristol Myers Squibb Co | Coated tablet formulation and method |
TW200538122A (en) * | 2004-03-31 | 2005-12-01 | Bristol Myers Squibb Co | Process for preparing a dipeptidyl peptidase Ⅳ inhibitor and intermediates employed therein |
US7741082B2 (en) | 2004-04-14 | 2010-06-22 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Process for preparing dipeptidyl peptidase IV inhibitors and intermediates therefor |
US7829720B2 (en) | 2004-05-04 | 2010-11-09 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Process for preparing atazanavir bisulfate and novel forms |
US20050256314A1 (en) * | 2004-05-04 | 2005-11-17 | Soojin Kim | Process employing controlled crystallization in forming crystals of a pharmaceutical |
TW200536827A (en) * | 2004-05-04 | 2005-11-16 | Bristol Myers Squibb Co | Enzymatic ammonolysis process for the preparation of intermediates for DPP IV inhibitors |
US7214702B2 (en) * | 2004-05-25 | 2007-05-08 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Process for producing a dipeptidyl peptidase IV inhibitor |
TWI354569B (en) | 2004-05-28 | 2011-12-21 | Bristol Myers Squibb Co | Coated tablet formulation and method |
WO2005118555A1 (en) * | 2004-06-04 | 2005-12-15 | Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited | Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
US9889110B2 (en) | 2004-06-07 | 2018-02-13 | University Of Tennessee Research Foundation | Selective androgen receptor modulator for treating hormone-related conditions |
US9884038B2 (en) | 2004-06-07 | 2018-02-06 | University Of Tennessee Research Foundation | Selective androgen receptor modulator and methods of use thereof |
US7572805B2 (en) | 2004-07-14 | 2009-08-11 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Pyrrolo(oxo)isoquinolines as 5HT ligands |
WO2006019965A2 (en) | 2004-07-16 | 2006-02-23 | Takeda San Diego, Inc. | Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
ATE553077T1 (en) * | 2004-07-23 | 2012-04-15 | Nuada Llc | PEPTIDATE INHIBITORS |
TW200608967A (en) | 2004-07-29 | 2006-03-16 | Sankyo Co | Pharmaceutical compositions containing with diabetic agent |
US20060035954A1 (en) * | 2004-08-11 | 2006-02-16 | Sharma Padam N | Ammonolysis process for the preparation of intermediates for DPP IV inhibitors |
AR051446A1 (en) * | 2004-09-23 | 2007-01-17 | Bristol Myers Squibb Co | C-ARYL GLUCOSIDS AS SELECTIVE INHIBITORS OF GLUCOSE CONVEYORS (SGLT2) |
DE102004054054A1 (en) | 2004-11-05 | 2006-05-11 | Boehringer Ingelheim Pharma Gmbh & Co. Kg | Process for preparing chiral 8- (3-amino-piperidin-1-yl) -xanthines |
JP2008524331A (en) * | 2004-12-21 | 2008-07-10 | 武田薬品工業株式会社 | Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitor |
US7635699B2 (en) * | 2004-12-29 | 2009-12-22 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Azolopyrimidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and methods |
US7589088B2 (en) * | 2004-12-29 | 2009-09-15 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Pyrimidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and methods |
DOP2006000008A (en) * | 2005-01-10 | 2006-08-31 | Arena Pharm Inc | COMBINED THERAPY FOR THE TREATMENT OF DIABETES AND RELATED AFFECTIONS AND FOR THE TREATMENT OF AFFECTIONS THAT IMPROVE THROUGH AN INCREASE IN THE BLOOD CONCENTRATION OF GLP-1 |
JP2008024592A (en) * | 2005-01-28 | 2008-02-07 | Taisho Pharmaceut Co Ltd | Cyanopyrrolidine derivative-containing composition for solid preparation, solid preparation containing the composition and process for producing the solid preparation |
DE602006004964D1 (en) * | 2005-02-10 | 2009-03-12 | Bristol Myers Squibb Co | DIHYDROCHINAZOLINONE AS 5HT MODULATORS |
JP2008115080A (en) * | 2005-04-22 | 2008-05-22 | Taisho Pharmaceutical Co Ltd | Combined pharmaceutical |
US7521557B2 (en) | 2005-05-20 | 2009-04-21 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Pyrrolopyridine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and methods |
US20060264433A1 (en) * | 2005-05-23 | 2006-11-23 | Backes Bradley J | Pharmaceutical compositions as inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase-IV (DPP-IV) |
US7825139B2 (en) * | 2005-05-25 | 2010-11-02 | Forest Laboratories Holdings Limited (BM) | Compounds and methods for selective inhibition of dipeptidyl peptidase-IV |
MY152185A (en) | 2005-06-10 | 2014-08-29 | Novartis Ag | Modified release 1-[(3-hydroxy-adamant-1-ylamino)-acetyl]-pyrrolidine-2(s)-carbonitrile formulation |
AU2006275694A1 (en) * | 2005-07-28 | 2007-02-08 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Substituted tetrahydro-1H-pyrido(4,3,b)indoles as serotonin receptor agonists and antagonists |
DE102005035891A1 (en) | 2005-07-30 | 2007-02-08 | Boehringer Ingelheim Pharma Gmbh & Co. Kg | 8- (3-amino-piperidin-1-yl) -xanthines, their preparation and their use as pharmaceuticals |
TW200738245A (en) * | 2005-08-22 | 2007-10-16 | Sankyo Co | Pharmaceutical composition containing FBPase inhibitor |
US7795436B2 (en) * | 2005-08-24 | 2010-09-14 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Substituted tricyclic heterocycles as serotonin receptor agonists and antagonists |
KR101388087B1 (en) | 2005-08-31 | 2014-04-25 | 유니버시티 오브 테네시 리서치 파운데이션 | Treating renal disease, burns, wounds and spinal cord injury with selective androgen receptor modulators |
PL1942898T5 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2014-10-31 | Takeda Pharmaceuticals Co | Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors for treating diabetes |
GEP20135791B (en) * | 2005-09-14 | 2013-03-25 | Takeda Pharmaceutical | Use of dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
PE20070622A1 (en) * | 2005-09-14 | 2007-08-22 | Takeda Pharmaceutical | ADMINISTRATION OF DIPEPTIDYL PEPTIDASE INHIBITORS |
US8222411B2 (en) | 2005-09-16 | 2012-07-17 | Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited | Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
TW200745079A (en) * | 2005-09-16 | 2007-12-16 | Takeda Pharmaceuticals Co | Polymorphs of benzoate salt of 2-[[6-[(3R)-3-amino-1-piperidinyl]-3,4-dihydro-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1(2H)-pyrimidinyl]methyl]-benzonitrile and methods of use therefor |
TW200745080A (en) * | 2005-09-16 | 2007-12-16 | Takeda Pharmaceuticals Co | Polymorphs of tartrate salt of 2-[2-(3-(R)-amino-piperidin-1-yl)-5-fluoro-6-oxo-6H-pyrimidin-1-ylmethyl]-benzonitrile and methods of use therefor |
TW200738266A (en) * | 2005-09-29 | 2007-10-16 | Sankyo Co | Pharmaceutical agent containing insulin resistance improving agent |
WO2007053819A2 (en) | 2005-10-31 | 2007-05-10 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Pyrrolidinyl beta-amino amide-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase iv and methods |
EP1971614A1 (en) | 2005-11-14 | 2008-09-24 | Probiodrug AG | Cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine derivatives as dipeptidyl peptidase iv inhibitors |
GB0526291D0 (en) * | 2005-12-23 | 2006-02-01 | Prosidion Ltd | Therapeutic method |
EP1995237A4 (en) * | 2006-03-08 | 2011-07-06 | Kyorin Seiyaku Kk | Method for producing aminoacetylpyrrolidinecarbonitrile derivative and production intermediate thereof |
RU2465264C2 (en) * | 2006-03-16 | 2012-10-27 | Вертекс Фармасьютикалз Инкорпорейтед | Deuterated hepatitis c protease inhibitors |
WO2007112347A1 (en) | 2006-03-28 | 2007-10-04 | Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited | Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
US20100029941A1 (en) * | 2006-03-28 | 2010-02-04 | Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited | Preparation of (r)-3-aminopiperidine dihydrochloride |
US20070238770A1 (en) * | 2006-04-05 | 2007-10-11 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Process for preparing novel crystalline forms of peliglitazar, novel stable forms produced therein and formulations |
EP2402750A1 (en) | 2006-04-11 | 2012-01-04 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Methods of using GPR119 receptor to identify compounds useful for increasing bone mass in an individual |
PE20071221A1 (en) * | 2006-04-11 | 2007-12-14 | Arena Pharm Inc | GPR119 RECEPTOR AGONISTS IN METHODS TO INCREASE BONE MASS AND TO TREAT OSTEOPOROSIS AND OTHER CONDITIONS CHARACTERIZED BY LOW BONE MASS, AND COMBINED THERAPY RELATED TO THESE AGONISTS |
EA200802054A1 (en) | 2006-04-12 | 2009-04-28 | Пробиодруг Аг | ENZYME INHIBITORS |
WO2007122744A1 (en) * | 2006-04-17 | 2007-11-01 | Sumitomo Chemical Company, Limited | Process for producing polycyclic proline derivative or acid adduct salt thereof |
PE20080251A1 (en) | 2006-05-04 | 2008-04-25 | Boehringer Ingelheim Int | USES OF DPP IV INHIBITORS |
EP1852108A1 (en) | 2006-05-04 | 2007-11-07 | Boehringer Ingelheim Pharma GmbH & Co.KG | DPP IV inhibitor formulations |
BRPI0711558A2 (en) | 2006-05-04 | 2011-11-08 | Boeringer Ingelheim Internat Gmbh | polymorphs |
US7919598B2 (en) | 2006-06-28 | 2011-04-05 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Crystal structures of SGLT2 inhibitors and processes for preparing same |
AU2007272950B2 (en) | 2006-07-12 | 2012-11-01 | University Of Tennessee Research Foundation | Substituted acylanilides and methods of use thereof |
US9730908B2 (en) | 2006-08-24 | 2017-08-15 | University Of Tennessee Research Foundation | SARMs and method of use thereof |
US9844528B2 (en) | 2006-08-24 | 2017-12-19 | University Of Tennessee Research Foundation | SARMs and method of use thereof |
NZ574710A (en) | 2006-09-07 | 2012-02-24 | Nycomed Gmbh | Combination treatment comprising the PDE4 inhibitor Compound A ((2R,4aR, 10bR)6-(2,6-Dimethoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-9-ethoxy-8-methoxy-1 ,2,3,4,4a,10b-hexahydrophenanthridin-2-ol) for diabetes mellitus |
US8324383B2 (en) | 2006-09-13 | 2012-12-04 | Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited | Methods of making polymorphs of benzoate salt of 2-[[6-[(3R)-3-amino-1-piperidinyl]-3,4-dihydro-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1(2H)-pyrimidinyl]methyl]-benzonitrile |
CL2007002634A1 (en) * | 2006-09-13 | 2008-05-16 | Smithkline Beecham Corp | USE OF A COMPOSITION THAT INCLUDES AT LEAST A POLYPEPTIDE THAT HAS A PEPTIDE-1 ACTIVITY LIKE GLUCAGON (GLP-1) AS A LONG-TERM HYPOGLUCEMIAN AGENT. |
DK2073810T3 (en) * | 2006-09-13 | 2011-10-31 | Takeda Pharmaceutical | Use of 2-6- (3-amino-piperidin-1-yl) -3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrimidin-1-ylmethyl-4-fluoro-benzonitrile in the treatment of diabetes, cancer, autoimmune diseases and HIV infection |
CA2663377A1 (en) | 2006-09-18 | 2008-03-27 | Raptor Pharmaceutical Inc. | Treatment of liver disorders by administration of receptor-associated protein (rap)-conjugates |
JP5379692B2 (en) | 2006-11-09 | 2013-12-25 | プロビオドルグ エージー | 3-Hydroxy-1,5-dihydro-pyrrol-2-one derivatives as inhibitors of glutaminyl cyclase for the treatment of ulcers, cancer and other diseases |
US8217025B2 (en) * | 2006-11-17 | 2012-07-10 | Harbor Therapeutics, Inc. | Drug screening and treatment methods |
TW200838536A (en) * | 2006-11-29 | 2008-10-01 | Takeda Pharmaceutical | Polymorphs of succinate salt of 2-[6-(3-amino-piperidin-1-yl)-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrimidin-1-ylmethy]-4-fluor-benzonitrile and methods of use therefor |
ATE554085T1 (en) | 2006-11-30 | 2012-05-15 | Probiodrug Ag | NEW INHIBITORS OF GLUTAMINYL CYCLASE |
US9623021B2 (en) | 2007-01-22 | 2017-04-18 | Gtx, Inc. | Nuclear receptor binding agents |
KR20160020584A (en) | 2007-01-22 | 2016-02-23 | 지티엑스, 인코포레이티드 | Nuclear receptor binding agents |
US9604931B2 (en) | 2007-01-22 | 2017-03-28 | Gtx, Inc. | Nuclear receptor binding agents |
CN101230058A (en) * | 2007-01-23 | 2008-07-30 | 上海恒瑞医药有限公司 | Bicycle aza alkyl derivative, preparation method and use in medicine thereof |
CA2677201C (en) | 2007-02-01 | 2015-11-17 | Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited | Solid preparation comprising alogliptin and pioglitazone |
US20110020797A1 (en) * | 2007-02-09 | 2011-01-27 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Methods For Identifying Patients With An Increased Likelihood Of Responding To DPP-IV Inhibitors |
US8093236B2 (en) | 2007-03-13 | 2012-01-10 | Takeda Pharmaceuticals Company Limited | Weekly administration of dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors |
US20080064701A1 (en) * | 2007-04-24 | 2008-03-13 | Ramesh Sesha | Anti-diabetic combinations |
JPWO2008114857A1 (en) * | 2007-03-22 | 2010-07-08 | 杏林製薬株式会社 | Process for producing aminoacetylpyrrolidinecarbonitrile derivative |
PE20090185A1 (en) | 2007-03-22 | 2009-02-28 | Bristol Myers Squibb Co | PHARMACEUTICAL FORMULATIONS CONTAINING AN SGLT2 INHIBITOR |
KR101361427B1 (en) | 2007-04-03 | 2014-02-10 | 미쓰비시 타나베 파마 코퍼레이션 | Combined use of dipeptidyl peptidase iv inhibitor compound and sweetener |
US9656991B2 (en) | 2007-04-18 | 2017-05-23 | Probiodrug Ag | Inhibitors of glutaminyl cyclase |
PE20090696A1 (en) * | 2007-04-20 | 2009-06-20 | Bristol Myers Squibb Co | CRYSTALLINE FORMS OF SAXAGLIPTIN AND PROCESSES FOR PREPARING THEM |
JP2010528023A (en) * | 2007-05-18 | 2010-08-19 | ブリストル−マイヤーズ スクイブ カンパニー | Crystal structure of SGLT2 inhibitor and method for producing the same |
CN101318925A (en) * | 2007-06-04 | 2008-12-10 | 上海恒瑞医药有限公司 | Pyrrolidine-tetratomic ring derivants, preparation method and medical uses thereof |
AU2008259342B2 (en) | 2007-06-04 | 2014-07-10 | Ben-Gurion University Of The Negev Research And Development Authority | Tri-aryl compounds and compositions comprising the same |
ATE499927T1 (en) * | 2007-06-22 | 2011-03-15 | Bristol Myers Squibb Co | TABLETED COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING ATAZANAV |
ES2449074T3 (en) * | 2007-06-22 | 2014-03-18 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Holdings Ireland | Compositions in the form of tablets containing atazanavir |
JP2010530890A (en) * | 2007-06-22 | 2010-09-16 | ブリストル−マイヤーズ スクイブ カンパニー | Tablet composition containing atazanavir |
DK2178513T3 (en) * | 2007-06-22 | 2011-07-11 | Bristol Myers Squibb Co | Tablet formulations containing atazanavir |
PE20090938A1 (en) | 2007-08-16 | 2009-08-08 | Boehringer Ingelheim Int | PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION INCLUDING A BENZENE DERIVATIVE SUBSTITUTED WITH GLUCOPYRANOSIL |
RU2569749C2 (en) * | 2007-08-17 | 2015-11-27 | Бёрингер Ингельхайм Интернациональ Гмбх | Purine derivatives applicable for treating fap-related (fibroblast activator protein) diseases |
US7968603B2 (en) | 2007-09-11 | 2011-06-28 | University Of Tennessee Research Foundation | Solid forms of selective androgen receptor modulators |
US20090076118A1 (en) * | 2007-09-13 | 2009-03-19 | Protia, Llc | Deuterium-enriched saxagliptin |
WO2009037719A1 (en) * | 2007-09-21 | 2009-03-26 | Lupin Limited | Novel compounds as dipeptidyl peptidase iv (dpp iv) inhibitors |
CL2008003653A1 (en) | 2008-01-17 | 2010-03-05 | Mitsubishi Tanabe Pharma Corp | Use of a glucopyranosyl-derived sglt inhibitor and a selected dppiv inhibitor to treat diabetes; and pharmaceutical composition. |
US8551524B2 (en) * | 2008-03-14 | 2013-10-08 | Iycus, Llc | Anti-diabetic combinations |
AR071175A1 (en) * | 2008-04-03 | 2010-06-02 | Boehringer Ingelheim Int | PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION THAT INCLUDES AN INHIBITOR OF DIPEPTIDIL-PEPTIDASA-4 (DPP4) AND A COMPARING PHARMACO |
EP2108960A1 (en) | 2008-04-07 | 2009-10-14 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Methods of using A G protein-coupled receptor to identify peptide YY (PYY) secretagogues and compounds useful in the treatment of conditons modulated by PYY |
WO2009140685A2 (en) * | 2008-05-16 | 2009-11-19 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Methods for identifying subjects with an increased likelihood of responding to dpp-iv inhibitors |
PE20100156A1 (en) * | 2008-06-03 | 2010-02-23 | Boehringer Ingelheim Int | NAFLD TREATMENT |
WO2009155481A1 (en) | 2008-06-20 | 2009-12-23 | Gtx, Inc. | Metabolites of selective androgen receptor modulators and methods of use thereof |
UY32030A (en) | 2008-08-06 | 2010-03-26 | Boehringer Ingelheim Int | "TREATMENT FOR DIABETES IN INAPPROPRIATE PATIENTS FOR THERAPY WITH METFORMIN" |
KR20190016601A (en) | 2008-08-06 | 2019-02-18 | 베링거 인겔하임 인터내셔날 게엠베하 | Treatment for diabetes in patients inappropriate for metformin therapy |
CA2732984A1 (en) * | 2008-08-07 | 2010-02-11 | Kyorin Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. | Process for production of bicyclo[2.2.2]octylamine derivative |
RU2011108420A (en) * | 2008-08-14 | 2012-09-20 | Киорин Фармасьютикал Ко., Лтд. (Jp) | STABILIZED PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION |
AU2009281122C1 (en) * | 2008-08-15 | 2016-04-21 | Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh | Purin derivatives for use in the treatment of fab-related diseases |
EP2344195A2 (en) | 2008-09-10 | 2011-07-20 | Boehringer Ingelheim International GmbH | Combination therapy for the treatment of diabetes and related conditions |
US20200155558A1 (en) | 2018-11-20 | 2020-05-21 | Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh | Treatment for diabetes in patients with insufficient glycemic control despite therapy with an oral antidiabetic drug |
NZ592283A (en) | 2008-10-17 | 2012-09-28 | Sanofi Aventis Deutschland | Combination of an insulin and the GLP-1 agonist AVE0010 |
EP2344519B1 (en) | 2008-11-07 | 2016-09-28 | The General Hospital Corporation | C-terminal fragments of glucagon-like peptide-1 (glp-1) |
WO2010059639A2 (en) * | 2008-11-19 | 2010-05-27 | Auspex Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Hydroxyadamantyl inhibitors of dipeptidylpeptidase iv |
US20100144140A1 (en) * | 2008-12-10 | 2010-06-10 | Novellus Systems, Inc. | Methods for depositing tungsten films having low resistivity for gapfill applications |
DE102008062136B4 (en) | 2008-12-16 | 2012-05-03 | Kamamed Ug | Pharmaceutical composition based on peptide of camel milk |
JP2012512848A (en) | 2008-12-23 | 2012-06-07 | ベーリンガー インゲルハイム インターナショナル ゲゼルシャフト ミット ベシュレンクテル ハフツング | Salt forms of organic compounds |
TW201036975A (en) | 2009-01-07 | 2010-10-16 | Boehringer Ingelheim Int | Treatment for diabetes in patients with inadequate glycemic control despite metformin therapy |
US8706650B2 (en) * | 2009-01-14 | 2014-04-22 | Integral Analytics, Inc. | Optimization of microgrid energy use and distribution |
AR075204A1 (en) | 2009-01-29 | 2011-03-16 | Boehringer Ingelheim Int | DPP-4 INHIBITORS AND PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS THAT INCLUDE THEM, USEFUL TO TREAT METABOLIC DISEASES IN PEDIATRIC PATIENTS, PARTICULARLY MELLITUS DIABETES TYPE 2 |
JP2012517977A (en) | 2009-02-13 | 2012-08-09 | ベーリンガー インゲルハイム インターナショナル ゲゼルシャフト ミット ベシュレンクテル ハフツング | An anti-diabetic drug comprising a DPP-4 inhibitor (linagliptin) optionally in combination with other anti-diabetic drugs |
ES2797503T3 (en) | 2009-02-13 | 2020-12-02 | Boehringer Ingelheim Int | Pharmaceutical composition comprising an SGLT2 inhibitor, a DPP-IV inhibitor and optionally an additional antidiabetic agent and their uses |
BRPI1013500A2 (en) * | 2009-03-27 | 2016-04-05 | Astrazeneca Uk Ltd | methods to prevent major adverse cardiovascular events with dpp-iv inhibitors |
KR20120003906A (en) | 2009-03-27 | 2012-01-11 | 교린 세이야꾸 가부시키 가이샤 | Matrix-type sustained release preparation containing basic additive |
KR101292379B1 (en) * | 2009-04-08 | 2013-08-09 | 브리스톨-마이어스 스큅 컴퍼니 | A genetically stable plasmid expressing pdh and fdh enzymes |
KR20120006047A (en) * | 2009-04-09 | 2012-01-17 | 산도즈 아게 | Crystal forms of saxagliptin |
US8748457B2 (en) | 2009-06-18 | 2014-06-10 | Lupin Limited | 2-amino-2- [8-(dimethyl carbamoyl)- 8-aza- bicyclo [3.2.1] oct-3-yl]-exo- ethanoyl derivatives as potent DPP-IV inhibitors |
AR077642A1 (en) | 2009-07-09 | 2011-09-14 | Arena Pharm Inc | METABOLISM MODULATORS AND THE TREATMENT OF DISORDERS RELATED TO THE SAME |
EP2475428B1 (en) | 2009-09-11 | 2015-07-01 | Probiodrug AG | Heterocylcic derivatives as inhibitors of glutaminyl cyclase |
EP2308847B1 (en) | 2009-10-09 | 2014-04-02 | EMC microcollections GmbH | Substituted pyridines as inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and their application for the treatment of diabetes and related diseases |
MX2012005186A (en) | 2009-11-13 | 2012-06-08 | Sanofi Aventis Deutschland | Pharmaceutical composition comprising a glp-1 agonist, an insulin, and methionine. |
MX2012005184A (en) | 2009-11-13 | 2012-06-08 | Sanofi Aventis Deutschland | Pharmaceutical composition comprising a glp-1 agonist and methionine. |
MX2012005365A (en) | 2009-11-13 | 2012-05-29 | Bristol Myers Squibb Co | Immediate release tablet formulations. |
HUE040486T2 (en) | 2009-11-13 | 2019-03-28 | Astrazeneca Ab | Bilayer tablet formulations |
KR20210033559A (en) | 2009-11-27 | 2021-03-26 | 베링거 인겔하임 인터내셔날 게엠베하 | Treatment of genotyped diabetic patients with dpp-iv inhibitors such as linagliptin |
TWI562775B (en) | 2010-03-02 | 2016-12-21 | Lexicon Pharmaceuticals Inc | Methods of using inhibitors of sodium-glucose cotransporters 1 and 2 |
JP6026284B2 (en) | 2010-03-03 | 2016-11-16 | プロビオドルグ エージー | Inhibitors of glutaminyl cyclase |
JP5688745B2 (en) | 2010-03-10 | 2015-03-25 | プロビオドルグ エージー | Heterocyclic inhibitor of glutaminyl cyclase (QC, EC 2.3.2.5) |
EP2547339A1 (en) | 2010-03-18 | 2013-01-23 | Boehringer Ingelheim International GmbH | Combination of a gpr119 agonist and the dpp-iv inhibitor linagliptin for use in the treatment of diabetes and related conditions |
EP2368874A1 (en) | 2010-03-26 | 2011-09-28 | Sandoz AG | Racemisation of (R)-N-Boc-3-hydroxyadamant-1-yl glycine |
CA2795514A1 (en) * | 2010-04-05 | 2011-10-13 | Cadila Pharmaceuticals Limited | Novel hypoglycemic compounds |
WO2011127051A1 (en) | 2010-04-06 | 2011-10-13 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of the gpr119 receptor and the treatment of disorders related thereto |
US8541596B2 (en) | 2010-04-21 | 2013-09-24 | Probiodrug Ag | Inhibitors |
US9186392B2 (en) | 2010-05-05 | 2015-11-17 | Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh | Combination therapy |
KR20130038258A (en) | 2010-05-05 | 2013-04-17 | 아시아 케미컬 인더스트리스 리미티드 | Saxagliptin intermediates, saxagliptin polymorphs, and processes for preparation thereof |
CA2803504C (en) | 2010-06-24 | 2022-08-30 | Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh | A combination for diabetes therapy comprising linagliptin and a long-acting insulin |
EP2601175A1 (en) | 2010-08-06 | 2013-06-12 | Sandoz AG | A novel crystalline compound comprising saxagliptin and phosphoric acid |
WO2012017029A1 (en) | 2010-08-06 | 2012-02-09 | Sandoz Ag | Novel salts of saxagrliptin with organic di-acids |
JP6199186B2 (en) | 2010-08-30 | 2017-09-20 | サノフィ−アベンティス・ドイチュラント・ゲゼルシャフト・ミット・ベシュレンクテル・ハフツング | Use of AVE0010 for the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of type 2 diabetes |
EP2611442B1 (en) | 2010-09-03 | 2018-07-04 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Drug formulations using water soluble antioxidants |
WO2012028721A1 (en) | 2010-09-03 | 2012-03-08 | Sandoz Ag | PROCESS FOR THE REDUCTIVE AMINATION OF α-KETO CARBOXYLIC ACIDS |
US9616097B2 (en) | 2010-09-15 | 2017-04-11 | Synergy Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Formulations of guanylate cyclase C agonists and methods of use |
AU2011305525B2 (en) | 2010-09-22 | 2016-08-18 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of the GPR119 receptor and the treatment of disorders related thereto |
US20120077778A1 (en) | 2010-09-29 | 2012-03-29 | Andrea Bourdelais | Ladder-Frame Polyether Conjugates |
US8410288B2 (en) | 2010-10-04 | 2013-04-02 | Teva Pharmaceutical Industries Ltd. | Polymorphs of Saxagliptin hydrochloride and processes for preparing them |
WO2012061466A2 (en) | 2010-11-02 | 2012-05-10 | The General Hospital Corporation | Methods for treating steatotic disease |
AR083878A1 (en) | 2010-11-15 | 2013-03-27 | Boehringer Ingelheim Int | VASOPROTECTORA AND CARDIOPROTECTORA ANTIDIABETIC THERAPY, LINAGLIPTINA, TREATMENT METHOD |
TWI631963B (en) | 2011-01-05 | 2018-08-11 | 雷西肯製藥股份有限公司 | Compositions comprising and methods of using inhibitors of sodium-glucose cotransporters 1 and 2 |
US10017470B2 (en) | 2011-01-31 | 2018-07-10 | Cadila Healthcare Limited | Treatment for lipodystrophy |
ES2801725T3 (en) | 2011-02-01 | 2021-01-12 | Bristol Myers Squibb Co | Pharmaceutical formulations that include an amine compound |
WO2012123563A1 (en) | 2011-03-16 | 2012-09-20 | Probiodrug Ag | Benz imidazole derivatives as inhibitors of glutaminyl cyclase |
US20140018371A1 (en) | 2011-04-01 | 2014-01-16 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators Of The GPR119 Receptor And The Treatment Of Disorders Related Thereto |
WO2012145361A1 (en) | 2011-04-19 | 2012-10-26 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of the gpr119 receptor and the treatment of disorders related thereto |
US20140038889A1 (en) | 2011-04-22 | 2014-02-06 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators Of The GPR119 Receptor And The Treatment Of Disorders Related Thereto |
WO2012145604A1 (en) | 2011-04-22 | 2012-10-26 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of the gpr119 receptor and the treatment of disorders related thereto |
US9821032B2 (en) | 2011-05-13 | 2017-11-21 | Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh | Pharmaceutical combination for improving glycemic control as add-on therapy to basal insulin |
WO2012170702A1 (en) | 2011-06-08 | 2012-12-13 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of the gpr119 receptor and the treatment of disorders related thereto |
WO2013006692A2 (en) | 2011-07-06 | 2013-01-10 | The General Hospital Corporation | Methods of treatment using a pentapeptide derived from the c-terminus of glucagon-like peptide 1 (glp-1) |
CA2841552C (en) | 2011-07-15 | 2020-06-23 | Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh | Substituted quinazolines, the preparation thereof and the use thereof in pharmaceutical compositions |
SI2750699T1 (en) | 2011-08-29 | 2015-11-30 | Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh | Pharmaceutical combination for use in glycemic control in diabetes type 2 patients |
TWI559929B (en) | 2011-09-01 | 2016-12-01 | Sanofi Aventis Deutschland | Pharmaceutical composition for use in the treatment of a neurodegenerative disease |
EP2753328A1 (en) | 2011-09-07 | 2014-07-16 | Sanovel Ilac Sanayi Ve Ticaret Anonim Sirketi | Dpp-iv inhibitor formulations |
PL2578208T3 (en) | 2011-10-06 | 2014-10-31 | Sanovel Ilac Sanayi Ve Ticaret As | DPP-IV inhibitor solid dosage formulations |
WO2013055910A1 (en) | 2011-10-12 | 2013-04-18 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of the gpr119 receptor and the treatment of disorders related thereto |
JPWO2013081100A1 (en) * | 2011-11-30 | 2015-04-27 | 積水メディカル株式会社 | Adamantyl hydantoin compounds |
US9115082B2 (en) | 2012-01-18 | 2015-08-25 | Catherine Yang | Dipeptidyl-peptidase-IV inhibitors for treatment of type 2 diabetes complex with hypertension |
US9555001B2 (en) | 2012-03-07 | 2017-01-31 | Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh | Pharmaceutical composition and uses thereof |
US20150087686A1 (en) | 2012-04-25 | 2015-03-26 | Enantia, S.L. | Crystalline forms of saxagliptin |
EP2849755A1 (en) | 2012-05-14 | 2015-03-25 | Boehringer Ingelheim International GmbH | A xanthine derivative as dpp -4 inhibitor for use in the treatment of podocytes related disorders and/or nephrotic syndrome |
US8664443B2 (en) | 2012-05-23 | 2014-03-04 | Divi's Laboratories Ltd. | Process for the preparation of (1S, 3S, 5S)-2-[2(S)-2-amino-2-(3-hydroxy-1-adamantan-1-yl) acetyl]-2-azabicyclo [3.1.0] hexane-3-carbonitrile |
EP2861560B1 (en) | 2012-05-24 | 2018-08-08 | Apotex Inc. | Salts of saxagliptin with organic acids |
WO2013174767A1 (en) | 2012-05-24 | 2013-11-28 | Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh | A xanthine derivative as dpp -4 inhibitor for use in modifying food intake and regulating food preference |
AU2013285078A1 (en) | 2012-07-02 | 2015-01-29 | Sun Pharmaceutical Industries Limited | Saxagliptin salts |
CN103539724B (en) * | 2012-07-12 | 2017-09-26 | 博瑞生物医药(苏州)股份有限公司 | The novel crystal forms and purification process of BMS-477118 single stereoisomers |
US9969683B2 (en) | 2012-07-13 | 2018-05-15 | Gtx, Inc. | Method of treating estrogen receptor (ER)-positive breast cancers with selective androgen receptor modulator (SARMS) |
US10258596B2 (en) | 2012-07-13 | 2019-04-16 | Gtx, Inc. | Method of treating HER2-positive breast cancers with selective androgen receptor modulators (SARMS) |
US10314807B2 (en) | 2012-07-13 | 2019-06-11 | Gtx, Inc. | Method of treating HER2-positive breast cancers with selective androgen receptor modulators (SARMS) |
CA2879049C (en) | 2012-07-13 | 2021-02-23 | Gtx, Inc. | A method of treating androgen receptor (ar)-positive breast cancers with selective androgen receptor modulator (sarms) |
US9744149B2 (en) | 2012-07-13 | 2017-08-29 | Gtx, Inc. | Method of treating androgen receptor (AR)-positive breast cancers with selective androgen receptor modulator (SARMs) |
US9622992B2 (en) | 2012-07-13 | 2017-04-18 | Gtx, Inc. | Method of treating androgen receptor (AR)-positive breast cancers with selective androgen receptor modulator (SARMs) |
US10987334B2 (en) | 2012-07-13 | 2021-04-27 | University Of Tennessee Research Foundation | Method of treating ER mutant expressing breast cancers with selective androgen receptor modulators (SARMs) |
WO2014030051A1 (en) | 2012-08-23 | 2014-02-27 | Aurobindo Pharma Limited | Stable pharmaceutical compositions comprising saxagliptin |
WO2014057495A1 (en) | 2012-10-11 | 2014-04-17 | Lee Pharma Limited | A process for industrial preparation of [(s)-n-tert butoxycarbonyl-3-hydroxy]adamantylglycine |
TWI500613B (en) | 2012-10-17 | 2015-09-21 | Cadila Healthcare Ltd | Novel heterocyclic compounds |
WO2014074668A1 (en) | 2012-11-08 | 2014-05-15 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Modulators of gpr119 and the treatment of disorders related thereto |
EP2925735B1 (en) | 2012-11-20 | 2019-03-13 | Lexicon Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Inhibitors of sodium glucose cotransporter 1 |
US20150250734A1 (en) | 2012-12-21 | 2015-09-10 | Wockhardt Limited | Stable pharmaceutical compositions of saxagliptin or salts thereof |
WO2014096983A1 (en) | 2012-12-21 | 2014-06-26 | Wockhardt Limited | Stable pharmaceutical compositions of saxagliptin or salts thereof |
WO2014108830A1 (en) | 2013-01-10 | 2014-07-17 | Wockhardt Limited | A process for preparing pharmaceutically acceptable salt of saxagliptin |
ITMI20130132A1 (en) * | 2013-01-30 | 2014-07-31 | Laboratorio Chimico Int Spa | PROCEDURE FOR THE PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATES OF SAXAGLIPTINA SYNTHESIS AND NEW COMPOUNDS |
TWI780236B (en) | 2013-02-04 | 2022-10-11 | 法商賽諾菲公司 | Stabilized pharmaceutical formulations of insulin analogues and/or insulin derivatives |
US8652527B1 (en) | 2013-03-13 | 2014-02-18 | Upsher-Smith Laboratories, Inc | Extended-release topiramate capsules |
US9101545B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2015-08-11 | Upsher-Smith Laboratories, Inc. | Extended-release topiramate capsules |
CN104059068B (en) * | 2013-03-20 | 2017-02-08 | 中国科学院上海药物研究所 | Beta-amino-carbonyl compound, preparation method, its pharmaceutical composition and application thereof |
CN104098481B (en) * | 2013-04-10 | 2016-05-11 | 浙江九洲药物科技有限公司 | A kind of preparation method of BMS-477118 intermediate |
MA38385A1 (en) | 2013-04-22 | 2017-09-29 | Cadila Healthcare Ltd | New composition for non-alcoholic fatty liver disease (nafld) |
WO2014193528A1 (en) * | 2013-04-29 | 2014-12-04 | Anovel Pharmaceuticals, Llc | Amorphous dosage forms and methods |
EP3004053B1 (en) | 2013-05-30 | 2021-03-24 | Cadila Healthcare Limited | A process for preparation of pyrroles having hypolipidemic hypocholesteremic activities |
CA2913737A1 (en) | 2013-06-05 | 2014-12-11 | Synergy Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Ultra-pure agonists of guanylate cyclase c, method of making and using same |
TW201513857A (en) | 2013-07-05 | 2015-04-16 | Cadila Healthcare Ltd | Synergistic compositions |
IN2013MU02470A (en) | 2013-07-25 | 2015-06-26 | Cadila Healthcare Ltd | |
EP2832723B1 (en) | 2013-07-29 | 2017-02-15 | Zentiva, a.s. | Stabilised amorphous forms of Saxagliptin |
US9416105B2 (en) | 2013-08-28 | 2016-08-16 | Amneal Pharmaceuticals Llc | Process for preparation of saxagliptin and its hydrochloride salt |
IN2013MU02905A (en) | 2013-09-06 | 2015-07-03 | Cadila Healthcare Ltd | |
ITMI20131677A1 (en) * | 2013-10-10 | 2015-04-11 | Olon Spa | PROCEDURE FOR THE PREPARATION OF SAXAGLIPTINA |
CN106061940A (en) | 2013-11-05 | 2016-10-26 | 本古里安大学内盖夫研究发展局 | Compounds for the treatment of diabetes and disease complications arising from same |
WO2015067223A1 (en) | 2013-11-06 | 2015-05-14 | Zentiva, K., S. | L-tartrate salt of (1s,3s,5s)-2-[(2s)-2-amino-2-(3-hydroxytricyclo[3.3.1.13,7]dec-1-yl) acetyl]-2-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carbonitrile and process for preparation thereof |
WO2015071889A1 (en) | 2013-11-18 | 2015-05-21 | Ranbaxy Laboratories Limited | Oral compositions of saxagliptin |
WO2015071887A1 (en) | 2013-11-18 | 2015-05-21 | Ranbaxy Laboratories Limited | Oral pharmaceutical compositions of saxagliptin |
WO2015087262A1 (en) | 2013-12-11 | 2015-06-18 | Ranbaxy Laboratories Limited | Process for the preparation of saxagliptin and its intermediates |
US9895424B2 (en) | 2014-01-09 | 2018-02-20 | Sanofi | Stabilized pharmaceutical formulations of insulin analogues and/or insulin derivatives |
EP3091995B1 (en) | 2014-01-09 | 2024-03-20 | Sanofi | Stabilized pharmaceutical formulations of insulin aspart |
CN114939156A (en) | 2014-01-09 | 2022-08-26 | 赛诺菲 | Stabilized pharmaceutical formulations of insulin aspart |
ES2950384T3 (en) | 2014-02-28 | 2023-10-09 | Boehringer Ingelheim Int | Medical use of a DPP-4 inhibitor |
CZ2014177A3 (en) | 2014-03-24 | 2015-10-07 | Zentiva, K.S. | Process for preparing saxagliptin |
CA2950390C (en) | 2014-05-30 | 2020-09-22 | Pfizer Inc. | Carbonitrile derivatives as selective androgen receptor modulators |
WO2016016770A1 (en) | 2014-07-26 | 2016-02-04 | Wockhardt Limited | A novel modified release pharmaceutical composition of sitagliptin or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof |
GB201415598D0 (en) | 2014-09-03 | 2014-10-15 | Univ Birmingham | Elavated Itercranial Pressure Treatment |
JP6970615B2 (en) | 2014-12-12 | 2021-11-24 | サノフィ−アベンティス・ドイチュラント・ゲゼルシャフト・ミット・ベシュレンクテル・ハフツング | Insulin glargine / lixisenatide fixed ratio prescription |
CN104557667A (en) * | 2014-12-12 | 2015-04-29 | 山东省药学科学院 | 2-cyano pyrrolidine compound, and preparation method and application thereof |
EA201791982A1 (en) | 2015-03-09 | 2020-02-17 | Интекрин Терапьютикс, Инк. | METHODS FOR TREATING A NON-ALCOHOLIC FAT LIVER DISEASE AND / OR LIPODYSTROPHY |
TWI748945B (en) | 2015-03-13 | 2021-12-11 | 德商賽諾菲阿凡提斯德意志有限公司 | Treatment type 2 diabetes mellitus patients |
TW201705975A (en) | 2015-03-18 | 2017-02-16 | 賽諾菲阿凡提斯德意志有限公司 | Treatment of type 2 diabetes mellitus patients |
CN105037245B (en) * | 2015-08-03 | 2017-04-12 | 沧州那瑞化学科技有限公司 | Saxagliptin midbody preparing method |
WO2017064635A2 (en) | 2015-10-14 | 2017-04-20 | Cadila Healthcare Limited | Pyrrole compound, compositions and process for preparation thereof |
KR101715682B1 (en) | 2015-10-29 | 2017-03-13 | 경동제약 주식회사 | Novel intermediates for preparing saxagliptin, preparing methods thereof and preparing methods of saxagliptin using the same |
CA3022202A1 (en) | 2016-06-10 | 2017-12-14 | Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh | Combinations of linagliptin and metformin |
WO2018104916A1 (en) | 2016-12-09 | 2018-06-14 | Cadila Healthcare Limited | Treatment for primary biliary cholangitis |
WO2018162722A1 (en) | 2017-03-09 | 2018-09-13 | Deutsches Institut Für Ernährungsforschung Potsdam-Rehbrücke | Dpp-4 inhibitors for use in treating bone fractures |
CA3058806A1 (en) | 2017-04-03 | 2018-10-11 | Coherus Biosciences Inc. | Ppar.gamma. agonist for treatment of progressive supranuclear palsy |
ES2812698T3 (en) | 2017-09-29 | 2021-03-18 | Probiodrug Ag | Glutaminyl cyclase inhibitors |
CN109970620B (en) * | 2017-12-27 | 2022-07-12 | 江苏威凯尔医药科技有限公司 | Method for preparing saxagliptin intermediate |
CN112567468A (en) * | 2018-06-14 | 2021-03-26 | 阿斯利康(英国)有限公司 | Method for lowering blood glucose using dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor pharmaceutical composition |
CN112512530A (en) | 2018-07-19 | 2021-03-16 | 阿斯利康(瑞典)有限公司 | Methods of treating HFpEF using dapagliflozin and compositions comprising dapagliflozin |
CA3113037A1 (en) | 2018-09-26 | 2020-04-02 | Lexicon Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Crystalline forms of n-(1-((2-(dimethylamino)ethyl)amino)-2-methyl-1-oopropan-2-yl)-4-(4-(2-methyl-5-(2s,3r,4r,5s,6r)-3,4,5-trihydroxy-6-(methylthio)tetrahydro-2h-pyran-2-yl)benzyl)phenl)butanamide and methods of their synthesis |
RU2712097C1 (en) * | 2018-09-28 | 2020-01-24 | Общество с ограниченной ответственностью "Необиотек" | Dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor for treating type 2 diabetes mellitus, compounds (versions) |
RU2727898C1 (en) * | 2020-02-25 | 2020-07-24 | Общество с ограниченной ответственностью «Необиотек» | Pharmaceutical composition based on an active substance, an inhibitor of dipeptidyl peptidase-4, for preventing the development and treatment of type 2 diabetes mellitus |
TW202220672A (en) | 2020-07-27 | 2022-06-01 | 瑞典商阿斯特捷利康公司 | Methods of treating chronic kidney disease with dapagliflozin |
WO2023275715A1 (en) | 2021-06-30 | 2023-01-05 | Pfizer Inc. | Metabolites of selective androgen receptor modulators |
CN113666846B (en) * | 2021-08-31 | 2023-06-27 | 济南立德医药技术有限公司 | Synthesis method of saxagliptin intermediate |
WO2023144722A1 (en) | 2022-01-26 | 2023-08-03 | Astrazeneca Ab | Dapagliflozin for use in the treatment of prediabetes or reducing the risk of developing type 2 diabetes |
Family Cites Families (89)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US3325478A (en) * | 1964-11-17 | 1967-06-13 | Du Pont | alpha-amino-1-adamantylmethyl penicillins |
US3674836A (en) | 1968-05-21 | 1972-07-04 | Parke Davis & Co | 2,2-dimethyl-{11 -aryloxy-alkanoic acids and salts and esters thereof |
US4027009A (en) | 1973-06-11 | 1977-05-31 | Merck & Co., Inc. | Compositions and methods for depressing blood serum cholesterol |
JPS5246949B2 (en) | 1973-10-19 | 1977-11-29 | ||
YU36151B (en) * | 1974-05-16 | 1982-02-25 | Pliva Zagreb | Process for preparing alpha-amino-2-adamantyl acetic acid |
JPS5612114B2 (en) | 1974-06-07 | 1981-03-18 | ||
US4183857A (en) | 1978-07-06 | 1980-01-15 | Shell Oil Company | 3-Benzyl-3-azabicyclo(3.1.0)hexane-2,4-dione |
NO154918C (en) | 1977-08-27 | 1987-01-14 | Bayer Ag | ANALOGUE PROCEDURE FOR THE PREPARATION OF THERAPEUTIC ACTIVE DERIVATIVES OF 3,4,5-TRIHYDROXYPIPERIDINE. |
CA1117127A (en) | 1978-06-27 | 1982-01-26 | Janet A. Day | Derivatives of 3-azabicyclo(3.1.0)hexane and a process for their preparation |
US4231938A (en) | 1979-06-15 | 1980-11-04 | Merck & Co., Inc. | Hypocholesteremic fermentation products and process of preparation |
DE2951135A1 (en) | 1979-12-19 | 1981-06-25 | Hoechst Ag, 6230 Frankfurt | SULFONYL UREAS, METHOD FOR THE PRODUCTION THEREOF, PHARMACEUTICAL PREPARATIONS BASED ON THESE COMPOUNDS AND THEIR USE |
DK149080C (en) | 1980-06-06 | 1986-07-28 | Sankyo Co | METHOD FOR PREPARING ML-236B CARBOXYLIC ACID DERIVATIVES |
US4450171A (en) | 1980-08-05 | 1984-05-22 | Merck & Co., Inc. | Antihypercholesterolemic compounds |
US4448784A (en) | 1982-04-12 | 1984-05-15 | Hoechst-Roussel Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | 1-(Aminoalkylphenyl and aminoalkylbenzyl)-indoles and indolines and analgesic method of use thereof |
US5354772A (en) | 1982-11-22 | 1994-10-11 | Sandoz Pharm. Corp. | Indole analogs of mevalonolactone and derivatives thereof |
DE3324263A1 (en) | 1983-07-06 | 1985-01-17 | Hoechst Ag, 6230 Frankfurt | DERIVATIVES OF 2-AZABICYCLO (3.1.0) HEXAN-3-CARBONIC ACID, METHOD FOR THE PRODUCTION THEREOF, THEIR SUBSTANCES AND THE USE THEREOF, AND 2-AZABICYCLO (3.1.0) HEXANE DERIVATIVES AS INTERMEDIATE PRODUCTS AND PROCESS PRODUCTS |
JPS6051189A (en) | 1983-08-30 | 1985-03-22 | Sankyo Co Ltd | Thiazolidine derivative and its preparation |
DE3536687A1 (en) | 1985-10-15 | 1987-04-16 | Hoechst Ag | METHOD FOR TREATING ATHEROSCLEROSIS, THROMBOSIS AND PERIPHERAL VESSEL DISEASE |
DE3543999A1 (en) | 1985-12-13 | 1987-06-19 | Bayer Ag | HIGH PURITY ACARBOSE |
US5614492A (en) | 1986-05-05 | 1997-03-25 | The General Hospital Corporation | Insulinotropic hormone GLP-1 (7-36) and uses thereof |
US4681893A (en) | 1986-05-30 | 1987-07-21 | Warner-Lambert Company | Trans-6-[2-(3- or 4-carboxamido-substituted pyrrol-1-yl)alkyl]-4-hydroxypyran-2-one inhibitors of cholesterol synthesis |
US4759923A (en) | 1987-06-25 | 1988-07-26 | Hercules Incorporated | Process for lowering serum cholesterol using poly(diallylmethylamine) derivatives |
JP2569746B2 (en) | 1987-08-20 | 1997-01-08 | 日産化学工業株式会社 | Quinoline mevalonolactones |
US4924024A (en) | 1988-01-11 | 1990-05-08 | E. R. Squibb & Sons, Inc. | Phosphorus-containing squalene synthetase inhibitors, new intermediates and method |
US4871721A (en) | 1988-01-11 | 1989-10-03 | E. R. Squibb & Sons, Inc. | Phosphorus-containing squalene synthetase inhibitors |
NO177005C (en) | 1988-01-20 | 1995-07-05 | Bayer Ag | Analogous process for the preparation of substituted pyridines, as well as intermediates for use in the preparation |
FI94339C (en) | 1989-07-21 | 1995-08-25 | Warner Lambert Co | Process for the preparation of pharmaceutically acceptable [R- (R *, R *)] - 2- (4-fluorophenyl) -, - dihydroxy-5- (1-methylethyl) -3-phenyl-4 - [(phenylamino) carbonyl] -1H- for the preparation of pyrrole-1-heptanoic acid and its pharmaceutically acceptable salts |
DE3926606A1 (en) | 1989-08-11 | 1991-02-14 | Hoechst Ag | METHOD FOR THE TREATMENT OF CARDIALS AND VASCULAR HYPERTROPHY AND HYPERPLASIA |
US5462928A (en) | 1990-04-14 | 1995-10-31 | New England Medical Center Hospitals, Inc. | Inhibitors of dipeptidyl-aminopeptidase type IV |
US5177080A (en) | 1990-12-14 | 1993-01-05 | Bayer Aktiengesellschaft | Substituted pyridyl-dihydroxy-heptenoic acid and its salts |
JP2648897B2 (en) | 1991-07-01 | 1997-09-03 | 塩野義製薬株式会社 | Pyrimidine derivatives |
DK0610317T3 (en) | 1991-10-22 | 2001-02-19 | New England Medical Center Inc | Inhibitors of dipeptidyl aminopeptidase type IV |
US5595872A (en) | 1992-03-06 | 1997-01-21 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Nucleic acids encoding microsomal trigyceride transfer protein |
DK36392D0 (en) | 1992-03-19 | 1992-03-19 | Novo Nordisk As | USE OF CHEMICAL COMPOUND |
US5447954A (en) | 1992-05-05 | 1995-09-05 | Smithkline Beecham P.L.C. | Phenylderivate as inhibitors of ATP citrate lyase |
US5712396A (en) | 1992-10-28 | 1998-01-27 | Magnin; David R. | α-phosphonosulfonate squalene synthetase inhibitors |
US5594016A (en) | 1992-12-28 | 1997-01-14 | Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation | Naphthalene derivatives |
CA2150372C (en) | 1993-01-19 | 2002-08-20 | Nancy L. Mills | Stable oral ci-981 formulation and process of preparing same |
US5346701A (en) | 1993-02-22 | 1994-09-13 | Theratech, Inc. | Transmucosal delivery of macromolecular drugs |
US5739135A (en) | 1993-09-03 | 1998-04-14 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Inhibitors of microsomal triglyceride transfer protein and method |
IL111785A0 (en) | 1993-12-03 | 1995-01-24 | Ferring Bv | Dp-iv inhibitors and pharmaceutical compositions containing them |
US5776983A (en) | 1993-12-21 | 1998-07-07 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Catecholamine surrogates useful as β3 agonists |
US5488064A (en) | 1994-05-02 | 1996-01-30 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Benzo 1,3 dioxole derivatives |
US5385929A (en) | 1994-05-04 | 1995-01-31 | Warner-Lambert Company | [(Hydroxyphenylamino) carbonyl] pyrroles |
US5561146A (en) | 1994-06-10 | 1996-10-01 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Modified guanidino and amidino thrombin inhibitors |
US5491134A (en) | 1994-09-16 | 1996-02-13 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Sulfonic, phosphonic or phosphiniic acid β3 agonist derivatives |
US5541204A (en) | 1994-12-02 | 1996-07-30 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Aryloxypropanolamine β 3 adrenergic agonists |
US5620997A (en) | 1995-05-31 | 1997-04-15 | Warner-Lambert Company | Isothiazolones |
DK0832065T3 (en) | 1995-06-06 | 2001-11-19 | Pfizer | Substituted N- (indole-2-carbonyl) glycinamides and derivatives as glycogen phosphorylase inhibitors |
AP9600817A0 (en) | 1995-06-06 | 1996-07-31 | Pfizer | Novel cryatal form of anhydrous 7-( [1A,5A,6A]-6-amino3-3-azabicyclo [3.1.0.] hex-3-yl) -6-fluro-1-(2,4-difluorophenyl)-1,4-dihydro-4-oxo-1, 8-naphthyridine-3-carboxylic acid, methanesulfonic acid salt. |
AU6966696A (en) | 1995-10-05 | 1997-04-28 | Warner-Lambert Company | Method for treating and preventing inflammation and atherosclerosis |
PL328095A1 (en) | 1995-10-25 | 1999-01-04 | Du Pont | Herbicidal sulphonamides |
ATE344279T1 (en) | 1995-12-13 | 2006-11-15 | Univ California | CRYSTALS OF THE LIGAND-BINDING DOMAIN OF THE THYROID HORMONE RECEPTOR COMPLEXED WITH A LIGAND |
US5770615A (en) | 1996-04-04 | 1998-06-23 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Catecholamine surrogates useful as β3 agonists |
DE19616486C5 (en) | 1996-04-25 | 2016-06-30 | Royalty Pharma Collection Trust | Method for lowering the blood glucose level in mammals |
US5962440A (en) | 1996-05-09 | 1999-10-05 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Cyclic phosphonate ester inhibitors of microsomal triglyceride transfer protein and method |
US5827875A (en) | 1996-05-10 | 1998-10-27 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Inhibitors of microsomal triglyceride transfer protein and method |
US5885983A (en) | 1996-05-10 | 1999-03-23 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Inhibitors of microsomal triglyceride transfer protein and method |
HRP970330B1 (en) | 1996-07-08 | 2004-06-30 | Bayer Ag | Cycloalkano pyridines |
US6011155A (en) | 1996-11-07 | 2000-01-04 | Novartis Ag | N-(substituted glycyl)-2-cyanopyrrolidines, pharmaceutical compositions containing them and their use in inhibiting dipeptidyl peptidase-IV |
TW492957B (en) * | 1996-11-07 | 2002-07-01 | Novartis Ag | N-substituted 2-cyanopyrrolidnes |
US5952322A (en) | 1996-12-05 | 1999-09-14 | Pfizer Inc. | Method of reducing tissue damage associated with non-cardiac ischemia using glycogen phosphorylase inhibitors |
US5760246A (en) | 1996-12-17 | 1998-06-02 | Biller; Scott A. | Conformationally restricted aromatic inhibitors of microsomal triglyceride transfer protein and method |
GB9713739D0 (en) | 1997-06-27 | 1997-09-03 | Karobio Ab | Thyroid receptor ligands |
DE19742601A1 (en) * | 1997-09-26 | 1999-04-29 | Siemens Ag | Method and device for generating frames around video images |
UA57811C2 (en) | 1997-11-21 | 2003-07-15 | Пфайзер Продактс Інк. | Compositions including aldose reductase inhibitors and glycogen phosphorylase inhibitors |
US6803357B1 (en) | 1998-02-02 | 2004-10-12 | New England Medical Center Hospitals, Inc. | Method of regulating glucose metabolism, and reagents related thereto |
US5998463A (en) | 1998-02-27 | 1999-12-07 | Pfizer Inc | Glycogen phosphorylase inhibitors |
ID25505A (en) | 1998-02-27 | 2000-10-05 | Pfizer Prod Inc | N-CARBONIL (RING RULES FULFILLED IN-OR TRIAZA OF GUANIDINE SUBSTITUTED LIMA FOR TREATMENT OF ISCHEMIA |
UA74133C2 (en) * | 1998-03-19 | 2005-11-15 | Вертекс Фармасьютикалс Інкорпорейтед | caspase inhibitors |
DE19828114A1 (en) | 1998-06-24 | 2000-01-27 | Probiodrug Ges Fuer Arzneim | Produgs of unstable inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV |
EP0978279A1 (en) | 1998-08-07 | 2000-02-09 | Pfizer Products Inc. | Inhibitors of human glycogen phosphorylase |
KR20010079669A (en) | 1998-08-21 | 2001-08-22 | 바바라 피. 월너 | Regulation of Substrate Activity |
CO5150173A1 (en) | 1998-12-10 | 2002-04-29 | Novartis Ag | COMPOUNDS N- (REPLACED GLYCLE) -2-DIPEPTIDYL-IV PEPTIDASE INHIBITING CYANOPIRROLIDINS (DPP-IV) WHICH ARE EFFECTIVE IN THE TREATMENT OF CONDITIONS MEDIATED BY DPP-IV INHIBITION |
WO2000038722A1 (en) | 1998-12-23 | 2000-07-06 | G.D. Searle & Co. | COMBINATIONS OF CHOLESTERYL ESTER TRANSFER PROTEIN INHIBITORS AND HMG CoA REDUCTASE INHIBITORS FOR CARDIOVASCULAR INDICATIONS |
EP1156803A4 (en) | 1999-02-09 | 2004-03-17 | Bristol Myers Squibb Co | LACTAM INHIBITORS OF FXa AND METHOD |
JP2002536410A (en) | 1999-02-12 | 2002-10-29 | ノボ ノルディスク アクティーゼルスカブ | Use of a pyrrolidine derivative in the manufacture of a pharmaceutical composition for treating or preventing obesity or regulating appetite |
AU3960400A (en) | 1999-03-05 | 2000-09-28 | Molteni L. E C. Dei Fratelli Alitti Societa' Di Esercizio S.P.A. | Use of metformin in the preparation of pharmaceutical compositions capable of inhibiting the enzyme dipeptidyl peptidase iv |
GB9906714D0 (en) | 1999-03-23 | 1999-05-19 | Ferring Bv | Compositions for improving fertility |
GB9906715D0 (en) | 1999-03-23 | 1999-05-19 | Ferring Bv | Compositions for promoting growth |
PT1041068E (en) | 1999-04-01 | 2004-07-30 | Pfizer Prod Inc | COMPOUNDS FOR THE TREATMENT AND PREVENTION OF DIABETIC COMPLICATIONS |
JP4121215B2 (en) | 1999-05-17 | 2008-07-23 | 財団法人微生物化学研究会 | Sulfostin analog, and method for producing sulfostine and its analog |
US6110949A (en) | 1999-06-24 | 2000-08-29 | Novartis Ag | N-(substituted glycyl)-4-cyanothiazolidines, pharmaceutical compositions containing them and their use in inhibiting dipeptidyl peptidase-IV |
US6395767B2 (en) * | 2000-03-10 | 2002-05-28 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and method |
CA2436774A1 (en) | 2001-01-30 | 2002-08-08 | R. Michael Lawrence | Sulfonamide lactam inhibitors of factor xa |
DE10132375A1 (en) | 2001-07-07 | 2003-01-16 | Trench Germany Gmbh | Method and device for producing an electrical plastic insulator |
US7250529B2 (en) | 2004-09-17 | 2007-07-31 | Albemarle Corporation | Synthesis process for 2-(3-hydroxy-1-adamantyl)-2-oxoacetic acid |
US7205432B2 (en) | 2005-05-31 | 2007-04-17 | Kemfine Oy | Process for the preparation of adamantane derivatives |
US7338961B2 (en) | 2005-06-17 | 2008-03-04 | Apogee Biotechnology Corporation | Sphingosine kinase inhibitors |
-
2001
- 2001-02-16 US US09/788,173 patent/US6395767B2/en not_active Ceased
- 2001-02-28 EG EG2001020212A patent/EG25854A/en active
- 2001-03-05 AU AU2001245466A patent/AU2001245466B2/en active Active
- 2001-03-05 EP EP01918383A patent/EP1261586B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 2001-03-05 PL PL365520A patent/PL207041B1/en unknown
- 2001-03-05 RU RU2002125491/04A patent/RU2286986C2/en active Protection Beyond IP Right Term
- 2001-03-05 ES ES15186007T patent/ES2768961T3/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 2001-03-05 IL IL15137201A patent/IL151372A0/en unknown
- 2001-03-05 KR KR1020067004515A patent/KR100758407B1/en active IP Right Grant
- 2001-03-05 CZ CZ2015493A patent/CZ307821B6/cs not_active IP Right Cessation
- 2001-03-05 BR BRPI0109115A patent/BRPI0109115B8/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 2001-03-05 NZ NZ520821A patent/NZ520821A/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 2001-03-05 KR KR1020027011806A patent/KR100754089B1/en active IP Right Review Request
- 2001-03-05 HU HU1200545A patent/HU230347B1/en unknown
- 2001-03-05 TW TW090104965A patent/TWI258468B/en active
- 2001-03-05 CZ CZ2002-2974A patent/CZ304355B6/en unknown
- 2001-03-05 WO PCT/US2001/007151 patent/WO2001068603A2/en active Application Filing
- 2001-03-05 EP EP05005368.5A patent/EP1559710B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 2001-03-05 CN CNA2005100785188A patent/CN1698601A/en active Pending
- 2001-03-05 MX MXPA02008837A patent/MXPA02008837A/en active IP Right Grant
- 2001-03-05 SG SG200405783-2A patent/SG152030A1/en unknown
- 2001-03-05 HU HU1200546A patent/HU230380B1/en unknown
- 2001-03-05 JP JP2001567699A patent/JP4460205B2/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 2001-03-05 CZ CZ2014-33A patent/CZ307784B6/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 2001-03-05 ES ES01918383T patent/ES2305062T3/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 2001-03-05 EP EP10178907.1A patent/EP2272825B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 2001-03-05 ES ES10178907.1T patent/ES2553573T3/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 2001-03-05 PT PT01918383T patent/PT1261586E/en unknown
- 2001-03-05 AT AT01918383T patent/ATE396176T1/en active
- 2001-03-05 HU HU0302792A patent/HU228110B1/en active Protection Beyond IP Right Term
- 2001-03-05 CN CNB018063152A patent/CN1213028C/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 2001-03-05 DK DK01918383T patent/DK1261586T3/en active
- 2001-03-05 DE DE60134122T patent/DE60134122D1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 2001-03-05 ES ES05005368.5T patent/ES2456667T3/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 2001-03-05 TW TW095105942A patent/TW200624420A/en unknown
- 2001-03-05 CA CA2402894A patent/CA2402894C/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 2001-03-05 DE DE122010000008C patent/DE122010000008I1/en active Pending
- 2001-03-05 AU AU4546601A patent/AU4546601A/en active Pending
- 2001-03-05 EP EP15186007.9A patent/EP2995615B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 2001-03-08 CO CO01018857A patent/CO5280198A1/en active IP Right Grant
- 2001-03-09 MY MYPI20011103A patent/MY124512A/en unknown
- 2001-03-09 AR ARP010101122A patent/AR027634A1/en active IP Right Grant
- 2001-03-12 UY UY26613A patent/UY26613A1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 2001-06-12 PE PE2001000554A patent/PE20020771A1/en not_active Application Discontinuation
-
2002
- 2002-08-21 IL IL151372A patent/IL151372A/en active Protection Beyond IP Right Term
- 2002-08-26 ZA ZA200206816A patent/ZA200206816B/en unknown
- 2002-09-09 NO NO20024295A patent/NO324227B1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
-
2003
- 2003-02-14 HK HK03101079.9A patent/HK1049330B/en unknown
-
2006
- 2006-07-23 IL IL177018A patent/IL177018A0/en active IP Right Grant
- 2006-07-23 IL IL177019A patent/IL177019A/en active IP Right Grant
-
2008
- 2008-08-20 CY CY20081100885T patent/CY1108273T1/en unknown
-
2010
- 2010-01-14 JP JP2010006181A patent/JP5427047B2/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 2010-02-11 BE BE2010C008C patent/BE2010C008I2/fr unknown
- 2010-02-17 LU LU91650C patent/LU91650I2/en unknown
- 2010-02-17 NL NL300436C patent/NL300436I1/en unknown
- 2010-02-22 FR FR10C0010C patent/FR10C0010I2/en active Active
- 2010-03-16 NO NO2010006C patent/NO2010006I2/en unknown
- 2010-03-30 CY CY2010005C patent/CY2010005I2/en unknown
-
2011
- 2011-06-24 HK HK11106580.0A patent/HK1152516A1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 2011-12-01 US US13/308,658 patent/USRE44186E1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
-
2012
- 2012-04-18 BE BE2012C016C patent/BE2012C016I2/fr unknown
- 2012-04-23 DE DE201212000023 patent/DE122012000023I1/en active Pending
- 2012-04-24 CY CY2012009C patent/CY2012009I1/en unknown
- 2012-04-25 LU LU91985C patent/LU91985I2/en unknown
- 2012-05-21 NO NO2012009C patent/NO2012009I2/en unknown
- 2012-11-30 JP JP2012263345A patent/JP2013040219A/en active Pending
- 2012-12-14 HU HUS1200031C patent/HUS1200031I1/en unknown
- 2012-12-14 HU HUS1200030C patent/HUS1200030I1/en unknown
-
2013
- 2013-03-20 UY UY0001034691A patent/UY34691A/en unknown
- 2013-12-02 JP JP2013249334A patent/JP5953292B2/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
-
2015
- 2015-04-28 JP JP2015092196A patent/JP5951843B2/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
Also Published As
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
CA2402894C (en) | Cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase iv and method | |
AU2001245466A1 (en) | Cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl IV, processes for their preparation, and their use | |
US6573287B2 (en) | 2,1-oxazoline and 1,2-pyrazoline-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and method | |
AU2002254557A1 (en) | 2,1-Oxazoline and 1,2-pyrazoline-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and method |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
EEER | Examination request | ||
MKEX | Expiry |
Effective date: 20210305 |